Skip to main content

Full text of "Geometrical drawing and design"

See other formats


.    .v'.'Vf-I^-vl^i 

'^:n?«-^-?;,^- V--  -<^'vf  ?V--r^^:^^*i' 

.'■    ■••»■:-.    "( 

• 

€ 

CO 

e^^ 

1 

jP 

Wi 

»— *■ 

Cjj 

3 

J 

rH 

8 

CQ 
<D 
rH 

rH 

»4 

1 

1 

f^^^"' 

J. 

1 

1 

GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING  AND  DESIGN. 


0m, 


MACMILLAN    AND   CO.,    Limited 

LONDON  •  BOMBAY  •  CALCUTTA 
MELBOURNE 

THE   MACMILLAN    COMPANY 

NEW    YORK    •    BOSTON    •    CHICAGO 
DALLAS     •    SAN    FRAKCLSCO 

THE   MACMILLAN    CO.    OF   CANADA,    Ltd, 

TORONTO 


GEOMETRICAL 
DRAWING  AND  DESIGN 


BY 

J.    HUMPHREY    SPANTON 

GOLD    MEDALLIST,    ROYAL    ACADEMY    OF    ARTS,    LONDON 

INSTRUCTOR   IN    DRAWING   TO   NAVAL   CADETS   IN    H.M.S.    "hRITANNIa' 

AUTHOR   OF    "complete   PERSPECTIVE   COURSE*' 


ADAPTED    TO    THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF 
THE   BOARD  OF  EDUCATION 


MAC^riLLAN    AND    CO.,    LIMITED 

ST.    MARTIN'S    STREET,    LONDON 

1913 


'S'SIOO 


1 


COPYRIGHT. 

First  Eflition  100?. 

Repi-intcd  ]004;  with  alterations  and  additions  1006. 

Reprinted  1009,  1011,  with  additions  1013. 


Me. 

Si 


GLASGOW  :     PRINTKD    AT    THE    UNIVERSITV    PRESS 
BY    ROBERT    IMACt.EHOSE    AND    CO.    LTD. 


■Mi' 


PREFACE. 


A  COURSE  of  geometrical  drawing  or  practical  geometry  pro- 
vides a  valuable  preliminary  training  for  so  many  handicrafts 
and  professions  that  it  must  be  regarded  as  essential  to  all 
students  whose  work  is  to  be  adapted  to  modern  requirements. 
The  Engineer,  the  Architect,  the  Soldier,  and  the  Statistician, 
all  have  recourse  to  the  assistance  of  practical  geometry  to  solve 
their  problems  or  to  explain  their  methods.  Every  day  the 
graphic  treatment  of  subjects  is  finding  its  application  in  new 
directions  ;  and  to  be  able  to  delineate  the  proportions  of  any 
scheme  places  in  the  hand  an  invaluable  tool  for  the  execution 
of  work  of  practical  value. 

The  Author's  complete  geometrical  course  has  now  for  some 
time  been  widely  used  for  the  advanced  parts  of  the  subject; 
such  as  Projection,  Section  and  Interpenetration  of  Solids. 
Hence  the  publication  of  its  simpler  parts  as  an  introduction 
to  Design  would  seem  likely  to  meet  with  favour. 

The  geometrical  basis  of  ornamentation  is  the  rational  one, 
though  youth  and  fancy  might  condemn  it  as  a  chaining  of 
Pegasus  and  the  curbing  of  imagination.  It  is  no  doubt  the 
height  of  art  to  conceal  the  scheme  of  treatment  and  delight 
the  eye  with  novel  suggestions  of  development.  But  underlying 
all  is  the  demand  of  Nature  for  order  and  rhythm,  such  as 
can  be  obtained  by  a  study  of  geometrical  figures  and  designs. 

The  course  of  work  prescribed  in  Geometrical  Drawing  (Art) 
by  the  Board  of  Education  aims  at  giving  students  the  ability 
to   construct   ordinary  geometrical  figures,   and   the   power  to 


PREFACE. 


apply  these  figures  as  the  basis  of  ornamental  and  decorative 
work.  In  the  preparation  of  the  present  volume  these  intentions 
have  been  borne  in  mind,  but  the  scope  of  the  work  has  not 
been  limited  by  the  syllabus  of  the  subject.  The  greater 
part  of  the  book  contains  an  elementary  course  of  constructive 
geometry  suitable  for  all  students,  and  the  sections  which  show 
the  applications  of  geometrical  constructions  to  design,  while 
of  especial  importance  to  students  of  appHed  art,  are  not 
without  interest  to  students  of  science.  Moreover,  familiarity 
with  the  constructions  in  the  early  part  of  the  book  provides 
the  best  introduction  a  pupil  could  have  to  the  study  of  formal 
geometry. 

The  Editor's  thanks  are  due  to  Prof  Thos.  C.  Simmonds, 
the  Headmaster  of  the  Municipal  School  of  Art,  Derby,  for 
his  valuable  advice,  and  to  Mr.  E.  E.  Clark,  his  assistant,  by 
whom  the  drawings  for  the  sections  on  Design  have  been 
furnished.  Acknowledgment  must  also  be  made  of  assistance 
rendered  by  Prof  R.  A  Gregory  in  arranging  the  book  and 
seeing  it  through  the  press. 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Drawing  Instruments  and   Materials.  -         -         .         .         -  i 

General  Directions,  ---------  3 

CHAPTER   I. 
Geometrical  Definitions  and  General  Properties,       ...  6 

PLANE    GEOMETRY. 

CHAPTER   II. 
Lines,  Triangles,  Quadrilaterals,  Convergent  Lines,  and  Circles,         15 

CHAPTER   III. 
General  Information  concerning  Polygons,         -         -         -         -         30 
General  Methods  for  constructing  Polygons,     -         -         -         -         32 

CHAPTER   IV. 
Inscribed  and  Described  Figures, 40 

CHAPTER   V. 
Foiled  Figures, 53 


viii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER    VI. 

PAGE 

Tangents  a-  '    tangential  Arcs, 57 

CHAPTER  VIL 

Proportional  Lines, -         -         -  72 

CHAPTER   Vni. 

Construction  of  Plain  Scales,      -         -         -         -         -         -         -  81 

,,             ,,    Comparative  Scales, 84 

,,            ,,    Diagonal  Scales, 86 

,,             ,,    Proportional  Scales, 89 

CHAPTER   IX. 

The  Use  of  the  Protractor,       -------  92 

The  Use  of  the  Sector, -         -  94 

CHAPTER  X. 

Construction  of  Similar  Figures, 101 

Principles  of  Similitude,  or  the  Enlargement  and  Reduction  of 

Plane  Figures, 103 

CHAPTER  XL 

The  Conic  Sections — 107 

Practical  Method  for  drawing  the  Conic  Sections,     -         -  107 

Mechanical  Methods  for  drawing  the  Ellipse,   -         -         -  108 

The  Ellipse, -         -  108 

The  Parabola,             112 

The  Hyperbola,          -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -  113 

Mechanical  Methods  for  drawing  the  Parabola  and  Hyper- 
bola,   114 

Cycloidal  Curves, 116 

Spirals,      -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -121 


CONTENTS  ix 

SOLID -GEOMETRY. 

CHAPTER   XII. 

Page 

itroduction, 126 

CHAPTER    XIII. 

Simple  Solids  in  given  Positions  to  Scale,        -         -         -         -  132 

The  Regular  Solids, 142 

Octagonal  Pyramids,  Cones,  Cylinders,  and  Spheres,       -         -  146 

CHAPTER   XIV. 

\  rthographic  Projection,  -         -         - 157 

,,           Lines, 158 

,,           Planes, 162 

CHAPTER   XV. 

Sections  of  Solids,  Construction  of  Sectional  Areas,         -         -  169 

,,        ,,  a  Cone,          -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -  '75 

„         ,,  a  Cylinder,     -         - I79 

,,         ,,  a  Sphere, 180 


DESIGN. 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

Construction  Lines  on  which  Patterns  are  arranged,   -         -         -  184 

Units  of  Pattern,       .         .         - 193 

Spacing  of  Walls  and  other  Surfaces, 196 

Bands  and  Borders,            -         -         -         -         -         -         -         -  197 

Defined  areas, -  202 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

Lettering 

Shields, 

Diaper,  Chequer,  Spot,  Powder,        ...         - 

CHAPTER   XVIIL 
Arch  Forms  and  Tracery,           .         .         .         =         = 
Greek  and  Roman  Mouldings,  -         -         -         -         = 
Gothic  Mouldings,     -         -          ..... 
Gothic  Piers, -         - 

Miscellaneous  Exercises, 

Examination  Papers  in  Geometrical  Drawing, 


PART    I. 
PRACTICAL    PLANE    GEOMETRY. 

INTRODUCTION. 

Drawing  Instruments  and  Materials. 

The  Drawing-board. — A  very  convenient  size  to  use  for 
ordinary  purposes  is  half  Imperial  (23''  x  16")  ;  it  should  be 
made  of  well-seasoned  yellow  pine,  with  the  edges  true  and  at 
right  angles  to  each  other. 

The  Tee-square.— This  is  a  ruler  with  a  cross  piece  or  stock 
at  the  end  :  it  is  like  the  letter  T  in  shape,  hence  its  name. 
The  blade  should  be  screwed  on  to  the  stock,  and  not  mortised 
into  it,  so  as  to  allow  of  the  set-squares  being  used  up  to  the 
extreme  margin  of  the  paper,  as  illustrated  in  Fig.  i.  By 
keeping  the  stock  of  the  tee-square  pressed  closely  against  the 
edge  of  the  drawing-board,  we  are  enabled  to  draw  lines  parallel 
to  each  other. 

Set-squares. — These  are  right-angled  triangles  made  with 
given  fixed  angles  out  of  thin  pieces  of  wood  or  ebonite  :  the 
latter  is  preferable,  as  it  is  not  liable  to  warp.  The  most  useful 
angles  are  those  of  45°  and  60°. 

French  Curves. — These  are  thin  pieces  of  wood  cut  into  a 
variety  of  curves.  They  are  used  for  drawing  fair  curves,  that 
are  not  arcs  of  circles,  through  a  succession  of  points  :  the 
cycloidal  curves,  for  instance. 

Scale. — A  plain  scale  about  6  inches  long,  divided  into  inches, 
with  sub-divisions  of  eighths  on  one  edge  and  tenths  on  the 
other. 

CI  A 


2  geomp:trical  drawing  and  design. 

Pencils. — Two  degrees  of  hardness  should  be  used  :  HH  for 
drawing  in  the  construction,  and  F  for  drawing  in  the  result 
with  a  firmer  line. 

Drawing-paper.— This  should  have  a  hard  smooth  surface. 
Whatman's  "hot-pressed"  is  the  best  for  fine  work  ;  but  if  the 
drawing  has  to  be  coloured,  a  damp  sponge  should  first  be 
drawn  across  the  surface,  to  remove  the  gloss.  Cartridge-paper 
of  good  quality  is  suitable  for  ordinary  work. 

The  most  convenient  size  is  "Imperial"  (30"  x  22";,  which  can 
be  cut  to  half,  or  quarter  Imperial,  as  desired. 

Drawing-pins. — These  should  have  short  fine  points,  so  as 
not  to  make  large  holes  in  the  drawing-board. 

Dividers. — These  are  used  for  setting  off  distances  or 
dividing  lines.  There  is  a  special  kind  made,  called  "hair- 
dividers,"  one  leg  of  which  can  be  adjusted  by  means  of  a 
spring  and  screw  :  these  are  very  useful  for  dividing  lines,  etc. 

Ruling-pen. — This  is  used  for  inking  in  lines,  the  thickness 
of  which  is  regulated  by  a  screw.  Some  are  made  in  which  the 
nib  that  works  against  the  ruler  is  of  an  extra  thickness  of  metal : 
this  is  to  prevent  the  nibs  from  closing  when  the  pen  is  pressed 
against  the  ruler. 

Bow-pencil. — This  is  a  small  pair  of  compasses  with  one  leg 
constructed  to  hold  a  pencil,  used  for  drawing  circles  and  arcs. 

Bow-pen. — This  is  a  similar  instrument  to  a  bow-pencil,  but 
with  a  ruling  pen  for  one  of  its  legs  instead  of  a  pencil ;  it  is 
used  for  inking  in  circles  and  arcs. 

Note. — Both  the  bov/-pencil  and  bow-pen  should  have  hinged 
legs  ;  because,  when  a  number  of  circles  are  drawn  from  the 
same  centre,  they  are  likely  to  make  a  large  hole  in  the  paper, 
unless  the  leg  used  for  the  centre  is  kept  perpendicular  to  the 
paper.  It  is  also  necessary  to  have  the  pen-leg  as  upright  as 
possible,  otherwise  it  has  a  tendency  to  draw  uneven  lines. 

Compasses.— Full-sized  compasses  are  suppHed,  with  inter- 
changeable arms,  divider,  pen  and  pencil,  opening  to  12  inches. 

Indian  ink  should  be  used  for  inking  in  a  drawing.  It  has 
several  advantages  over  common  ink  :  it  dries  quickly  ;  it  does 
not  corrode  the  ruling-pen  ;  and  the  lines  can  be  coloured  over 
without  their  running,  if  a  waterproof  quality  is  used. 

The  most  convenient  is  the  liquid  Indian  ink,  sold  in  bottles, 


PRACTICAL   PLANE   GEOMETRY 


as  it  is  always  ready  for  use.  The  ruling-pen  should  be  filled 
with  Indian  ink  by  means  of  an  ordinary  steel  nib.  If  the  cake 
Indian  ink  is  used,  after  rubbing  it  in  a  saucer,  a  piece  of  thin 
whalebone  should  be  used  for  filling  the  ruling-pen. 

General   Directions. 

Keep  all  instruments  perfectly  clean  :  do  not  leave  ink  to 
dry  in  the  ruHng-pen. 

In  using  dividers  avoid,  as  much  as  possible,  making  holes 
through  the  paper. 

The  paper  should  be  firmly  fixed  to  the  drawing-board  by 
a  drawing-pin  at  each  corner,  well  pressed  down.  Do  not  stick 
pins  in  the  middle  of  the  board,  because  the  points  of  the 
dividers  are  liable  to  slip  into  them  and  make  unsightly  holes 
in  the  paper. 

A  pencil  sharpened  to  what  is  called  a  "  chisel-point "  is 
generally  used  for  drawing  lines  ;  it  has  the  advantage  of  retain- 
ing its  point  longer,  but  a  nicely-pointed  pencil  is  better  for 
neat  work,  as  it  enables  you  to  see  the  commencement  and 
termination  of  a  line  more  easily. 


Fig.  I. 

Always  rule  a  line  from  left  to  right,  and  slope  the  pencil 
slightly  towards  the  direction  in  which  it  is  moving  ;  if  this  is 
done,  there  is  less  chance  of  indenting  the  paper,  which  should 
always  be  avoided. 


4  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

Having  determined  the  extent  of  a  line,  always  rub  out  the 
superfluous  length  ;  this  will  prevent  unnecessary  complication. 

Avoid  using  India-rubber  more  than  is  necessary,  as  it  tends 
to  injure  the  surface  of  the  paper.  After  inkmg  in  a  drawings 
use  stale  bread  in  preference  to  India-rubber  for  cleaning  it  up. 

The  tee-square  should  be  used  for  drawing  horizontal  lines 
only  (Fig.  i) ;  the  perpendicular  lines  should  be  drawn  by 
the  set-squares.  If  this  is  done,  it  is  immaterial  whether  the 
edges  of  the  drawing-board  are  at  right  angles,  because  it  will 
only  be  necessary  to  use  one  of  its  edges. 

For  drawing  parallel  lines  that  are  neither  horizontal  nor 
perpendicular,  hold  one  set-square  firmly  pressed  upon  the 
paper  and  slide  the  other  along  its  edge  (Fig.  2).  Geometrical 
drawing  can  be  greatly  facilitated  by  the  proper  use  of  set- 
squares,  so  it  is  advisable  to  practise  their  use. 


Fig.  2. 

When  a  problem  contains  many  arcs  of  circles,  it  is  advisable 
to  connect  each  arc  with  its  corresponding  centre.  Enclose  the 
centre  in  a  small  circle  ;  draw  a  dotted  line  to  the  arc,  termi- 
nated by  an  arrow-head  (Fig.  3). 

In  drawing  intersecting  arcs  for  bisecting  lines,  etc.,  the  arcs 
should  not  intersect  each  other  too  obtusely  or  too  acutely  :  the 
nearer  the  angle  between  the  arcs  approaches  90°  the  easier  it 
will  be  to  ascertain  the  exact  point  required. 


PRACTICAL   TLANE   GEOMETRY. 


In  joining  two  points  by  a  line,  first  place  the  point  of  the 
pencil  on  one  point,  then  place  the  edge  of  the  ruler  against  it, 
and  adjust  the  ruler  till  its  edge  coincides  with  the  other  point. 


All  the  problems  should  be  drawn  larger  than  shown. 

Great  accuracy  is  required  in  drawing  the  various  problems. 
Every  effort  should  be  made  to  ensure  neatness  and  precision 
in  the  work. 

All  arcs  should  be  inked  in  first,  as  it  is  easier  to  join  a  hne  to 
an  arc  than  an  arc  to  a  line. 


CHAPTER   I. 
GEOMETRICAL   DEFINITIONS, 

A  point  simply  marks  a  position  ;  it  is  supposed  to  have  no 
magnitude. 

A  line  has  length  without  breadth  or  thickness.  The  ex- 
tremities and  intersections  of  lines  are  points.  A  straight  line 
or  right  line  is  one  that  is  in  the  same  direction  throughout 
its  length,  and  is  the  shortest  that  can  be  drawn  between  two 
points.     To  produce  a  line  is  to  lengthen  it. 

A  plane  is  a  flat  even  surface  ;  it  has  length  and  breadth 
only.     The  intersections  of  planes  are  straight  lines. 

Parallel  lines  are  straight  lines  in  the 

same  plane,  and  at  equal  distances  apart 

throughout  their  entire  length  ;   if  pro-     " 

duced  they  would  never  meet  (Fig.  4),  ^'^-  4- 

A  circle  is  a  plane  figure  bounded  by  a  curved  line,  such  that 
all   straight  lines    drawn    to   it   from    a 
certain  point  are  equal.     This   point  is 
called  the  centre,    and   the  curved  line 
is  called  the  circumference  of  the  circle. 

A  straight  line  drawn  from  the  centre 
to  the  circumference,  as  ce  or  cd  (Fig.  5) 
is  called  a  radius.  A  straight  line  drawn 
through  the  centre,  and  terminated  at 
both  ends  by  the  circumference,  as  ab^ 
is  called  a  diameter.  A  semicircle  is 
half  a  circle,  as  adb.     A  quadrant  is  a  quarter  of  a  circle,  as  adc. 


GEOMETRICAL   DEFINITIONS. 


An  arc  is  any  portion  of  ihe  circumference  of  a  circle,  as  abc 
(Fig.  6).  A  chord  is  a  straight  line  join- 
ing the  extremities  of  an  arc,  as  ac.  A 
segment  is  the  space  enclosed  by  the 
arc  and  its  chord,  as  f.  A  sector  is  the 
space  enclosed  by  two  radii  and  the 
arc  between  them,  as  g.  A  tangent  is 
line  touching  the  circumference,  as  (ie  ; 
it  is  always  at  right  angles  to  the  radius 
of  the  circle  at  the  point  of  contact. 


Fig.  9. 


An  ordinate  is  a  line  drawn  from  a  point  m 
a  curve  perpendicular  to  the  diameter,  as  dotted 
line  in  Fig.  7. 


An   abscissa  is   the  part  of  the  diameter  cut 
off  by  the  ordinate,  as  dotted  line  in  Fig.  8. 


An  angle  is  the  inclination  of  two 
straight  lines  meeting  in  a  point.  This 
point  is  called  the  vertex  of  the  angle, 
as  a  (Fig.  9).  The  angle  here  shown 
would  be  called  either  dac  or  cad. 

If  two  adjacent  angles  made  by  two  straight  lines  at  the 
point  where  they  meet  be  equal,  as  f^ca  and  deb  (Fig.  5),  each 
of  these  angles  is  called  a  right  angle,  and  either  of  the  straight 
lines  may  be  said  to  be  perpendicular  to  the  other. 

A  right  angle  is  supposed  to  be  divided  into  90  equal  parts, 
each  of  which  is  called  a  degree.  A  degree  is  expressed  in 
writing  by  a  small  circle  placed  over  the  last  figure  of  the 
numerals  denoting  the  number  of  degrees — thus  36°  means 
thirty-six  degrees. 

The  circumference  of  a  circle  is  supposed  to  be  divided  into 
360  equal  arcs,  each  of  which  subtends  an  angle  of  1°  at  the 
centre.     Sometimes  this  arc  is  itself  loosely  termed  a  degree. 

An  angle  containing  more  than  90°  is  called  an  obtuse  angle, 
as  ecd  (Fig.  5) ;  while  an  angle  containing  less  than  90°  is  called 
an  acute  angle,  as  ace. 


8 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND  DESIGN. 


A  line  is  said  to  be  perpendicular  to  a  plane  when  it  is  at 
right  angles  to  any  straight  line  in  that  plane  which  meets  it. 
Concentric  circles  have  the  same  centre. 

Triangles. 

Triang-ies  are  closed  figures  contained  by  three  straight  lines. 

A  triangle  which  has  all  its  sides  equal  is 
called  equilateral  (Fig.  lo). 

N.B. — Such  a  triangle  will  always  have  its 
three  angles  equal,  and  therefore  will  also  be 
equiangular. 


A  triangle  which  has  two  sides  (and  there- 
fore two  angles)  equal  is  called  isosceles  (Fig.  1 1) 
{isos^  equal  ;  skelos,  a  leg). 


A  scalene  triangle  has  none  of  its  sides  equal. 

A  triangle  which  has  a  right  angle  is  called 
right-angled  (Fig.  12).  The  side  opposite  to  the 
right  angle,  as  ab,  is  called  the  hypotenuse  {hypo, 
under  ;  te?iein,  to  stretch). 


A  triangle  which  has  an  obtuse  angle 
is  called  obtuse-angled  (Fig.  1 3). 


A  triangle  which  has  three  acute  angles 
is  called  acute  angled  (Fig.  14). 

Fig.  14. 

The  base  of  a  triangle  is  its  lowest  side,  as  al?  (Fig.  10). 

The  vertex  is  the  point  opposite  the  base,  as  c  (Fig.  10). 

The  altitude  or  perpendicular  height  is  a  line  drawn  from 
the  vertex  at  right  angles  to  its  base,  as  cd  {¥\^.  10). 

The  median  is  a  line  drawn  from  the  veitex  to  the  middle 
point  of  the  base. 


GEOMETRICAL   DEFINITIONS. 


Quadrilateral   Figures. 

Quadrilateral  figures  are  such  as  are  bounded  by  four  straight 
lines. 

A  quadrilateral  figure  whose 
opposite  sides  are  parallel  is 
called  a  parallelogram  (Fig.  15). 
N.B. — The  opposite  sides  and 

angles    of    parallelograms    are   ^ -^d 

equal.  fig-  ^s- 


A  parallelogram  whose  angles  are 
right  angles  is  called  a  rectangle 
(Fig.  16)  or  oblong. 


A  rectangle    which    has    its    sides    equal 
called  a  square  (Fig.  1 7). 


A  parallelogram  whose  angles 
are  not  right  angles  is  called 
a  rhombus,  if  its  sides  are  all 
equal  (Fig.  18),  or  a  rhomboid  if 
the  opposite  sides  alone  are 
equal — Gk.  rhombos^  from  rhein- 
bein^  to  twirl,  from  some  likeness 
to  a  spindle. 

All  other  quadrilaterals  are  called  trapeziums. 

A  line  joining  two  opposite  angles  of  a  quadrilateral  figure  is 
called  a  diagonal,  as  the  dotted  line  ab  (Fig.  1 5). 


Polygons. 

A  polygon  is  a  plane  figure  which  has  more  than  four  angles. 
A  polygon  which  is  both  equilateral  and  equiangular  is  called 
regular. 


10  GEOMETRICAL    DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

A  polygon  of  five  sides  is  called  a  pentagon. 
„         „        six  „  „         hexagon. 

„         „        seven      „  „         heptagon. 

„         „        eight       „  „   an  octagon,  etc. 

Solids. 

A  solid  has  length,  breadth,  and  thickness.  A  solid  bounded 
wholly  by  planes  is  called  a  polyhedron  {poly^  many  ;  hedra^  a 
side). 

A  solid  bounded  by  six  planes  or  faces,  whereof  the  opposite 
ones  are  parallel,  is  called  a  parallelepiped  {pa?-aUelos,  parallel  ; 
and  epipedon^  a  plane). 

A  parallelepiped  whose  angles  are  all  right  angles  is  called  a 
rectangular  parallelepiped  or  orthohedron  {ort/ios,  right ;  and  hedra^ 
a  side). 

An  orthohedron  with  six  equal  faces  is  called  a  cube  {kudos,  a 
die). 

A  polyhedron,  all  but  one  of  whose  faces  meet  in  a  point,  is 
called  a  pyramid  (Gk.  pyrainis,  a  pyramid). 

Pyramids  are  often  named,  after  the  shape  of  their  bases, 
triangular,  square,  etc. 

A  polyhedron,  all  but  two  of  whose  faces  are  parallel  to  one 
straight  line,  is  called  a  prism  (Gk.  prisma,  irom.  prizein,  to  saw, 
a  portion  sawn  off). 

If  the  ends  of  a  prism  are  at  right  angles  to  the  straight  line 
to  which  the  other  faces  are  parallel  it  is  called  a  right  prism. 

Prisms  are  often  named,  after  the  shape  of  their  ends, 
triangular,  hexagonal,  etc. 

A  cylinder  is  a  solid  described  by  the  revolution  of  a  rect- 
angle about  one  of  its  sides  which  remains  fixed.  This  fixed 
line  is  called  the  axis  of  the  cylinder. 

A  right  circular  cone — generally  spoken  of  simply  as  a  cone 
— is  a  solid  described  by  the  revolution  of  a  right-angled  triangle 
about  one  of  the  sides  containing  the  right  angle,  which  side 
remains  fixed.  This  fixed  line  is  called  the  axis  of  the  cone  ; 
the  base  is  a  circle,  and  the  point  opposite  the  base  is  called 
the  vertex. 

A  solid  bounded  by  a  closed  surface,  such  that  all  straight 


GEOMETRICAL   DEFINITIONS. 


lines  drawn  to  it  from  a  certain  point  are  equal,  is  called  a 
sphere  (Gk.  sphatra,  a  ball). 

The  point  referred  to  is  called  the  centre  of  the  sphere. 


Technical   Definitions. 

A  plane  parallel  to  the  ground,  or,  more  strictly  speaking, 
parallel  to  the  surface  of  still  water,  is  called  a  horizontal  plane. 

A  vertical  plane  is  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  a  horizontal 
plane. 

A  horizontal  line  is  a  line  parallel  to  a  horizontal  plane. 

A  vertical  line  is  a  line  at  right  angles  to  a  horizontal  plane. 


Fig.  19. 

The  plan  of  an  object  is  the  tracing  made  on  a  horizontal  plane 
by  the  foot  of  a  vertical  line,  which  moves  so  as  to  pass  succes- 
sively through  the  various  points  and  outlines  of  the  object,  as 
A  and  B  (Fig.  19). 


12 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


An  elevation  of  an  object  is  the  tracing  made  on  a  vertical 
plane  by  the  end  of  a  horizontal  line,  at  right  angles  to  the 
vertical  plane,  which  moves  so  as  to  pass  successively  through 
the  various  points  and  outlines  of  the  object,  as  A'  and  B' 
(Fig.  19). 

N.B. — A  is  an  object  parallel  to  the  vertical  plane,  and  B  an 
object  inclined  to  it. 


General   Properties   of  some   of  the   Figures 
already  described. 

If  two  lines  cross  each  other  the  opposite  angles  are  always 
equal.      The    angle    acb    is 
equal  to  the  angle  dee,  and 
the  angle  aed  is  equal  to  the 
angle  bee  (Fig.  20).  ^" 

The  two  adjacent  angles 
are  equal  to  two  right  angles  ; 
the  angles  aed  and  aeb^  for 
instance,  as  well  as  the  angles  bee  and 


Fig.  20. 


:d. 


Triangles.— The  three  angles  of  a  triangle  con- 
tain together  180°,  or  two  right  angles  ;  so  if  two 
angles  are  given,  the  third  angle  can  always  be 
found.  F^or  example,  if  one  angle  is  70°  and  the 
other  30°,  the  remaining  angle  must  be  80°  (Fig.  21). 
70° +  30°=  100°. 
1 80°-  1 00°  =  80°. 


The  exterior  angle  of  a 
triangle  is  equal  to  the  two 
opposite  interior  angles. 
The  angle  abe  is  equal  to  the 
angles  bed  and  edb  together ; 
in  the  same  way  the  angle 
ede  is  equal  to  the  two  angles  ^ 
bed  and  ebd  (Fig,  22). 


b  d  e 

Fig.  22. 

If  we  multiply  the  base  by  half  the  altitude,  we  get  the  area 
of  a  triangle  ;  or  half  its  base  by  its  altitude  will  give  us  the 
same  result. 


GEOMETRICAL   DEFINITIONS. 


!3 


Triangles  of  equal  bases  drawn  between  parallel  lines  are 
equal  in  area,  and  lines  drawn  parallel  to  their  bases  at  equal 
heights  are  equal  in  length,  as  the  dotted  lines  shown  (Fig.  23). 


Fig.  23. 


If  we  bisect  two  sides  of  a  triangle  and  join 
the  points  of  bisection,  we  get  a  line  that  is 
always  parallel  to  the  third  side  (Fig.  24). 


Quadrilaterals. — If  we  bisect  the  four 
sides  of  a  quadrilateral  figure  and  join 
the  points,  it  will  always  give  us  a 
parallelogram,  as  shown  by  dotted 
lines.  The  reason  for  this  will  be 
apparent  by  the  principle  shown  in  the 
preceding  figure  if  we  draw  a  diagonal 
of  the  quadrilateral,  so  as  to  form  two 
triangles  (Fig.  25). 


Fig.  25. 


Parallelograms  drawn  between  parallel  lines  on  equal  bases 
are  always  equal  in  area,  and  parallel  lines  drawn  at  equal 
heights  are  always  equal  to  each  other  and  to  the  bases,  as 
shown  by  dotted  lines  (Fig.  26). 


Fig,  26. 


14 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


Semicircles. — Any  two  lines  drawn 
from  the  extremities  of  the  diameter, 
to  a  point  on  the  circumference  of  a 
semicircle,  will  form  a  right  angle. 


Fig.  27. 


EXERCISES. 

Note. — Feet  are  represented  by  one  dash  {'),  and  inches  by  two 
dashes  (")  ;  3  feet  6  inches  would  be  written  thus — 3'  6". 

1.  Draw  lines  of  the  following  lengths:   3",  45",  2|",    ig",   2.25", 
3.50",  1.75". 

2.  Draw  an  acute  angle,  and  an  obtuse  angle. 

3.  Draw  the  following  triangles,  viz.  equilateral,  scalene,  isosceles, 
obtuse-angled,  right-angled,  and  acute-angled. 

4.  Draw  a  right-angled  triangle,  and  write  the  following  names  to 
its  different  parts,  viz.  hypotenuse,  vertex,  base,  median,  and  altitude. 

5.  Draw   the   following   figures,    viz.    rectangle,    rhombus,    square, 
rhomboid,   trapezium,  and  parallelogram. 

6.  Draw  a  circle,  and  name  the  different  parts,  viz.  sector,  radius, 
chord,  arc,  diameter,  segment,  and  tangent. 


CHAPTER    11. 

PROBLEMS  ON  LINES,   TRIANGLES,   QUADRILATERALS, 
CONVERGENT  LINES,  AND  CIRCLES. 


Lines. 


1.    To  bisect  a  given  straight   line 
AB. 

From  A  and  B  as  centres,  with 
any  radius  greater  than  half  the 
hne,  describe  arcs  cutting  each 
other  in  C  and  D  ;  join  CD.  The 
straight  hne  CD  will  bisect  AB  in 
E.  Also  the  line  CD  will  be  per- 
pendicular to  AB. 


2.    To  bisect  a  given  arc  AB. 

Proceed  in  the  same  way  as  in 
Problem  i,  using  the  extremities 
of  the  arc  as  centres.  The  arc 
AB  is  bisected  at  E. 


i6  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

3.   To  draw  a  line  parallel  to  a  given  line  AB  through  a  given 
point  C. 

p                                ^  ^  Take  any  point  D  in  line 

,''p -^ AB,   not  opposite  the  point 

\                                   \  C ;  with  D  as  centre,  and  DC 

\                                     V  as    radius,   describe    an    arc 

\                                     «  cutting  AB  in   E,  and  from 

\  15                          £_'.  C  as  centre,  with  the  same 

c_           '           ■"  B      radius,  draw  another  arc  DF ; 

Fig.  30-  set  off  the  length  EC  on  DF  ; 

a  line  drawn  through  CF  will  be  parallel  to  AB. 


4.   To  draw  a  line  parallel  to  a  given  line  AB  at  a  given  distance 
from  it. 

p  r.        Let  the  length  of  the  line  C 

"^        ''  ""  represent  the  given  distance. 

Take  any  points   D   and   E 

in  line  AB  as  centres,  and 

with    C    as    radius    describe 

Ad  E  ^    arcs  as  shown ;  draw  the  line 

FG    as   a   tangent    to   these 
arcs.     FG  will  be  parallel  to 


Fig.  31-  AB. 


5.   From  a  point  C  in  a  given  line  AB,  to  draw  a  line 
perpendicular  to  AB. 


F 


c 

Fig.  32. 


At  the  point  C,  with  any 
radius,  describe  arcs  cutting 
AB  in  D  and  E  ;  with  D 
and  E  as  centres,  and  with 
any  radius,  draw  arcs  inter- 
secting    at     F  ;     join     FC, 

c  <  which  will  be  perpendicular 

— ! r,  to  AB. 


PROBLEMS. 


6.    To  draw  a  perpendicular  to  AB  from  a  point  at,  or  near,  the  end 
of  the  given  line. 


With  B  as  centre,  and  with 
any  radius  BC,  draw  the  arc 
CDE ;  and  with  the  same 
radius,  starting  at  C,  set  off 
points  D  and  E  ;  with  each  of 
these  two  points  as  centres 
and  with  any  radius,  draw  arcs 
cutting  each  other  at  F  ;  join 
FB,  which  will  be  perpendicular 
to  AB. 


F^ 


Fig-  33- 


7.  To   draw  a  line  perpendicular  to  a  given  line,  from  a  point 

which  is  without  the  line. 

C 

Let  AB  be  the  given  line 
and  C  the  point. 

With  C  as  centre,  and  with 
any  radius  greater  than  CD, 

draw   arcs    cutting    the    line  i— ___ 

AB  in  E  and  F  ;  from  these       ^        ^^  ~ 
points  as   centres,  with  any 
radius,    describe    arcs    inter- 
secting at  G  ;  join  CG,  which 
will  be  perpendicular  to  AB. 

Fig.  34. 

8.  To  draw  a  perpendicular  to  AB  from  a  point  opposite,  or  nearly- 

opposite,  to  one  end  of  the  Une. 

r 
Let  C  be  the  given  point. 
Take  any  point  D  in  AB,  not 
opposite  the  point  C  ;  join 
CD  and  bisect  it  in  E  ;  with 
E  as  centre,  and  EC  as  radius, 
draw  the  semi-circle  CFD  ; 
join  CF,  which  will  be  per- 
pendicular to  AB. 


zy 


Fig.  35- 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


To  divide  a  given  line  AB  into  any  number  of  equal  parts. 
Take  five  for  example. 


.D 


B 


Fig.  36. 

into  five  equal  parts. 


F'rom     one    extremity    A, 

draw  AD,   at   any  angle   to 

AB  ;  and  from  B,  draw  BC, 

parallel  to   AD.      With  any 

convenient     radius,     set    off 

along  AD,  commencing  at  A, 

^ ,  K'" '  four    parts    (the    number    of 

parts,  less  one,  into  which  it 

is  required  to  divide  the  given  line),  repeat 

the  same  operation  on  BC,  commencing  at 

B,  with   same   radius  ;   join   the  points  as 

shown,  and  the  given  line  AB  will  be  divided 


10. 

c 

/A 


Another  Method. 

Draw  AC  at  any  angle  to 
AB  ;  AC  may  be  of  any  con- 
venient length.  With  any 
radius,  mark  off  along  AC 
the  number  of  equal  parts  re- 
\  quired ;  join  the  last  division 

\  C  with  B  ;   draw  lines  from 

__i  all  the  other  points  parallel  to 

B       CB,  till  they  meet  AB,  which 
will  be  divided  as  required. 


Fig.  37- 

m.    From  a  given  point  B,  in  a  given  line  AB,  to  construct  an 


angle  equal  to  a  given  angle  C. 


From  point  C  of  the  given 
angle  as  centre,  and  with 
any  radius,  draw  the  arc 
EF :  and  with  the  same 
radius,  with  B  as  centre, 
draw  the  arc  GH  ;  take  the 
length  of  the  arc  EF,  and 
set  it  off  on  GH  ;  draw  the 
line  BD  through  H.  Then 
the  angle  GBH  will  be  equal 
to  the  given  angle  C. 


PROBLEMS. 


12. 


To  bisect  a  given  angle 
ABC. 


From  B  as  centre,  and  with 
any  radius,  draw  the  arc  AC  ; 
from  A  and  C  as  centres,  with 
any  radius,  draw  the  arcs  inter- 
secting at  D  ;  join  DB,  which 
will  bisect  the  angle  ABC. 


13.    To  trisect  a  right  angle. 

Let  ABC  be  the  right  angle. 
From  B  as  centre,  and  with  any 
radius,  draw  the  arc  AC  ;  with 
the  same  radius,  and  A  and  C  as 
centres,  set  off  points  E  and  D; 
join  EB  and  DB,  which  will 
trisect  the  right  angle  ABC. 

Fig.  40. 

14.  To  trisect  any  angle  ABC^ 
From  B,  with  any  radius  describe  the  arc  AHC 
the  angle  ABC  ;  join  A  and  C 
cutting  the  bisector  in  D  ;  with 
D  as  centre,  and  with  DA  as 
radius,  describe  the  semicircle 
AGC,  cutting  the  bisector  in  G ; 
and  with  the  same  radius,  set 
off  the  points  E  and  F  from  A 
and  C  ;  join  AG  ;  take  the 
length  AG  and  set  it  off  from 
H  along  the  line  GB,  which 
will  give  the  point  I  ;  join  EI 
and  FI,  which  will  give  the 
points  J  and  K  on  the  arc  AHC  ; 
join  J  and  K  with  B,  which  wil 

1  This  is  one  of  the  impossibiUties  of  geometry  ;  but  this  problem,  devised 
by  the  author,  gives  an  approximation  so  near,  that  the  difference  is  imper- 
ceptible in  ordmary  geometrical  drawing. 


bisect 


Fig.  41. 

trisect  the  angle  ABC. 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


Triangrles. 


D 


15.    To  construct  an  equilateral 
triangle  on  a  given  line  AB. 

From  A  and  B  as  centres,  and 
with  AB  as  radius,  describe  arcs 
cutting  each  other  at  C  ;  join  C 
with  A  and  B.  Then  ABC  will 
be  an  equilateral  triangle. 


16.  On  a  given  base  AB  to  con- 
struct an  isosceles  triangle, 
the  angle  at  vertex  to  be  equal 
to  given  angle  C. 

Produce  the  base  AB  to  E, 
and  at  A  construct  an  angle  FAE 
making  with  AE  an  angle  equal 
to  C.  Bisect  the  angle  FAB 
by  the  line  AD.  From  B  draw 
a  line  making  with  AB  an  angle 
equal  to  DAB,  and  meeting 
AD  in  D.  ADB  will  be  the 
isosceles  triangle  required. 


17.  On  a  given  base  AB,  to  con- 
struct an  isosceles  triangle, 
its  altitude  to  be  equal  to  a 
given  line  CD. 

Bisect  AB  at  E,  and  erect 
a  perpendicular  EF  equal  in 
height  to  the  given  line  CD  ; 
join  AF  and  BF,  then  AFB 
will  be  the  isosceles  triangle 
required. 


Fig.  44. 


PROBLEMS. 


21 


18.    To  construct  a  triangle,  the  three  sides  A,  B,  and  C  being  given. 


Make  the  base  DE  equal  to 
the  given  line  A.  From  D  as 
centre,  and  with  radius  equal  to 
line  B,  describe  an  arc  at  F, 
and  from  E  as  centre,  and  with 
radius  equal  to  line  C,  draw 
another  arc,  cutting  the  other  at 
F  ;  join  FD  and  FE,  which  will 
,give  the  triangle  required. 


19.  To  construct  a  triangle  with 
two  sides  equal  to  given  lines 
A  and  B,  and  the  included 
angle  equal  to  C. 

Make  an  angle  DEF  equal 
to  given  angle  C,  in  required 
position.  Mark  off  EF  equal 
to  line  A,  and  ED  equal  to 
line  B  ;  join  DF.  DEF  is  the 
triangle  required. 


20.  To  construct  a  triangle  with 
a  perpendicular  height  equal 
to  AB,  and  the  two  sides 
forming  the  vertex  equal  to 
the  given  lines  C  and  D. 

Through  B  draw  the  Hne  EF 
at  right  angles  to  AB.  From  A 
as  centre,  and  with  radii  equal 
to  the  lengths  of  the  lines  C 
and  D  respectively,  draw  arcs 
cutting  the  line  EF  ;  join  AE 
and  AF,  which  will  give  the 
triangle  required. 


Fig. 


Fig-  47- 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


A 

/ 

Fig.  48. 

^T 


Fig.  50. 


21.  To  construct  a  triangle,  on 
the  given  base  AB,  with 
one  base  angle  equal  to  C, 
and  the  difference  of  the 
sides  equal  to  given  line  D. 

At  end  A  of  the  base,  con- 
struct an  angle  equal  to  the 
given  angle  C.  Cut  off  AF 
equal  to  line  D,  the  given' 
difference  of  the  sides  ;  join 
FB.  Bisect  FB  at  right 
angles  by  a  line  meeting  AF 
produced  in  E  ;  join  EB. 
AEB  is  the  required  triangle. 

22.  To  construct  a  triangle  on 
a  base  equal  to  given  line 
A,  with  vertical  angle  equal 
to  D,  and  sum  of  the  two  rc- 

^        maining  sides  equal  to  BE. 

Draw  the  Hne  BE,  and  at 
E  construct  an  angle  making 
with  BE  an  angle  equal  to 
half  the  given  angle  D. 
From  point  B,  with  radius 
equal  to  given  line  A,  draw 
an  arc  cutting  EC  at  C  ;  join 
BC.  Bisect  CE  at  right 
angles  by  line  FG  ;  join  FC. 

BCF  will  then  be  the  tri- 
angle required. 

23.  To  construct  a  triangle 
with  two  sides  equal  to 
the  given  lines  A  and  B 
respectively,  and  the  in- 
cluded median  equal  to 
given  line  C. 

Draw  a  triangle  with  the 
side  DE  equal  to  given  line 
A,   the    side    DF   equal    to 


PROBLEMS. 


2^ 


given  line   B,  and  the  third  side  FE  equal  to  twice  the  given 
median  C.     Bisect  the  line  FE  at  G.     Join  DG  and  produce  i*^ 
to  H,  making  GH  equal  to  DG  ;  join  EH. 
DEH  will  be  the  triangle  required. 


24.  On  a  given  base  AB  to 
describe  a  triangle  similar 
to  a  given  triangle  DEF. 

Make  angles  at  A  and  B 
equal  respectively  to  the 
angles  at  D  and  E.  Produce 
the  lines  to  meet  at  C.    Then 


ABC    will 
required. 


25. 


be    the    triangle 


Quadrilaterals. 

To  construct  a  square  on  a  given  base  AB. 
C 


At  point  A  erect  AC  perpen- 
dicular to  AB  and  equal  to  it. 
With  B  and  C  as  centres,  and 
radius  equal  to  AB,  draw  inter- 
secting arcs  meeting  at  D  ;  join 
DC  and  DB. 

CABD  is  the  square  required. 


Fig.  52. 
26.    To  construct  a  square  on  a  given  diagonal  AB. 

c 


Bisect  AB  at  right  angles  by 
the  line  CD.  Mark  off  EC  and 
ED  equal  to  EA  and  EB  ;  join 
CA  and  AD,  and  CB  and  BD. 

CADB  is  the  square  required. 


\-\E\ 


kl 


l^ig-  53 


24 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


27.    To  construct  a  rectangle  with  sides  equal  to  given  lines  A  and  B. 

Draw  the  line  CD  equal 
to  given  line  A.  At  D  erect 
a  perpendicular  DF  equal  to 
given  line  B.  With  C  as 
centre  and  radius  equal  to 
line  B,  and  with  F  as  centre 
and  radius  equal  to  line  A, 
draw  arcs  intersecting  each 
other  at  E  ;  join  EC  and 
EF,  which  will  give  the  rect- 
angle required. 

Fig.  54- 

28.   To  construct  a  rectangle  with  diagonal  equal  to  given  line  A, 


F^'"~~ 


^11-''    -G 


and    one     side    equal    to 
given  line  B. 

Draw  the  line  CD  equal 
to  given  line  A.  Bisect  CD 
at  E.  With  E  as  centre,  and 
with  radius  EC,  describe  a 
circle  ;  from  C  and  D  as 
centres,  and  with  given  line 
B  as  radius,  set  off  the  points 
F  and  G  ;  join  CO,  CD, 
DF,  and  FC. 

~  *  CGDF     is     the     required 

-~  rectangle. 

Fig.  55- 

29.    To  construct  a  rhombus  with  sides  equal  to  given  line  A,  and  angle 

equal  to  given  angle  C. 

Make  the  base  DE  equal 
to  given  line  A.  At  D  con- 
struct an  angle  equal  to  given 
angle  C.  Set  off  DF  equal 
to  DE  ;  with  F  and  E  as 
centres,  and  radius  equal  to 
DE,  draw  arcs  intersecting 
at  G  ;  join  FG  and  EG. 

DEGF  will  be  the  required 
rhombus. 


B— 


Fig.  56. 


PROBLEMS. 


25 


Bisect  the  angle  BEF  —-'" 


30.   To    draw    a    line    bisecting    the    angle    between    two    given 

converging   lines   AB   and    CD,   when   the   angular   point   is 

inaccessible.  /\ 

From  any  point  E  in  AB, 
draw  a  line  EF  parallel  to 
CD. 

by  the  line  EG.  At  any 
point  H  between  E  and  B, 
draw  HL  parallel  to  EG. 
Bisect  EG  and  HL  in  M  and 
N.  Join  MN,  which,  pro- 
duced, is  the  bisecting  line  C 
required. 
31.    Through  the  given  point  A,  to  draw  a  line  which  would,  if 

produced,  meet  at  the  same  point  as  the  given  lines  BC  and 

DE  produced. 


l-'ig-  57- 


Draw  any  convenient  line 
FG;  join  A^FandAC.  Draw 
any  line  HK  parallel  to  FG. 
At  H  draw  the  line  HL 
parallel  to  FA,  and  at  K 
draw  the  line  KL  parallel  to 
GA,  cutting  each  other  at  L. 
Draw  a  line  through  L  and 
A  ;  AU  is  the  convergent 
line  required. 

Circles. 

32.    To   find    the   centre   of   a 
circle. 

Draw  any  chord  AB,  and 
bisect  it  by  a  perpendicular 
DE,  which  will  be  a  diameter 
of  the  circle.  Bisect  DE  in 
C,  which  will  be  the  centre 
of  the  circle. 


Fig-  59- 


26 


GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


33. 


To  draw  a  circle  through  three  given  points  A,  B,  C. 

Join  AB  and  BC.  Bisect 
AB  and  BC  by  perpendi- 
culars cutting  each  other  at 
D,  which  will  be  the  centre 
of  the  circle.  From  D  as 
centre,  and  DA  as  radius, 
describe  a  circle,  which  will 
then  pass  through  the  given 
points  A,  B,  C,  as  required. 

Note.— The  two  following 
problems  are  constructed  in 
the  same  manner. 

Fig.  60. 

34.  To  draw  the  arc  of  a  circle  throug-h  three  given  points  A,  B,  C. 

35.  To  find  the  centre  of  a  circle  from  a  given  arc  AC. 

36.  At  the  given  equidistant  poihtS  A,  B,  C,  D;  etc..  on  a  given  arc, 
to  draw  a  numher  of  radial  lines,  the  centre  of  the  circle  being 
inaccessible. 

With  the  points  A,  B,  C, 

D,  etc.,  as  centres,  with  radii 
larger  than  a  division,  des- 
cribe arcs  cutting  each  other 
at  E,  F,  etc.  Thus, from  A 
and   C  as    centres,    describe 

arcs  cutting  each  other  at  E, 

Fig-  61.  J  T^  .-u      r 

and  so  on.     Draw  the  Imes 

BE,  CF,  etc.,  which  will  be  the  radial  lines  required. 

37.    To    draw  the  arc  of  a 

circle     through    three 

given  points  A,  B,  C, 

the  centre  of  the  circle 

being  inaccessible. 

With  A  and  C  as 
centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  AC,  draw  inde- 
finite arcs.  From  the 
points  C  and  A  draw  lines 
through  B  till  they  meet 


Fig.  62. 


PROBLEMS.  ?.; 


the  arcs  in  D  and  E.  From  D  and  E  set  off  short  equal 
distances  on  the  arcs  above  and  below  ;  join  the  divisions 
on  arc  AD  to  point  C,  and  the  divisions  on  arc  CE  to 
point  A.  Where  the  lines  from  corresponding  points  intersect, 
we  obtain  a  point  in  the  arc  ;  for  instance,  where  the  line  from 
Ei  intersects  the  line  from  Di,  we  get  the  point  F  ;  and  so  on 
with  the  other  points,  by  joining  which  with  a  fair  curve,  we  get 
the  required  arc. 


EXERCISES. 

'     1.    Draw  two  parallel  lines  2|"  long  and  if"  apart. 

•    2.    Draw  a  line  3.75"  long;  at  the  right-hand  end  erect  a  perpen- 
dicular 2.25"  high  ;  then,  1.50"  from  it,  another  perpendicular  i|"  high  ; 
and  bisect  the  remaining  length  by  a  line  3"  long,  at  right  angles  to  it. 
^    3.    Draw  a  line  3|"  long,  and  divide  it  into  seven  equal  parts. 

4.  Draw  a  line  2f "  long  ;  from  the  left-hand  end  mark  off  a  distance 
■equal  to  i^",  and  from  the  right-hand  end  a  distance  of  g"  ;  draw 
another  line  1.75"  long,  and  divide  it  in  the  same  proportion. 

5.  Mark  the  position  of  three  points  A,  B,  and  C — A  to  be  if" 
from  B,  B  to  be  2^"  from  C,  and  C  i|"  from  A  ;  and  join  them. 

6.  Draw  an  angle  equal  to  the  angle  ACB  in  the  preceding  question, 
and  bisect  it. 

7.  Draw  a  right  angle,  and  trisect  it  ;  on  the  same  figure  construct 
and  mark  the  following  angles,  viz.  15°,  30°,  45°,  60",  75°;  and  also 
74°,  22\\  and  y]\\ 

8.  Construct  a  triangle  with  a  base  l|"  long  ;  one  angle  at  the  base 
to  be  60°,  and  the  side  opposite  this  angle  2"  long. 

9.  Construct  a  triangle  with  a  base  2.25"  long,  and  altitude  o't 
I-75"- 

10.  On  a  base  i|"  long,  construct  an  isosceles  triangle  ;  the  angle  at 
its  vertex  to  be  30°. 

11.  Draw  a  scalene  triangle  on  a  base  2"  long  ;  and  construct  a 
similar  triangle  on  a  base  1.75"  long. 

12.  On  a  base  2^"  long  draw  a  triangle  with  the  angle  at  its  vertex 
90°. 

13.  Let  a  line  2.25"  long  represent  the  diagonal  of  a  rectangle  ; 
complete  the  figure,  making  its  shorter  sides  |"  long. 

14.  Construct  a  rhombus  with  sides  if"  long,  and  one  of  its  angles 
60°. 

15.  Draw  any  two  converging  lines,  and  through  any  point  between 
them  draw  another  line  which,  if  produced,  would  meet  in  the  same 
point  as  the  other  two  lines  produced. 


28 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


16.  Fix  the  position  of  any  three  points  not  in  the  same  line,  and 
draw  an  arc  of  a  circle  through  them. 

17.  Draw  an  arc  of  a  circle,  and  on  it  mark  the  position  of  any  three 
points  ;  from  these  points,  without  using  the  centre,  draw  lines  which, 
if  produced,  would  meet  in  the  centre  of  the  circle  containing  the  arc. 

18.  Construct  a  triangle,  the  perimeter  to  be  5.6",  and  its  sides  in 
the  proportion  of  5  :  4  :  3. 

19.  Draw  two  lines  AB,  AC  containing  an  angle  of  75''.  Find  a 
point  P,  f"  from  A 13  and  ^"  from  AC.  Complete  the  isosceles  triangle, 
of  which  BAC  is  the  vertical  angle,  and  the  base  passes  through  P. 

(June,  '00.) 

20.  Draw  the  figure  shown  (Fig.  63)  according  to  the  given  figured 
dimensions.  (May,  '97.) 


m 

\VV7 

Fig.  64. 


21.  Draw  the  pattern  (Fig.  64)  according  to  the  given  dimensions. 

(April,  '96.) 

22.  Copy    the   diagram    (Fig.    65)    enlarging   it    to   the    dimensions 
figured.  (April,  '98.) 

23.  Draw  the  figure  shown  in  the  diagram,  (Fig.  66)  making  the  side 
of  the  outer  hexagon  i^"  long.  (June,  '98.) 


''^Qll 


E 


m 


Fig.  66. 


Fig.  67. 


Fig.  68. 


24.  Draw  the  corner  ornament  shown  (Fig.  67),  using  the  figured 
dimensions,  (April,  '99.) 

25.  Draw  the  given  diagram  of  window  tracery  (Fig.  68)  using  the 
figured  dimensions.     The  arch  is  '  equilateral'.  (June,  '99.) 


PROBLEMS. 


29 


26.  Draw  the  given  outline  of  window  tracery  (Fig.  69)  using  the 
figured  dimensions.  The  arch  is  "  equilateral,"  and  all  the  arcs  are  of 
equal  radius.  (April,  '00.) 


/XX                 ; 

11 

n^r 

C 

A 

A 

A 

"^ 

-f*-. 

>fs- 

1                 1 

_J        L_ 

nX,' 

Fig.  69. 

Fig.  70. 

27.  Draw  the  given  frame  (Fig.   70),  using  the  figured  dimensions. 
The  border  is  J"  wide  throughout.  (April,  '00.) 

28.  Draw  the  given  figure  (Fig.  71),  using  the  figured  dimensions. 
(This  problem  is  intended  as  an  exercise  in  the  use  of  T  and  set  squares.) 

(June,  '00.) 


- z'  -     ■*■ 

Fig.  71. 

•                                                  '    -    J*' -.» 

Fig.  72. 

29.  Draw  the  given  figure  (Fig.  72),  using  the  figured  dimensions. 
The  spaces  are  ^"  wide  throughout.  (June  '99. ) 

30.  Construct  an  isosceles  right-angled  triangle  having  its  hypotenuse 
(or  side  opposite  the  right-angle)  2|"  long,  ^^'ithin  it  inscribe  a  square 
having  one  of  its  sides  in  the  hypotenuse  of  the  triangle.  Measure  and 
state,  as  accurately  as  you  can,  the  length  of  one  side  of  the  square. 

(June,  '01.) 
C. 


Q.  32. 


31.  The  given  figure  (Q.   31)  is  made  up  of  a  rectangle  and  semi- 
circles.     Make  a  copy  of  it,  using  the  figured  dimensions.       (June,  '02.) 

32.  Make  a  figure  similar  to  the  given  figure  (Q.  32)  and  having  the 
height  CD  increased  to  2f ".     The  centres  of  the  arcs  are  given. 

(June,  '03.) 


CHAPTER   III. 


POLYGONS. 


Regular  Polygons  are  figures  that  have  equal  sides  and  equal 
angles.    To  construct  a  regular  polygon,  we  must  have  the  length 

of  one  side  and  the  number  of 
sides  ;  if  it  is  to  be  inscribed  in 
a  circle,  the  number  of  its  sides 
will  determine  their  length. 

If  we  take  any  polygon,  regu- 
lar or  irregular,  and  produce  all 
its  sides  in  one  direction  only, 
Fig.  73,  we  shall  find  that  the 
total  of  all  the  exterior  angles, 
shown  by  the  dotted  curves,  is 
equal  to  360°,  or  four  right 
angles  ;  and  if  we  join  each 
angle  of  the  polygon  to  any 
point  in  its  centre,  the  sum  of 
the  angles  at  this  point  will  also 
be  360°,  and  there  will  be  as 
many  angles  formed  in  the  centre 
as  there  are  exterior  angles. 
In  regular  polygons  these  angles  at  the  centre  will,  of  course, 
be  equal  to  each  other  ;  and  if  we  produce  the  sides  in  one 
direction,  as  in  Fig.  73,  the  exterior  angles  will  be  equal  to  each 
other;  and  as  the  number  of  angles  at  the  centre  is  equal  to  the 
number  of  exterior  angles,  and  the  sum  of  the  angles  in  each 
instance  is  equal,  the  angle  at  the  centre  must  equal  the  exterior 
angle. 


POLYGONS. 


iiven  line  AB,  for 


To  construct  any  regular  polygon  on  the 
example,  a  nonagon, 

360° -r  9 =40°. 
So  if  we  draw  a   line   at    B, 
making  an  angle  of  40°  with 
AB  produced,  it  will  give  us 

the  exterior  angle  of  the  nona-    r 

gon,    from    which    it    will    be 
easy  to  complete  the  polygon. 

The  perimeter  of  a  polygon  is  sometimes  given,  e.g.  Construct 
an  octagon  the  perimeter  of  which  is  6  inches. 


^.-i 


B 

•  74- 


inches. 


inches,     inches. 

-   75   =  I- 


Draw  the  line  AB  this  length.  It  has  been  shown  that  the 
exterior  angles  and  those  at  the  centre  of  a  regular  polygon 
are  equal,  360° -^ 8  =  45°.  Pro- 
duce the  Hne  AB,  and  con- 
struct an  angle  of  45°.  Make 
BC  =  AB.  We  now  have  three 
points  from  which  we  can 
draw  the  circle  containing  the 
required  polygon  (Prob.  33). 

The  polygon  could  also  be 
drawn,  after  finding  the  length  of  AB,  by  any  of  the  methods 
shown  for  constructing  a  polygon  on  a  given  straight  line. 

The  centre  of  any  regular  polygon  is  the  centre  of  the  circle 
that  circumscribes  it. 

Any  regular  polygon  can  be  inscribed  in  a  circle  by 
making  angles  at  the  centre  equal  to  the  exterior  angle  as 
above. 

If  tangents  to  a  circle  circumscribing  a  regular  polygon  be 
drawn  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  inscribed  polygon,  or  if 
tangents  be  drawn  at  the  angles  of  the  inscribed  polygon,  a 
similar  figure  will  be  described  about  the  circle,  and  the 
circle  will  also  be  "  described  by,"  i.e.  contained  in,  a  similar 
figure. 

In  the  following  problems  two  general  methods  are  given  for 
constructing  regular   polygons  on   a  given    line,  and   two   for 


32 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


inscribing  them  in  a  given  circle  ;  but  as  these  general  methods 
require  either  a  line  or  an  arc  to  be  first  divided  into  equal 
divisions,  the  special  methods  for  individual  polygons  are  pre- 
ferable, which  are  also  given. 

See  also  how  to  construct  any  angle  without  a  protractor 
(Prob.  134),  and  its  application  to  polygons. 


38.    To  inscribe  in  a  circle,  a  triangle,  square,  pentagon,  hexagon, 
octagon,  decagon,  or  duodecagon. 

Describe  a  circle,  and  draw  the  two  diameters  AEand  BD  at 
right  angles  to  each  other  ;  join  BA.     AB  is  a  side  of  a  square. 

Set  off  on  circumference,  AF 
equal  to  AC  ;  AF  is  a  side  of  a 
hexagon  ;  join  AF  and  EF  ;  EF 
is  a  side  of  an  equilateral 
triangle.  With  D  as  centre, 
and  radius  equal  to  EF,  mark 
off  G  on  EA  produced.  With 
G  as  centre,  and  radius  equal  to 
AC,  set  off  H  on  circumference; 
join  AH  ;  AH  is  a  side  of  an 
octagon.  With  D  and  E  as 
centres,  and  radius  equal  to 
DC,  set  off  the  points  I  and  J  on 
circumference  ;  join  ID  ;  ID  is 
a  side  of  a  duodecagon.  With 
CG  as  radius,  and  J  as  centre,  mark  off  K  on  diameter  BD. 
With  CK  as  radius,  mark  off  on  circumference  from  B  the  points 
L  and  M  ;  join  BL  and  BM  ;  then  BL  is  the  side  of  a  decagon, 
and  BM  is  a  side  of  a. pentagon. 


Approximate  Constructions,  39  42. 

39.    To  inscribe  any  regular  polygon  in  a  given  circle; 
for  example,  a  heptagon. 

Describe  a  circle,  and  draw  the  diameter  AB.     Divide  AB 


POLYGONS. 


33 


into  as  many  equal  divisions  as  there  are  sides  to  the  polygon 
(in  this  instance  seven).  With 
A  and  B  as  centres,  and  with 
radius  equal  to  AB,  describe 
arcs  intersecting  at  C.  From  C 
draw  the  line  CD,  passing  through  * 
the  second  division  from  A,^  till 
it  meets  the  circumference  at  D. 
Join  AD,  which  will  give  one  side 
of  the  polygon ;  to  complete  it, 
mark  off  AD  round  the  circum- 
ference. 

This     method     of    constructing 
polygons    is  due  to  the   Chevalier 
Antoine     de     Ville     (1628),      and 
although  useful   for  practical  purposes,  is  not  mathematically 
correct. 


Fig.  77. 


40.   To  inscribe  any  regular  polygon  in  a  given  circle 
(second  method)  ;   for  example,  a  nonagon. 

Describe  a  circle,  and  draw  the  radius  CA.  At  A  draw  a 
tangent  to  the  circle.  With 
A  as  centre,  and  with  any 
radius,  draw  a  semicircle,  and 
divide  it  into  as  many  equal 
parts  as  there  are  sides  to 
the  polygon  (in  this  instance 
nine). 

From  point  A  draw  lines 
through  each  of  these  divisions 
till  they  meet  the  circum- 
ference. Join  these  points, 
which  will  give  the  polygon 
required. 

1  Whatever  number  of  sides  the  polygon  may  have,  the  Hne  CD  is  ahvays 
drawn  through  the  second  division  from  A. 

C 


34 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


41.    On  a  given  line  AB,  to  describe  a  regular  polygon; 
for  example,  a  heptagon. 

Produce   AB   to   C.     With  A  as  centre,  and  AB  as  radius, 

describe  a  semicircle,  and 
divide  it  into  as  many  equal 
divisions  as  there  are  sides  to 
the  polygon  (in  this  instance 
seven).  Join  A  with  the  second 
division  from  C  in  the  semi- 
circle,^  which  will  give  point 
D.  Join  AD.  Through  the 
points  DAB  describe  a  circle. 
Set  off  the  distance  AD 
round  the  circumference,  and 
join  the  points  marked,  which  will  give  the  required  polygon. 


42.    On  a  given  line  AB,  to  describe  a  regular  polygon 

(second  method)  ;  for  example,  a  pentagon. 

At  point  B  erect  a  perpendicular  equal  to  AB.     With  B  as 

centre,  and  radius  BA,  draw  the 
quadrant  AC,  and  divide  it  into 
as  many  equal  divisions  as 
there  are  sides  to  the  polygon 
(in  this  case  five). 

Join    the    point    B    with    the 

second  division  from  C.^    Bisect 

/     AB  at  D,  and  erect  a  perpendi- 

/      cular  till  it  meets  the  hne  drawn 

from  B  to  the  second  division, 

which  will  give  point  E.     From 

E   as    centre,   and   with   radius 

EB,   describe    a   circle.      From 

AB,    mark    off  round   the   circum- 


B 


Fig.  8o. 

point    A,     with     distance 


1  The  line  AD  is  always  drawn  to  the  second  division  from  C,  whatever 
number  of  sides  the  polygon  may  contain. 


POLYGONS. 


35 


ference  the  points  of  the  polygon, 
will  give  the  pentagon  required. 


Join  these  points,  which 


43.   On  a  given  straight  line  AB,  to  construct  a  regular 
pentagon.     (True  construction.) 

At  B  erect  BC  perpen- 
dicular to  AB,  and  equal 
to  it.  Bisect  AB  in  D. 
With  D  as  centre,  and  DC 
as  radius,  draw  the  arc  CE 
meeting  AB  produced  in  E. 
With  A  and  B  as  centres, 
and  radius  equal  to  AE, 
draw  arcs  intersecting  at 
F.  With  A,  B,  and  F  as 
centres,  and  radius  equal 
to  AB,  draw  arcs  intersect- 
ing at  H  and  K.  Join  AH, 
HF,  FK,  and  KB.  Then 
required. 


AHFKB  will   be   the   pentagon 


44.   On  a  given  straight  line  AB,  to  construct  a  regular  hexagon. 


With  A  and  B  as  centres, 
and  radius  AB,  draw  the  arcs 
intersecting  each  other  at  C. 
With  C  as  centre,  and  with 
the  same  radius,  draw  a  circle. 
With  the  same  radius  com- 
mencing at  A,  set  off  round 
the  circle  the  points  D,  E,  F, 
G.  Join  AD,  DE,  EF,  FG, 
and  GB,  which  will  give  the 
hexagon  required. 


E.-'---.  f 


Fig.  82. 


36 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


45.  In   a  given  circle  to  inscribe    a    regular  heptagon 
(approximately). 


Draw  any  radius  AB,  and 
bisect  it  in  C.  Through  C 
draw  DE  perpendicular  to 
AB.  With  CD  as  radius, 
commencing  at  E,  set  off 
round  the  circle  the  points 
F,  G,  H,  K,  L,  and  M,  by 
joining  which  we  get  the 
required  heptagon. 


Fig.  83. 


46.   On  a  given  line  AB,  to  construct  a  regular  heptagon 
(approximately). 

With   B   as   centre,   and   BA   as   radius,  draw   a  semicircle 

meeting  AB  produced  in 

C.  With  centre  A,  and 
radius  AB,  draw  an  arc 
cutting  the  semicircle  in 

D.  Draw  DE  perpendi- 
cular to  AB.  With  C  as 
centre,  and  radius  equal 
to  DE,  draw  an  arc  cut- 
ting the  semicircle  in  F. 
Join  BF.  From  the  three 
points  A,  B,  F,  find  the 
centre  of  the  circle  H 
(Prob.  33).  With  H  as 
centre,    and    radius    HA, 


Fig.  84. 


draw  a  circle.  With  AB  as  radius  commencing  at  F,  set  off 
on  the  circle  the  points  K,  L,  M,  and  N,  by  joining  which  we 
get  the  heptagon  required. 


POLYGONS. 


37 


47.    On  a  given  line  AB,  to  construct  a  regular  octagon. 

At  A  and  B  erect  the  perpendiculars  AC  and  BD.  Produce 
AB  to  E.  Bisect  the 
angle  DBE  by  the  line 
BF.  Make  BF  equal  to 
AB.  From  F  draw  the 
line  FH  parallel  to  AB, 
and  make  KH  equal  to 
LF.  Join  AH.  Set  off 
on  AC  and  BD,  from 
points  A  and  B,  a  length 
equal  to  H  F,  which  will 
give  the  points  C  and  D. 
With  the  points  C,  D,  H, 
and  F  as  centres,  and  a 

radius  equal  to  AB,  draw  ^,-    g. 

arcs    intersecting    at    M 

and  N.     Join  HM,  MC,  CD,  DN,  and  NF,  which  will  give  the 
octagon  required. 


48.    In  a  given  circle  to  inscribe  a  nonagon. 

Draw  the  diameters  AB  and  CD  perpendicular  to  each  other. 
With  A  as  centre, 
and  radius  AE,  draw 
the  arc  cutting  the 
circle  in  F.  With  B 
as  centre,  and  radius 
BF,  draw  the  arc 
cutting  CD  produced 
in  G.  With  G  as 
centre,  and  radius 
GA,  draw  the  arc 
cutting  CD  in  H. 
With  HC  as  radius, 
commencing  at  A, 
set  off  on  the  circle 
the  points  K,  L,  M, 
N,  O,  P,  Q,  and  R,  by  joining  which  we  get  the  nonagon  required. 


-C 


3^ 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


49.    In  a  given  circle  to  inscribe  a  regular  undecagon. 

Draw  the  two  diameters  AB  and  CD  cutting  each  other  in  E. 

With  A  as  centre,  and  AE 
as  radius,  draw  an  arc  cut- 
ting the  circle  in  H.  With 
D  as  centre,  and  DE  as 
radius,  draw  an  arc  cutting 
the  circle  in  F.  With  F  as 
centre,  and  FH  as  radius, 
draw  the  arc  cutting  CD  in 
K.  Join  HK.  Then  HK 
is  equal  to  one  side  of  the 
undecagon.  With  HK  as 
radius,  starting  from  H,  set 
off  en  the  circle  the  points  of 
the  required  undecagon,  and  join  them. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Inscribed  in  circles  of  varying  diameters,  draw  the  regular 
polygons,  from  a  pentagon  to  a  duodecagon,  by  a  general  method  and 
figure  the  angles  formed  by  their  sides. 

2.  In  circles  of  various  radii,  draw  all  the  preceding  polygons  by 
special  methods.  Join  their  angles  to  the  centre  of  the  circle  by  radii, 
and  figure  the  angles  between  the  radii. 

3  On  lines  varying  in  length,  draw  the  same  polygons  by  a  general 
method. 

4.  Construct  on  lines  of  different  lengths  the  same  polygons  by 
special  methods. 

5.  Construct  an  irregular  hexagon  from  the  following  data  :  Sides, 
AB  I",  BC  if,  CD  f",  DE  ih",  EF  i|"  ;  Angles,  ABC  140°,  BCD 
130°,  CDE  110°,  DEF  120°. 

6.  Construct  an  irregular  pentagon  from  the  following  data  :  Sides, 
AB  1.25",  BC  1.3",  CD  1.2",  DE  1.3",  EA  1.4";  Diagonals,  AC 
1.8"  AD  1.6". 

7.  Construct  a  regular  polygon  with  one  side  i"  in  length  and  one 
angle  140°. 

8.  How  many  degrees  are  there  in  each  of  the  angles  at  the  centre 
of  a  nonagon  ? 

9.  Construct  a  regular  polygon  on  the  chord  of  an  arc  of  72°. 


POLYGONS. 


39 


10.  Inscribe  in  any  given  circle  an  irregular  heptagon  whose  angles 
at  the  centre  are  respectively  52°,  "j^^^  45°.  63°,  22°,  36'',  and  69°. 

11.  Construct   a  regu]ar  octagon  of  i"  side,  and  a  second   octagon 
having  its  angles  at  the  middle  points  of  the  sides 
of  the  first.  (May,  '97.) 

12.  Draw  a  figure  similar  to  the  one  shown 
(Fig.  88),  the  points  of  the  star  being  at  the  angles 
of  a  regular  heptagon  inscribed  within  a  circle  of 
1 1"  radius.  (June,  '97.) 

'3.  Within  a  circle  of  i^"  radius  inscribe  a 
regular  nonagon.  Within  tne  nonagon  inscribe  a 
rectangle  having  all  its  angles  in  the  sides  of  the 
nonagon,  and  one  of  its  sides  i^"  long. 

14.  Construct  a  regular  pentagon  of  iV  side.     Describe  five  circles 
off"  radius,  having  their  centres  at  the  five  angles  of  the  pentagon. 

(June,  '98.) 

15.  Draw  the  given  figure  (Q.  15),  making  the  radius  of  the  outer 
circle  i\".  (April,  '01.) 

16.  Construct  a  regular  pentagon  of  2"  side,  and  a  similar  pentagon 
of  2"  diagonal.     The  two  figures  should  have  the  same  centre. 

(N.B. — The  protractor  may  not  be  used  for  obtaining  the  angle  of 
the  pentagon.)  (June,  '02.) 


Fig.  £8. 
(April,   98.) 


Q.  15- 


Q   19. 


17.  Copy  the  diagram  (Q.  17),  using  the  figured  dianensions. 

(June,  '02.) 

18.  Within  a  circle  of  I  "5"  radius  inscribe  a  regular  nonagon.  With 
the  same  centre  describe  a  regular  nonagon  of  075"  side.       (May,  '03.) 

19.  Copy  the  given  figure  (Q.  19).  The  straight  lines  are  to  form  a 
regular  pentagon  of  I 'S"  side,  and  the  five  equal  segments  are  to  have 
their  arcs  tangential  at  the  angles  of  the  pentagon.  Show  all  your 
constructions  clearly.    '  (June,  '03.) 


CHAPTER   IV. 


INSCRIBED   AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 
50,    To  inscribe  an  equilateral  triangle  in  a  given  circle  ABC. 


Find  the  centre  E  (Prob. 
H 


32),  and  draw  the  diameter  DC. 
With  D  as  centre,  and  DE  as 
radius,  mark  off  the  points  A 
and  B  on  the  circumference  of 
the  circle.  Join  AB,  BC,  and 
CA.  Then  ABC  will  be  the 
inscribed  equilateral  triangle 
required. 


51.   To  describe  an  equilateral 
triangle  about  a  given  circle 

ABC. 
At  the  points  A,  B,  and  C 
draw    tangents    to    the    circle 


(Prob.  84),  and  produce  them  till  they  meet  in  the  points  F,  G,  and 
(^  H.    Then  the  equilateral  triangle 

FGH  will   be   described   about 
the  circle  ABC,  as  required. 


52. 


To  inscribe  a  circle  in  a 
given  triangle  ABC. 


Bisect  the  angles  CAB  and 
ABC  by  lines  meeting  in  D. 
From  D  let  fall  the  line  DE, 
perpendicular  to  AB.  With  D 
as  centre,  and  DE  as  radius, 
inscribe  the  circle  required. 


INSCRIBED   AND    DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 


41 


53.  To  describe  a  circle  about 
a  given  triangle  ABC. 
Bisect  the  two  sides  AB 
and  AC  perpendicularly  by 
lines  meeting  in  D.  With  D 
as  centre,  and  DA  as  radius, 
describe  the  required  circle. 

54.  To  describe  an  equilateral 
triangle  about  a  given 
square  ABDC. 

With  C  and  D  as  centres, 
and  with  CA  as  radius,  de- 
scribe arcs  cutting  each  other 
at  E.  With  E  as  centre,  and 
with  the  same  radius,  mark 
off  the  points  F  and  G  on 
these  arcs.  Join  CF  and  DG, 
and  produce  them  till  they 
meet  in  the  point  H,  and  the 
base  AB  produced  in  K  and 
L.  Then  HKL  is  the  re- 
quired equilateral  triangle. 

55.  In  a  given  triangle  ABC, 
to  inscribe  an  oblong  hav- 
ing one  of  its  sides  equal 
to  the  given  line  D. 

From  A,  along  the  base 
AB,  set  off  AE  equal  to  the 
given  line  D.  From  E  draw 
the  line  EF  parallel  to  AC. 
Through  F  draw  the  line  FG 
parallel  to  the  base  AB. 
From  G  and  F  draw  the  lines 
GH  and  FL  perpendicular  to 
AB.  GFLH  is  the  oblong 
required. 


Fig.  93- 


42 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


To  inscribe  a  square  in  a  given  circle. 

C  y\       Draw  any  two  diameters  AB 

and  CD  at  right  angles  to  each 
other.  Join  the  extremities  of 
these  diameters.  ACBD  is  the 
inscribed  square  required. 

57.   To  describe  a  square  about 

a  given  circle. 
At  the  points  A,  C,  B,  D  draw 
tangents  meeting  each  other 
at  the  points  E,  F,  G,  H.  (Prob. 
84).  EFHG  is  the  described 
square  required. 

To  inscribe  a  circle  in  a  given  square. 

Draw  the  diagonals  AB  and 
CD  intersecting  each  other  at 
E.  From  E  draw  EF  perpendi- 
cular to  AD.  With  E  as  centre, 
and  EF  as  radius,  draw  a 
circle.  This  will  be  the  in- 
scribed circle  required. 

59.    To  describe  a  circle  about  a 
given  square. 
With   centre    E,    and    radius 
EA,  draw  a  circle.    This  will  be 
the  described  circle  required. 


60.    To  inscribe  a  square  in 
a  given  rhombus. 
Draw  the  two  diagonals 
AB   and   CD.     Bisect   the 
angles    AEC,    AED,    and 
^  B  produce  the  lines  each  way 
till  they  meet  the  sides  of 
the  rhombus  in  the  points 
F,  G,  H,  L.     Join  FG,  GL, 
LH,andHF.   FGLH  is  the 
inscribed  square  required. 


INSCRIBED   AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 


43 


61.  To  inscribe  a  circle  in  a 

given  rhombus. 
Draw  the  diagonals  AB 
and  CD  intersecting  each 
other  in  E.  From  E  draw 
the  line  EF  peipendicular  to^ 
AD  (Prob.  7).  With  E  as 
centre,  and  EF  as  radius, 
draw  a  circle.  This  is  the 
inscribed  circle  required. 

62.  To  inscribe  an  equilateral 
triangle  in  a  given  square 
ABDC. 

With  B  as  centre,  and  radius 
BA,  draw  the  quadrant  AD  ; 
and  with  same  radius,  with  A 
and  D  as  centres,  set  off  on 
the  quadrant  the  points  F  and 
E.  Bisect  AE  and  FD,  and 
through  the  points  of  bisection  ■^~-- 
draw  lines  GB  and  HB,  cut- 
ting the  given  square  in  G  and 
H.  Join  GH.  BGH  is  the 
inscribed  equilateral  triangle 
required. 

63.  To  inscribe  an  isosceles 
triangle  in  a  given  square 
ABDC,  having  a  base 
equal  to  the  given  line  E. 

Draw  the  diagonal  AD. 
From  A,  along  AD,  set  off 
AF  equal  to  half  the  given 
base  E.  Through  F  draw 
the  line  GH  perpendicular  to 
AD  (Prob  5).  Join  GD  and 
HD.  GDH  is  the  inscribed 
isosceles  triangle  required. 


Fig.  99. 


44 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


64.    To  inscribe  a  square  in  a  given  trapezium  ACBD  which 
has  its  adjacent  pairs  of  sides  equal. 

Draw  the  two  diagonals 
AB  and  CD.  From  point  C 
set  off  CE  perpendicular  and 
equal  to  CD.  Join  EA  by  a 
line  cutting  CB  in  G.  Draw 
the  hne  GF  parallel  to  AB. 
From  points  F  and  G  draw 
the  lines  FH  and  GK  parallel 
to  CD.  JoinHK.  FGKH  is 
the  inscribed  square  required. 

65.    To  inscribe  a  circle  in  a 

given    trapezium    ACBD 

which    has    its    adjacent 

pairs  of  sides  equal. 

Bisect    any   two    adjacent 

angles,  as  ADB  and  DBC, 

by  lines  meeting  in  E.    From 

E  draw  EF  perpendicular  to 

CB.     With  E  as  centre,  and 

EF  as  radius,  draw  a  circle. 

This    will   be    the    inscribed 

circle  required. 

To  insert  a  rhombus  in  a  given  rhomboid  ABDC. 

>^  Draw  the  diagonals  AD 

C  ,'P P   and  CB  intersecting  at  E. 

Bisect  two  adjacent  angles, 
as  CED  and  DEB,  by  lines 
cutting  the  given  rhomboid 
in    F  and  G,  and  produce 
these   lines    to    K    and    H. 
Join    FG,    GK,    KH,   and 
HF.      FGKH    is    the    in- 
scribed rhombus  required. 
67.   To  inscribe  an  octagon  in  a  given  square  ABDC. 
Draw  the  two  diagonals  AD  and  CB  intersecting  each  other 
in  E.    With  A  as  centre,  and  AE  as  radius,  mark  off  the  points  F 


INSCRIBED   AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 


45 


and  G  on  the  sides  ot  the 
square.  Proceed  in  the  same 
manner  with  the  angles  B,  C, 
and  D  as  centres,  which  will 
give  the  eight  points  required 
on  the  given  square,  by  joining 
which  we  obtain  the  required 
inscribed  octagon. 

68.  To  inscribe  a  square  in  a 
given  hexagon  ABCDEP. 

Draw  the  diagonal  EB  ; 
bisect  it  in  G,  and  draw  HK 
perpendicular  to  it.  Bisect 
two  adjacent  angles,  as  BGK 
and  EGK,  by  lines  meeting 
the  hexagon  in  O  and  M. 
Produce  these  two  lines  till 
they  meet  the  opposite  sides 
of  the  hexagon  in  L  and  N. 
Join  LM,  MO,  ON,  and  NL. 
LM  ON  is  the  inscribed  square 
required. 

69.  To  inscribe  four  equal 
circles  in  a  given  square 
ABDC ;  each  circle  to  touch 
two  others,  as  well  as  two 
sides  of  the  given  square. 

Drav.'  the  two  diagonals 
AD  and  CB  intersecting  at  E. 
Bisect  the  sides  of  the  square 
in  the  points  F,  G,  H,  and  L 
(Prob.i).  Draw  FH  and  GL. 
Join  FG,  GH,  HL,  and  LF, 
which  will  give  the  points  M, 
O,  P,  and  R.  From  M  draw 
MN  parallel  to  AB.  With 
M,  O,  P,  and  R  as  centres,  and 
radius  equal  to  MN,  describe 
the  four  inscribed  circles  re- 
quired. 


46 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


70.  To  inscribe  four  equal  circles  in  a  given  square  ABDC  ; 
each  circle  to  touch  two  others,  and  one  side  only  of  the 
given  square. 

Draw  the  two  diagonals 
AD  and  CB  intersecting  in 
the  point  E.  Bisect  the  sides 
of  the  square  in  the  points 
F,  G,  H,  and  L.  Join  FH 
and  GL.  Bisect  the  angle 
GDE  by  a  hne  meeting  GL 
in  M.  With  centre  E,  and 
radius  EM,  mark  off  the 
points  N,  O,  and  P.  With 
the  points  M,  N,  O,  and  P  as 
centres,  and  radius  equal  to 
MG,  describe  the  four  in- 
scribed circles  required. 

71.  To  inscribe  three  equal  circles  in  a  given  equilateral  triangle 
ABC ;  each  circle  to  touch  the  other  two,  as  well  as  two 
sides  of  the  given  triangle. 

^  Bisect  the  two  sides  of  the 

triangle  at  right  angles  by- 
lines meeting  at  the  centre  D. 
Draw  a  line  from  point  C 
through  the  centre  D  till  it 
meets  the  base  at  E.  Bisect 
the  angle  BEC  by  a  line 
meeting  DB  in  F.  With  D 
as  centre,  and  DF  as  radius, 
mark  off  the  points  K  and 
L.  From  F  draw  the  line 
FH  perpendicular  to  AB. 
With  the  points  F,  K,  and  L 
as  centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  FH,  draw  the  three  inscribed  circles,  required. 

72.    In  a  given  equilateral  triangle  ABC,  to  inscribe  three  equal 
circles  touching  each  other  and  one  side  of  the  triangle  only. 

Bisect   two   sides   of  the   triangle   at  right  angles  by  lines 


INSCRIBED   AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 


47 


meeting   at    the   point    D.      Join    CD    and    produce    it    to    E, 

Bisect  the  angle  DBE  by  a  line  cutting  CE  in  F.     With  D  as 

centre,   and    DF    as   radius,  mark  off  the   points   G   and   H, 

From  the  points  F,  G,  and 

H    as    centres,   and   with    a  .^ 

radius    equal    to    FE    draw 

the    three    inscribed    circles 

required. 


73.  In  a  given  equilateral 
triangle  ABC,  to  inscribe 
six  equal  circles  touching 
each  other. 

Having  drawn  the  three 
circles  according  to  the  last 
problem,  draw  lines  through 

G  and  H,  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  triangle,  till  they  meet  the 
lines  bisecting  the  angles  in  the  points  L,  M,  and  N.  These 
points  are  the  centres  of  the  three  circles  which  will  complete 
the  six  inscribed  circles  required. 


74.    In  a  given  octagon  to  inscribe  four  equal  circles  touching 
each  other. 

Draw  the  four  diagonals 
meeting  in  C.  Bisect  the 
angle  ABC  by  a  line  inter- 
secting AC  in  D.  With  C 
as  centre,  and  CD  as  radius, 
mark  off  the  points  F,  G,  and 
H.  From  D  draw  the  line 
DL  perpendicular  to  KC. 
With  D,  F,  G,  and  H  as 
centres,  and  a  radius  equal 
to  DL,  draw  the  four  in- 
scribed circles  required. 

Fig.  log 


48 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


75.   In  a  given  circle  to  draw  four  equal  circles  touching 
each  other. 

Find  centre  of  circle  E 
(Prob.  32).  Draw  the  two 
diameters  AB  and  CD  at 
right  angles  to  each  other. 
At  A  and  D  draw  tangents 
to  the  circle  to  meet  at  the 
)  point  F  (Prob.  84).  Join  FE. 
Bisect  the  angle  EFD  by  a 
line  cutting  CD  in  G.  With 
E  as  centre,  and  EG  as 
radius,  mark  off  the  points 
H,  K,  and  L.  With  G,  H, 
K,  and  L  as  centres,  and 
with  a  radius  equal  to  GD, 
draw  the  four  inscribed  circles  required. 


76.   In  a  given  circle  to  inscribe  any  number  of  equal  circles 
touching  each  other.     For  example,  five. 

Find  the  centre  C  (Prob.  32).     Divide  the  circumference  into 
five  equal  parts  (Prob.  38),  and  draw  the  five  radii  to  meet  the 

circumference  in  the  points 
M,  N,  O,  P,  and  R.  Bisect 
the  angle  MCN  by  a  line 
meeting  the  circumference  in 
A.  Through  A  draw  a  line 
at  right  angles  to  CE  till  it 
meets  the  Hnes  CM  and  CN 
produced  in  B  and  D.  Bisect 
the  angle  DBC  by  a  Hne  to 
meet  CA  in  E.  With  C  as 
centre,  and  CE  as  radius, 
draw  a  circle,  and  bisect 
each  arc  on  this  circle, 
between  the  five  radii,  in 
the  points  F,  G,  H,  and  L. 
With  E,  F,  G,  H,  and  L  as  centres,  and  a  radius  equal  to  EA, 
draw  the  five  inscribed  circles  required. 


INSCRIBED   AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES. 


49 


77.   About  a  given  circle  A,  to  describe  six  circles  equal  to  it, 
touching  each  other  as  well  as  the  given  circle. 


Find  centre  of  circle  A  (Prob. 
32).  With  A  as  centre,  and  a 
radius  equal  to  the  diameter  of 
the  given  circle,  draw  the  circle 
BCDEFG.  Draw  the  diameter 
BE.  Take  the  diameter  of  the 
giv^en  circle  and  mark  off  from 
E  the  points  D,  C,  B,  G,  and 
F.  With  each  of  these  points 
as  a  centre,  and  a  radius  equal 
to  that  of  the  given  circle,  draw 
the  six  circles  required. 


Fig.  112. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Within  a  given  circle  inscribe  a  square,  and  about  the  same 
circle  describe  an  equilateral  triangle. 

2.  Construct  a  rhombus  with  sides  i^"  long,  and  its  shorter 
diagonal  1.75"  ;  inscribe  a  circle  within  it,  and  let  the  circle  circum- 
scribe an  equilateral  triangle. 

3.  Construct  a  trapezium  with  two  of  its  sides  if"  and  two  i|" 
respectively,  and  with  its  longer  diagonal  2^"  ;  inscribe  within  it  a 
square,  and  let  the  square  circumscribe  an  equilateral  triangle. 

4.  Draw  a  regular  hexagon  with  i"  sides  and  let  it  circumscribe  a 
square  ;  inscribe  a  regular  octagon  within  the  square. 

5.  Draw  any  triangle,  and  describe  a  circle  about  it. 

6.  Construct  a  square  of  2^"  sides,  and  in  it  inscribe  an  isosceles 
triangle  with  a  if"  base  ;  inscribe  within  the  triangle  a  rectangle,  one 
side  of  which  is  i|". 

7.  Within  a  square  of  1.75"  sides,  inscribe  an  isosceles  triangle  with 
angle  at  vertex  60°  ;  inscribe  a  circle  within  the  triangle. 

8.  Within  a  circle  of  any  radius,  inscribe  a  regular  duodecagon,  and 
let  it  circumscribe  a  hexagon. 

9.  Construct  a  rhomboid  with  sides  2"  and  i^",  its  contained  angle 
to  be  60°  ;  inscribe  within  it  a  rhombus. 

10.    Within  an  equilateral  triangle  of  3"  sides,  inscribe  a  circle,  and 
within  it  3  equal  circles. 


50  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

11.  Draw  a  circle  of  i|"  radius  ;  inscribe  within  it  an  equilateral 
triangle  ;  inscribe  within  the  triangle  three  equal  circles  touching  each 
other  and  each  one  side  of  the  triangle  only. 

12.  Construct  a  square  of  2"  sides,  and  let  it  circumscribe  four  equal 
circles  ;  each  circle  to  touch  two  others,  as  well  as  two  sides  of  the 
square. 

13.  Construct  a  square  with  sides  of  2.3",  and  inscribe  four  equal 
circles  within  it  ;  each  circle  to  touch  two  others,  as  well  as  one  side 
only  of  the  square. 

14.  Within  a  triangle  of  2.7"  sides,  inscribe  six  equal  circles. 

15.  •  Within  a  circle  of  1.7"  radius,  inscribe  seven  equal  circles. 

16.  Draw  two  concentric  circles,  and  between  them,  six  equal  circles, 
to  touch  each  other  as  well  as  the  two  concentric  circles. 

17.  In  a  decagon,  inscribe  five  equal  circles. 

18.  Construct  an  equilateral  triangle  of  2f"  side.  Bisect  all  three  of 
its  sides  and  join  the  points  of  bisection.  Within  each  of  the  four 
equilateral  triangles  thus  formed  inscribe  a  circle.  (April,  '98.) 

19.  Draw  an  equilateral  triangle,  a  scalene  triangle,  a  right-angled 
triangle,  and  an  oblong  ;  a  trapezium,  and  a  regular  polygon  of 
eleven  sides,  each  in  a  2-inch  circle,  and  write  the  names  to  each. 

(May,  '96.) 

20.  Draw  each  of  the  following  figures  in  a  separate  2-inch  circle,  an 
isosceles  triangle,  an  obtuse-angled  triangle,  an  acute-angled  triangle,  a 
square,  a  rhombus,  and  a  rhomboid,  and  write  the  name  to  each. 

(May,  '97.) 

21.  Draw  a  square^  an  ob.'ong,  and  a  trapezium  ;  a  pentagon^  a 
hexagon,  an  octagon,  and  t7U0  parallel  straight  lines,  each  in  a 
separate  2-inch  circle,  and  write  the  name  to  each.  (April,  '98.) 

22.  About  a  square  of  \"  side  describe  a  triangle  having  one  of  its 
angles  60°  and  another  70°.  (May,  '97.) 

23.  Within  a  rhombus,  sides  2|",  one  angle  60°,  inscribe  an  ellipse 
touching  the  sides  of  the  rhombus  at  iheir  middle  points.        (June,  '97.) 

24.  Construct  a  rectangle  2V'  x  if".  Within  it  inscribe  two  other 
rectangles,  each  similar  to  the  first,  concentric  with  it  and  having  their 
longer  sides  ij"  and  i"  long  respectively.  (April,  '98.) 

25.  Within  an  equilateral  triangle  of  3"  side  inscribe  three  equal 
circles  each  touching  the  two  others,  and  tivo  sides  of  the  triangle. 

(May,  '97.) 

26.  Construct  a  square  of  i|"  side,  and  within  it  inscribe  a  rectangle 
having  one  of  its  angles  on  each  side  of  the  square  and  one  of  its  sides 
i"long.  (June,  97.) 

27.  Construct   a   triangle,    sides  i^",    2",    and    2^",    and    within   it 


INSCRIBED  AND   DESCRIBED   FIGURES.  51 

inscribe   an  equilateral  triangle  having   its   three   angles  in  the  three 
sides  of  the  first  triangle.  (June,  '98.) 

28.  Within  a  square  of  if"  side  inscribe  a  regular  octagon  having  all 
its  angles  in  the  sides  of  the  square,  (April,  '99.) 

29.  Construct  a  regular  heptagon  of  i"  side,  and  within  it  inscribe  an 
equilateral  triangle.  (June,  '99.) 

30.  Construct  a  quadrilateral  ABCD  from  the  following  data  : — 

Sides— AB=ii",  BC=i4" 
Angles— ABC  =105°,  BAD  =  75° 

The  four  angles  of  the  figure  all  lie  in  the  circumference  of  a  circle. 

(April,  '98.) 

31.  Within  a  circle  of  i|"  radius  inscribe  a  regular  pentagon. 
About  the  same  circle  describe  another  regular  pentagon,  having  its 
sides  parallel  to  those  of  the  inscribed  pentagon.  (April,  '96.) 

32.  Within  a  circle  of  2|"  diameter,  inscribe  four  equal  circles  each 
touching  the  given  circle  and  two  of  the  others.  (June,  '98.) 

33.  Within  a  circle  of  i|"  radius  inscribe  a  regular  heptagon.  Draw 
a  second  similar  heptagon,  of  which  the  longest  diagonals  are  2"  long. 

(April,  '99.) 

34.  Within  a  circle  of  i|"  radius,  inscribe  a  regular  hexagon. 
Within  the  hexagon  inscribe  three  equal  circles  touching  each  other, 
and  each  touching  two  sides  of  the  hexagon.  (June,  '99.) 

35.  Construct  a  rhombus  having  its  sides  2"  long  and  one  of  its 
angles  75°.  Within  it  inscribe  two  equal  circles  touching  each  other, 
and  each  touching  two  sides  of  the  rhombus.  (April,  '99. ) 

36.  Within  a  circle  of  2|"  diam.  inscribe  a  regular  pentagon.  Draw 
also  a  second  regular  pentagon  concentric  with  the  first  one,  its  sides 
being  parallel  to  those  of  the  first  and  I5"  long.  (June,  1900.) 

37.  The  sides  of  a  triangle  are  i",  i^"  and  i^"  long.  About  this 
triangle  describe  a  circle,  and  about  the  circle  describe  a  triangle  of  the 
same  shape  as  the  given  one.  The  points  of 
contact  must  be  found  and  clearly  shown. 

(April,  1900.) 

38.  Describe  a  circle  touching  both  the 
given  circles  (Fig.  113)  and  passing  through 
the  point  P  on  the  circumference  of  the 
larger  one,  three  times  the  size  of  figure. 

(April,  1900.) 

39.  About    a   circle   of   i"   diam.    describe  Fig.  113. 
six    equal    circles,    each    touching   the    given 

circle  and  two  of  the  others.      Then  describe   a  circle    touching  and 
enclosing  all  six  of  the  outer  ones. 


52 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


40.    Make  an  enlarged  copy  of  the  given  diagram  (Fig.    114),  using 
the  figured  dimensions.  (June,  '98. ) 


Fig.  115. 

41.  Copy  the  diagram  (Fig.  115)  according  to  the  given  dimensions. 
Show  clearly  how  the  centre  of  the  small  circle  is  determined. 

(June,  '98.) 

42.  Within  a  regular  hexagon  of  ii"side,  inscribe  a  square  having 
all  its  angles  in  the  sides  of  the  hexagon.  Within  the  square  inscribe 
four  equal  circles,  each  touching  two  of  the  others  and  two  sides  of  the 
square.  (April,  '01.) 

43.  About  a  circle  of  075"  radius  describe  an  equilateral  triangle. 
Describe  three  equal  circles  touching  the  given  circle  and  having  their, 
centres  at  the  angles  of  the  triangle.     Determine  the  points  of  contact. 

(April,  '02.) 

44.  Draw  the  given  figure  (Q.  44),  making  the  side  of  the  square  2^" 
long.     Show  clearly  how  all  the  points  of  contact  are  determined. 

(April,  '02.) 


Q.  44. 


46.  About  a  circle  or  o*8"  radius  describe  a  rhombus  having  one  oi 
its  angles  54°.  Each  side  of  the  rhombus  touches  the  circle.  Deter- 
mine the  four  points  of  contact.  (June,  '02. ) 

46.  Describe  a  semicircle  of  I  '5"  radius.  Within  it  inscribe  two 
circles,  each  touching  the  other,  and  also  touching  the  circumference 
and  diameter  of  the  semicircle.  (June,  '03.) 


CHAPTER   V. 

FOILED   FIGURES. 

Foiled  figures  are  constructed  on  the  regular  polygons,  and 
are  of  two  kinds  :  viz.  those  having  tangential  arcs,  and  those 
having  adjacent  diameters. 

Problem  78  is  an  illustration  of  the  former  kind.  The  arcs 
simply  touch,  and  if  produced  would  not  intersect  each  other. 
The  angles  of  the  polygons  are  the  centres  of  the  circles  con- 
taining the  arcs. 

Problem  79  is  an  illustration  of  the  latter  kind.  The  sides  of 
th     -polygon  form  the  diameters  of  the  semicircles,  the  centre 

each  side  being  the  centre  of  the  circle  containing  the 
arc.  If  these  slyc^  were  produced,  they  would  intersect  each 
other. 


78.  To  construct  a  foiled  figure 
about  any  regular  polygon, 
having  tangential  arcs.  For 
example,  a  hexagon. 

The  Hexafoil. — Bisect  one  side 
AB  in  C.  With  each  of  the 
angular  points  as  centres,  and 
AC  as  radius,  draw  the  six  arcs, 
as  required. 


Fig.  116. 


54 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


79.   To  construct  a  foiled  figure  about  any  regular  polygon,  having 
adjacent  diameters.     For  example,  a  pentagon. 


Tlie  Cinquefoil.  —  Bisect 
each  side  of  the  pentagon 
in  the  points  C,  D,  E,  F,  and 
G.  With  each  of  these  points 
as  centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  CA,  draw  the  five 
arcs  required. 

Note.  —  If  these  arcs  are 
to  have  a  stated  radius,  the 
length  of  the  hne  AB,  in  each 
instance,  will  be  twice  the 
required  radius. 


In  a  given  equilateral  triangle  ABC,  to  inscribe  a  trefoil. 

The  Trefoil.  —  Bisect  the 
angles  CAB  and  ABC  by 
lines  produced  till  they  meet 
in  L,  and  the  sides  of  the 
triangle  in  D  and  E.  From 
C,  through  centre  L,  draw  the 
line  CF.  Join  DE,  EF,  and 
FD.  From  G  draw  GI  per- 
pendicular to  AC.  WithG,H, 
and  K  as  centres,  and  a  radius 
equal  to  GI,  draw  the  three 
arcs  till  they  meet  each  other, 
which  will  form  the  trefoil 
required. 


81.  Within  a  given  circle,  to  inscribe  three  equal  semicircles  having 
adjacent  diameters. 

Find  centre  of  circle  A  (Prob.  32).    Draw  the  diameter  BC,  and 


FOILED   FIGURES. 


55 


the  radius  AD  perpendicular  to  it  (Prob.  5).     Trisect  the  angle 
BAD  in  E  and  F  (Prob.  13). 


Set  off  DG  equal  to  DF. 
Join  FA  and  GA  by  lines 
produced  to  L  and  H.  Join 
EG  by  a  line  cutting  FL  in 
M.  With  A  as  centre,  and 
AM  as  radius,  set  off  the 
points  N  and  O.  Join  MN, 
NO,  and  OM,  which  are  the 
diameters  of  the  required 
semicircles.  With  R,  P,  and 
S  as  centres,  and  a  radius 
equal  to  RM,  draw  the  three 
semicircles  required. 


82.   In  a  given  square  ABDC,  to  inscribe  four  semicircles  having 
adjacent  diameters. 

The  Quatrefoil. — Draw  the 
diagonals  AD  and  CB. 
Bisect  each  side  of  the  square 
in  the  points  E,  F,  G,  and 
H,  and  join  EF  and  GH. 
Bisect  HD  in  K  and  FB  in 
L,  and  join  KL,  cutting  GH 
in  N.  With  P  as  centre,  and 
PN  as  radius,  mark  off  the 
points  M,  O,  and  R,  and 
join  NM,  MO,  OR,  and  RN, 
which  will  form  the  diameters 
of  the  required  semicircles. 
With  S,  T,  U,  and  V  as 
centres,  and  with  a  radius 
equal  to  SN,  draw  the  four 
semicircles  required. 


56 


GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


83.    Within  a  given  circle  to  inscribe  any  number  of  equal  semi- 
circles having  adjacent  diameters.     For  example,  seven. 

The  Heptafoil. — Find  centre  C  (Prob.  32).     Divide  the  circle 

into  as  many  equal  parts 
as  the  number  of  semi- 
circles required  (in  this 
case  seven),  and  from 
each  of  these  points,  A, 
B,  D,  E,  F,  G,  and  H, 
draw  diameters.  From 
the  point  A  draw  the 
tangent  AM  (Prob.  84), 
and  bisect  the  angle  CAM 
by  a  Hne  cutting  CK  in 
N  (Prob.  12).  With  C  as 
centre,  and  CN  as  radius, 
mark  off  the  points  O,  P, 
R,  S,  T,  and  U.  Join  each 
of  these  points  to  form  the  polygon.  From  the  centre  of  each 
side  of  the  polygon,  with  a  radius  equal  to  half  of  one  of  its 
sides,  draw  the  seven  semicircles  required. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Construct  an  equilateral  triangle  of  i^"  sides,  and  about  it  describe 
a  trefoil  having  tangential  arcs. 

2.  Construct  a  pentagon  of  f"  sides,  and  about  it  describe  a  cinque- 
foil  having  adjacent  diameters. 

3.  Draw  a  pentagon  of  ^"  sides,  and  about  it  construct  a  cinquefoil 
having  tangential  arcs. 

4.  In  a  circle  of  i^"  diameter,  draw  nine  equal  semicircles  having 
adjacent  diameters. 

5.  In  a  circle  of  1"  diameter,  inscribe  a  quatrefoil  having  tangential 
arcs. 

6.  Construct  a  regular  decagon  in  a  circle  of  |"  radius,  and  within  it 
inscribe  a  cinquefoil. 

Note. — Foiled  figures  can  be  inscribed  in  all  the  regular  polygons 
that  have  an  even  number  of  sides,  by  first  dividing  them  into  trapezia 
and  then  proceeding  by  the  method  shown  in  Prob.  65  ;  or  they  can  be 
drawn  in  circles  divided  into  any  number  of  equal  sectors,  by  Prob.  106. 


CHAPTER   VI. 
TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS 


84.  To  draw  a  tangent  to  a 
given  circle  at  a  given 
point  A. 

Find  the  centre  of  the" 
circle  C  (Prob.  32).  Join  AC. 
From  A  draw  the  hne  AB 
perpendicular  to  AC,  and 
produce  it.  Then  AB  is  the 
tangent  required. 


Fig.    122 


85.  To  draw  a  tangent  to  a 
given  circle  from  a  given 
point  A  outside  it. 

Find  the  centre  C  (Prob. 
32).  Join  AC,  and  bisect 
in  B.  From  B  as  centre, 
and  with  BA  as  radius,  de- 
scribe" a  semicircle  cutting 
the  circumference  in  D.  Join 
AD,  and  produce  it.  Then 
the  line  AD  is  the  tangent 
required. 


Fig.  123. 


58 


GEOMETRICAL    DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


86.  To  draw  a  tangent  to  the 
arc  of  a  circle  at  a  given 
point  A  without  using  the 
centre. 

Draw  the  chord  AB  and 
bisect  it  in  C).  At  C  erect  a 
perpendicular  to  AB  cutting 
the  arc  in  D.  Join  AD. 
Make  the  angle  DAE  equal 
to  DAC.  Then  EA  produced 
is  the  tangent  required. 

87.  To  draw  a  circle  with 
radius  equal  to  line  D  to 
touch  two  straight  lines 
forming  a  given  angle 
ABC. 

Bisect  the  angle  ABC  by 
the  line  BE.  Draw  the  hne 
FIT  parallel  to  BA  (Prob.  4), 
and  at  a  distance  equal  to 
given  line  D  from  it.  Where 
FH  intersects  BE  will  be  the 
centre  of  the  circle.  With 
E  as  centre,  and  D  as  radius, 
draw  the  circle  required. 


88.    To  draw  tangents  to  a 

circle  from  a  given  point 

A,  the  centre  of  the  circle 

not  being  known. 

From   point   A  draw   any 

three   secants  to  the   circle. 

as  CB,  DE,  and  GF.      Join 

BE  and  DC,  DG  and  FE, 

by  lines  intersecting  in  the 

points  H  and   K.      Draw   a 

line  through    H  and    K    till 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


59 


it  meets  the  circumference  in  L  and  M.      Join  AL  and  AM, 
which  will  be  the  tangents  required. 


89.    In  a  given  angle  CAB,  to  inscribe  a  circle  wliich  shall  pass 
through  a  given  point  D, 

Bisect  the  angle  CAB, 
by  the  line  AE  (Prob.  62). 
Take  any  convenient 
point  F  in  AE,  and  from 
F  draw  the  line  FG  per- 
pendicular to  AC  (Prob. 
7).  With  F  as  centre, 
and  FG  as  radius,  draw  a 
circle.  Join  DA,  cutting 
the  circle  in  H.  From 
the  given  point  D  draw 
DK  parallel  to  HF.  With 
K  as  centre,  and  KD  as 
radius,  draw  the  required 
circle. 


Fig.  127. 


90.    To  draw  a  circle  which  shall  pass  through  the  given  point 
A  and  touch  a  given  line  BC  in  D. 


At  the  given  point  D 
erect  the  Hne  DE  perpen- 
dicular to  BC  (Prob.  5), 
and  join  AD.  At  point  A 
construct  an  angle  DAE 
equal  to  the  angle  ADE 
(Prob.  11).  AE  intersects 
DE  in  E.  With  E  as 
centre,  and  ED  as  radius, 
draw  the  required  circle. 


6o 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


91.    To  dra-w  a  circle  which  shall  pass  through  the  two  given 
points  A  and  B  and  touch  the  given  line  CD. 

Join  the  two  given 
points  AB,  and  produce 
the  line  till  it  meets  the 
given  line  CD  produced 
in  E.  On  AE  describe 
the  semicircle  EFA ;  at  B 
draw  BF  perpendicular  to 
AE.  From  E  along  the 
line  ED,  set  off  EG  equal, 
to  EF.  Then  G,  B,  A 
are  three  points  in  thd 
required  circle,  which  can 
be  drawn  as  required 
(Prob.  33). 


92.    To  draw  four  equal  circles,  with  radius  equal  to  given  line 
E,  to  touch  two  given  lines  AB  and  CD,  which  are  not  parallel. 


Bisect  the  two  adjacent, 
angles  by  the  lines  FGj 
and  HK.  Draw  the  lines 
LM  and  NO  parallel  tc 
the  given  line  CD,  at  a 
distance  from  it  equal  tc 
the  given  radius  E  (Prob. 
4).  Where  these  lines 
intersect  the  bisectors,  we 
get  the  points  S,  R,  T,  and 
P.  With  the  points  R,  S, 
T,  and  P  as  centres,  and 
with  a  radius  equal  to  E, 
draw  the  four  circles  re- 
quired. 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


6i 


93.    To  draw  an  inscribed  and  an  escribed  circle,  tangential  to 
three  given  straight  lines,  forming  a  triangle  ABC. 

Note. — An  escribed  circle  is  also  called  an  excircle. 


Bisect  the  angles  BAG  and  ACB 
by  lines  intersecting  in  F.  From 
F  draw  the  line  FH  perpendicular 
to  AD.  With  F  as  centre,  and 
FH  as  radius,  draw  the  inscribed 
circle  required.  Bisect  the  angle 
BCD  by  a  line  cutting  the  line 
AG  in  E.  Draw  the  line  EK  per- 
pendicular to  AL.  With  E  as 
centre,  and  EK  as  radius,  draw  the 
escribed  circle  required. 


94.    A  principle  of  inscribed  and  escribed  circles. 

If  a  triangle  ABC  be  taken,  and 
AF,  BD,  and  CE  be  lines  drawn 
from  the  three  angles  perpendicular 
to  the  opposite  sides,  they  will  all 
intersect  at  the  point  H.  Join  the 
points  D,  E,  F.  This  will  form  a 
triangle  of  which  H  is  the  "in- 
centre,"  being  the  centre  of  the 
inscribed  circle.  The  centres  of 
the  escribed  circles  will  be  the 
points  A,  B,  and  C.  The  radii  of 
the  circles  are  found  by  drawing 
lines  from  the  centres  perpendicular 
to  the  sides  of  the  triangle  produced  (Prob.  7), 
line  BK. 


Fig.  132. 


as    the 


62 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


95. 


To  draw  two  circles  tangential  to  three  given  straight  lines, 
two  of  which  are  parallel. 


Let  AB  and  CD  be  the  two  given 
parallel  lines,  and  let  the  third  line 
intersect  them  in  E  arid  F.  Bisect 
the  four  angles  AEF,  BEF,  CFE, 
and  DFE  by  lines  meeting  at  H 
and  L.  From  H  draw  the  line  HM 
perpendicular  to  CD  (Prob.  7). 
With  H  and  L  as  centres,  and  a 
radius  equal  to  HM,  draw  the  two 
required  circles. 

Note. — A  line  joining  H  and  L  will  be  parallel  to  the  two 
given  lines  AB  and  CD. 


Fig-  133- 


96.  To  draw  two  circles  tangential  to  three  given  straight  lines, 
none  of  which  are  parallel ;  the  third  line  to  be  drawn  to  cut 
the  other  two. 

Let  AB,  CD,  and  EF  be  the  three  given  lines.     Bisect  the  four 

j3  angles  AFE,  BFE,  CEF, 
and  DEF  by  lines  meeting 
at  H  and  L.  From  H  and 
L  draw  the  lines  HM  and 
LN  perpendicular  to  CD 
(Prob.  7).  With  H  as 
centre,  and  radius  HM, 
draw  a  circle  ;  with  L  as 
centre,  and  LN  as  radius, 
draw  the  other  circle  re- 
quired. 

Note.  —  A  line  pro- 
duced through  the  points 
H  and   L  would    be   the 

bisector    of   the    angle   formed    by   producing    the    Hues    AB 

and  CD. 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


63 


97.    To  draw  DIRECT   COMMON    TANGENTS   tO  tWO  given 

circles  of  unequal  radii. 

Let  AC  be  the  radius  of  one  circle,  and  BD  of  the  other. 

Join  the    centres   A  and   B.  ,.--- --.^ 

From    the    centre    A    draw       ~^!^^^^^=="r?==~— ____^ 
a     circle      with      a      radius        /^     ^-j      N^  '~~y>:^ — J- 

=  AC-BD.  Bisect  the  line  /  (^\~'\~Zr~~-r~Jr~'\\ 
AB  at  E  (Prob.  i).  From  I  \^_'-J:,.y^'^^^  J 
E,  with  radius  ExA.,  draw  a      \       ^,    y  _— — -7'^'^^* 

circle  cutting  the  circle  FKG     ___--^^^^=-1p\ 

in  the  points  F  and  G.     Join  '- -'' 

FB  and  GB.     From  F  and  B  ^'--  ^35- 

draw  the  lines  FO  and  BR  perpendicular  to  FB  (Prob.  7)  ; 
and  from  the  points  G  and  B  draw  the  Hnes  GP  and  BS 
perpendicular  to  GB.  Draw  the  line  HL  through  the  points 
O  and  R,  and  the  line  MN  through  the  points  P  and  S  ;  these 
will  be  the  tangents  required. 


98.    To  draw  TRANSVERSE    COMMON    TANGENTS  tO   tWO  given 
circles  of  unequal  radii. 

Let  A  and  B  be  the  centres  of  the  given  circles,  and  AC  and 
BD  their  radii.  Join  AB. 
With  A  as  centre,  and  a 
radius  =  AC +  BD,  draw  a 
circle.  Bisect  the  line  AB 
in  E  (Prob.  i).  With  E  as 
centre,  and  a  radius  equal 
to  EA,  draw  a  circle  cutting 
the  circle  FKG  in  the  points 
F  and  G.  Join  AF  and  AG, 
cutting  ths  given  circle  PCO 
in  O  and  P.  Join  FB  and  GB.  From  B  draw  the  line  BS  per- 
pendicular to  FB  (Prob.  7),  also  the  line  BR  perpendicular  to 
GB.  Draw  the  Hne  HL  through  the  points  O  and  S,  and  the 
hne  MN  through  the  points  P  and  R  ;  these  will  be  the 
tangents  required. 


Fig.  1,6. 


64 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


Tangential   Circles   and   Arcs. 

99.    Showing-  the  principle  of  tangential  circles. 
One  circle  can  touch  another  circle  either  internally  or  ex- 
ternally, and  any  number  of  circles  can  be  drawn  to  touch  a 

given  line,  as  well  as  each 
other,  in  the  same  point.  For 
instance  take  the  point  C  on 
the  given  line  AB.  All  circles 
that  touch  a  given  line  in  the 
same  point  touch  each  other  at 
that  point ;  and  all  their  centres 
will  be  on  a  line  perpendicular 
to  the  given  hne. 

If  they  are  on  the  opposite 

sides  of  the  given  line,  they  will 

touch  externally  ;  and  if  on  the 

same  side,  will  touch  internally. 

If  they  are  on  the  same  side 

of  the  line,  one  circle  will  be 

entirely  within  the  other. 

If  their  centres  F  and  E  are  on  the  same  side  of  the  given 

line  AB,  the  distance  between  them  is  equal  to  the  difference 

of  their  radii  ;  but  if  their  centres  E  and  D  are  on  the  opposite 

sides  of  the  given  line,  the  distance  between  them  is  equal  to  the 

l'  sum  of  their  radii. 

__i.^_  The   point  of  contact 

^  ''  'q     "  '^  >.  ^  can  always  be  found  by 

joining  their  centres. 

100.  To  draw  four  equal 
circles  with  radius 
equal  to  given  line  D, 
with  their  centres  on  a 
given  line  AB  ;  two  to 
touch  externally  and 
two  internally  a  given 
_  circle,  whose  centre  is 

I  C  and  radius  CG. 

13 '  With    centre    C,    and 

Fig.  138. 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


65 


radius  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  radii,  i.e.  CG  +  D,  draw  a  circle 
cutting  the  given  Hne  AB  in  H  and  N.  With  centre  C,  and 
radius  equal  to  the  difference  of  the  radii,  i.e.  CO  -  D,  draw  a 
circle  cutting  the  given  line  AB  in  L  and  M.  With  H,  L,  M, 
and  N  as  centres,  and  radius  equal  to  D,  draw  the  four  circles 
required. 


101.  To  draw  four  equal 
circles,  with  radius 
equal  to  given  line  D, 
with  their  centres  on  a 
given  arc  AB  ;  two  to 
touch  externally  and 
two  internally  a  given 
circle,  whose  centre  is 
C  and  radius  CG. 

The  construction  of  this 
problem  is  word  for  word 
the  same  as  the  last,  the 
only  difference  being  the 
words  given  arc  instead  of 
given  line. 


Fig.  139. 


102  To  describe  a  circle  tan- 
gential to  and  including 
two  given  equal  circles  A 
and  B,  and  touching  one  of 
them  in  a  given  point  C. 

Find  the  centres  of  the  two 
given  circles  D  and  E,  and 
join  them  (Prob.  32).  Join 
CD.  From  C  draw  the  line 
CK  parallel  to  DE,  meeting 
the  given  circle  B  in  K.  Join 
KE,  and  produce  it  till  it 
meets  CD  produced  in  F. 
With  F  as  centre,  and  radius 
FC,  draw  the  required  circle. 


Fig.    40. 


66 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


103.    To  describe  a  circle  tangential  to  and  including  two  unequal 

given    circles    A   and   B, 


Fig.  141. 


and  touching  one  of  them 

in  a  given  point  C. 

Find  the  centres  D  and 
E.  Join  CE.  Cut  off  from 
CE,  CH  equal  in  length  to 
the  radius  of  the  smaller 
circle.  Join  DH.  Produce 
CE.  At  D  construct  the 
angle  HDF  equal  to  the 
angle  DHF(Prob.  11).  DF 
meets  the  line  CE  produced 
in  F.  With  F  as  centre, 
and  FC  as  radius,  draw  the 
circle  required. 


104.    To  draw  the  arc  of  a  circle  having  a  radius  of  l:|  inches,  which 
.  p  shall  be    tangential   to    two 

\  given  unequal  circles  A  and 

B  and  include  them. 
Note. — The  diameters  and 
distance    between    the    circles 
must  not    be  greater  than   2^ 
inches. 

Find  the  centres  D  and  E 
(Prob.  32),  and  produce  a  hne 
through  them  indefinitely  in 
both  directions,  cutting  the 
circles  in  K  and  L.  From  the 
points  K  and  L  on  this  line,  set 
off  KF  and  LH  equal  to  the 
radius  of  the  required  arc,  viz. 
I J  inches.  With  D  as  centre, 
and  a  radius  equal  to  DF,  draw 
an  arc  at  M  ;  and  with  E  as 
centre,  and  EH  as  radius,  draw 


Fig.  142. 


an  arc   intersecting  the  other  arc  at  M.     From   M   draw  the 
line  MD,  and  produce  it  till  it  meets  the  circumference  of  the 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


67 


larger  circle  in  C.     With  M  as  centre,  and  MC  as  radius,  draw 
the  required  arc. 

105.  To  inscribe  in  a  segment  of  a  circle,  whose  centre  is  E,  two 

given  equal  circles  with  a  radius  equal  to  line  D. 
From  any  radius  EF  cut  off 
FL  =  D,  and  describe  a  circle  with 
radius  EL.  Draw  the  line  KL  parallel 
to  the  base  of  the  segment,  and  at  a 
distance  equal  to  given  radius  D  from 
it  (Prob.  4).  Join  EL  and  produce 
it  till  it  meets  the  circumference  in 
F.  With  L  and  K  as  centres,  and 
LF  as  radius,  draw  the  two  required 
circles. 

106.  In  a  given  sector  of  a  circle  ABC, 
to  inscribe  a  circle  tangential  to 
it. 

Bisect  the  angle  ACB  by  the  line  CD 
(Prob.  12).  At  D  draw  a  tangent  HL 
(Prob.  84)  to  meet  the  sides  of  the 
sector  produced.  Bisect  the  angle 
CLH  by  a  line  cutting  CD  in  E. 
With  E  as  centre,  and  ED  as  radius, 
draw  the  circle  required.  ^ 

Fig.  144. 

107.  Draw  a  circle  having  a  radius  of  j  of  an  inch  tangential  to 

two  given  unequal  circles  A  and  B  externally. 

Note. — The  circles  must  not  be 
more  than  h  inch  apart. 

Find  the  centres  D  and  E  of  the 
given  circles  (Prob.  32).  From  centre 
D,  with  the  sum  of  the  radii,  z.e. 
D  K  + 1  of  an  inch,  draw  an  arc  at  H  ; 
and  from  centre  E,  with  the  sum  of  the 
other  radii,  z>.  EL  +  j  of  an  inch,  draw 
another  arc  at  H .  With  H  as  centre,  and 
radius  HK,  draw  the  circle  required. 

Fig.  145. 


68 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


108.  To  draw  the  arc  of  a  circle  tangential  to  two  given  unequal 
circles  A  and  B  externally,  and  touch- 
ing one  of  them  in  a  given  point  C. 

Find  the  centres  D  and  E  of  the 
given  circles  (Prob.  32).  Join  CE,  and 
produce  it  indefinitely.     Set  off  from 

C,  on  CE  produced,  CH  equal  to  the 
radius  of  the  larger  given  circle.  Join 
DH.  At  D  construct  an  angle  HDF, 
equal  to  the  angle  FHD,  to  meet  EC 
produced  in  F.  With  F  as  centre,  and 
radius  FC,  draw  the  arc  required. 

109.  To  draw  a  circle,  with  a  radius  equal  to  given  line  C,  tangential 
to  two  given  unequal  circles  A  and  B, 
to  touch  A  externally  and  B  internally. 

Note. — The  given  radius  must  be 
greater  than  half  the  diameter  of  the 
enclosed  circle  and  the  distance 
between  the  circles. 

Find  the  centres  D  and  E  of  the  two 
given  circles  (Prob.  32).     From  centre 

D,  with  radius,  the  sum  i.e.  DH  +  C, 
describe  an  arc  at  F  ;  and  with  E  as 
centre  and  radius  the  difference,  i.e. 
C  — EK,  draw  another  arc  cutting  the 
FD  and  FE.     With  F  as  centre,  and 


Fig.  147. 


Other  at  point  F.     Join 

FH  as  radius,  draw  the  circle  required. 


110. 


To  draw  a  circle  of  f  of  an  inch  radius  tangential  to  the 
given  line  AB  and  the  given  circle  CDE. 

Note. — The  circle  must  be  less  than 
I  inch  from  the  line.  Draw  the  line 
KL  parallel  to  AB,  and  f  of  an  inch 
from  it.  Find  the  centre  F  of  the 
given  circle  (Prob.  32),  and  with  the 
sum-radius  of  the  two  circles  draw  the 
arc  HM  cutting  KL  in  M.  Join  FM. 
With  M  as  centre,  and  MN  as  radius, 
draw  the  required  circle. 


TANGENTS   AND  TANGENTIAL   ARCS.  69 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Draw  a  circle  1.7"  in  diameter;  at  any  point  in  its  circumference, 
draw  a  tangent. 

2.  Draw  a  circle  1.25"  in  radius  ;  from  a  point  one  inch  outside  the 
circle,  draw  a  tangent  to  it. 

3.  Draw  a  circle  i|"  in  diameter  ;  from  any  point  outside  the  circle, 
draw  two  tangents  without  using  the  centre. 

4.  Draw  two  lines,  enclosing  an  angle  of  45°  ;  draw  a  circle  i|"  in 
diameter,  tangential  to  these  lines. 

5.  At  any  point  in  the  arc  of  a  circle  draw  a  tangent,  without  using 
the  centre. 

6.  Draw  two  circles  of  2"  and  i"  radii,  with  their  centres  3"  apart ; 
draw  transverse  common  tangents  to  them. 

7.  Draw  two  circles  of  1.7"  and  i"  radii,  with  their  centres  2.75" 
apart ;  draw  direct  common  tangents  to  them. 

8.  Draw  two  lines  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  each  other,  and  a  third 
line  cutting  them  both  at  any  convenient  angle  ;  draw  two  circles 
tangential  to  all  the  three  lines. 

9.  Construct  a  triangle  with  sides  2.25",  I.S",  and  1.25";  draw  an 
inscribed  and  three  escribed  circles  tangential  to  the  lines  forming  the 
sides. 

10.  Draw  two  lines  enclosing  an  angle  of  45°  ;  fix  a  point  in  any 
convenient  position  between  these  two  lines,  and  draw  a  circle  that 
shall  pass  through  this  point  and  be  tangential  to  the  two  lines. 

11.  Draw  a  circle  1.25"  in  diameter,  and  half  an  inch  from  it  draw 
a  straight  line  ;  draw  a  circle  of  §"  radius,  tangential  to  both  the 
circle  and  the  line. 

12.  Draw  two  circles  of  i"  and  V'  radius,  with  their  centres  2h" 
apart ;  draw  another  circle  tangential  to  both  externally. 

13.  Draw  two  circles  1.50"  and  i"  in  diameter,  their  centres  to  be 
2.25"  apart;  draw  another  circle  3^"  in  diameter,  touching  the  larger 
circle  externally,  and  the  smaller  one  internally. 

14.  Draw  two  lines  AB,  AC,  making  an  angle  of  25°  at  A.  Describe 
a  circle  off"  radius  touching  AB  and  having  its  centre  on  AC.  From 
A  draw  a  second  tangent  to  the  circle,  marking  clearly  the  point  of 
contact.  (April,  '96.) 

15.  Draw  a  line  AB,  2"  long.  Describe  a  circle  of  f "  radius  touching 
AB  at  A,  and  another  of  i"  radius  touching  AB  at  B.  Draw  a  second 
line  which  shall  touch  both  circles,  showing  clearly  the  points  of 
contact.  (June,  '97.) 

16.  Describe  two  circles,  each  of  h"  radius,  touching  each  other  at  a 
point  A.  Find  a  point  B  on  one  of  the  circles,  t"  from  A.  Describe  a 
third  circle,  touching  both  the  others  and  passing  through  B.    (April,  '98. ) 


7o 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


17.  Construct  a  square  of  2"  side.  In  the  centre  of  the  square  place 
a  circle  of  ^"  radius.  Then  describe  four  other  circles,  each  touching 
the  first  circle  and  two  sides  of  the  square.  (June,  '00. ) 

18.  Draw  the  "cyma  recta"  moulding  shown,  (Fig.  149),  adhering  to 
the  given  dimensions.  The  curve  is  composed  of  two  quarter-circles 
of  equal  radii,  tangential  to  one  another  and  to  the  lines  AB  and  CD 
respectively.  (April,  '96.) 


Fig.  i4q. 


Fig.  151. 


19.  Draw  the  "Scotia"  moulding  shown  (Fig.  150).  The  curve  is 
made  up  of  two  quarter-circles  of  1"  and  |"  radius  respectively. 

(May, '97.) 

20.  Draw  the  "rosette"  shown  (Fig.  151),  according  to  the  figured 
dimensions.  (June,  '97). 

21.  Draw  the  "ogee"  arch  shown  (Fig.  152)  to  a  scale  of  2'  to  i". 
The  arcs  are  all  of  2'  radius.  The  methods  of  finding  the  centres  and 
points  of  contact  must  be  clearly  shown.  (April,  '99.) 


22.  Draw  the  moulding  shown  (Fig.  153),   adhering  strictly  to  the 
figured  dimensions.     The  arc  of  ^"  radius  is  a  quadrant.        (April,  '98.) 

23.  Draw  the  "cyma  recta"  moulding  shown  in  the  diagram  (Fig. 
154),  using  the  figured  dimensions.      The  curve  is  composed  of  two 

equal  tangential  arcs  each  of  f"  radius.        (June,  '98.) 

24.  Describe  a  circle  touching  the  given  circle  at 
T  (Fig.  155)  and  passing  through  the  point  P  (twice 
size  of  figure).  (June,  '99.) 

25.  Describe  the  four  given  circles,  using  the 
figured  radii  (Fig.  156).      The  necessary  construction 

lines  and  points  of  contact  must  be  clearly  shown.  (June,  '00.) 


^ig-  155- 


TANGENTS  AND  TANGENTIAL  ARCS. 


71 


26.    Draw  the   "three  centred"  arch  shown  (Fig.    157).     The  two 
lower  arcs  are  of  i"  radius,  and  the  upper  arc  is  of  2^"  radius.    (April,  '00. ) 


Fig.  156. 


Fig.  157- 


Fig.  158. 


27.  Draw  the  "four  centred"  arch  shown  (Fig.  158),  adhering  to  the 
figured  dimensions.  (June,  '97.) 

28.  Draw  the  figure  shown,  (Fig.  159),  making  tlie  sides  of  the  square 
21"  long.  (April,  '96. ) 


*^ 

^ 

— - 3-^-"- - > 

iimi 

-i^^O^ 

Fig.  161. 

Fig.  160. 

Fig.  159- 

29.  Draw  the  figure  shown  (Fig.  160),  adhering  strictly  to  the  figured 
dimensions.  (May,  '97.) 

30.  Draw    the  figure   shown    (Fig.    161),    according   to  the  figured 
dimensions.  (June,  '97.) 

31.  Draw  the  given  figure  (Fig.  162)  making  the  side  of  the  square 
2^"  and  the  radii  of  all  the  arcs  f".  (April,  '99,) 


W- 


■£k 


2^' 

Fig.  162. 


Fig.  164. 


32,  Draw  the  figure  shown  (Fig.  163),  using  the  figured  dimensions. 

(April,  '98.) 

33.  Copy  the  given  figure  (Fig.  164),  using  the  figured  dimensions. 

(June,  '00.) 


CHAPTER   VII. 


PROPORTIONAL   LINES. 


Proportional  lines  may  be  illustrated  by  the  example  of  simple 
proportion  in  arithmetic,  in  which  we  have  four  terms,  e.g. 
2:4::5  :  lo 

The  relationship  or  ratio  between  the  first  two  terms  with 
regard  to  magnitude  is  the  same  as  that  between  the  second  two, 
e.g.  as  2  is  to  4,  so  is  5  to  ID  ;  therefore  these  four  numbers 
are  said  to  be  in  proportion. 

The  first  and  fourth  terms  are  called 
the  extremes,  and  the  second  and  third  the 
means. 

The  product  of  the  extremes  equals  the 
product  of  the  means,  e.g.  2x10  =  4x5. 
So,  the  first  three  terms  being  given,  we 
can  find  the  fourth.  If  we  divide  the  pro- 
duct of  the  means  by  the  first  extreme  we 

get  the  fourth  proportional,  e.g.  - — -=  10. 

Almost  all  geometrical  questions  on 
proportion  are  based  on  the  following 
theorems  : — 

Take  any  triangle  ABC,  and  draw  any 
line  DE  parallel  to  one  side,  then — 

CD  :DA::CE:EB 
CD : CE  :  : CA :  CB 
CE:ED::CB:BA 
CD  :  DE  :  :  CA  :  AB. 
There  are  five  varieties  of  proportional  lines,  viz. — 
Greater  fourth  proportional. 
Less  fourth  proportional. 
Greater  third  proportional. 
Less  third  proportionaL 
Mean  proportionaL 


PROPORTIONAL   LINES. 


73 


If  the  quantities  be  so  arranged  that  the  second  term  is 
greater  than  the  first, — as  4  :  6  :  :  8  :.v, — the  last  term  is  called 
the  greater  fourth  proportional. 

If  the  terms  are  arranged  so  that  the  second  term  is  less  than 
the  one  preceding, — as  8  :  6  :  :  4  :  .r, — the  last  or  unknown  term 
is  called  the  less  fourth  proportional. 

When  the  two  means  are  represented  by  the  same  number, — 
thus  4  : 6  :  :  6  :  .r, — the  answer  or  x  is  called  the  third  propor- 
tional. 

The  third  proportional  is  found  by  dividing  the  square  of  the 

second  by  the  first,  e.£: — 

62       6x6 

—  or =  9. 

4  4 

If  the  terms  are  placed  so  that  the  larger  number  is  repeated, 
—thus  4:6::6:.i', — the  last  term  is  called  the  greater  third 
proportional ;  but  if  the  terms  are  arranged  so  that  the  smaller 
number  is  repeated,— as  6  :  4  :  :  4  :  .r, — the  result  is  called  the 
less  third  proportional. 

The  mean  proportional  between  any  two  numbers  is  found  by 
extracting  the  square  root  of  their  product, — e.g:  4x9  =  36  ;  the 
square  root  of  36  =  6,  which  is  the  mean  proportional. 


111.    To  find  a  fourth  proportional  to  three  given  lines  A,  B, 

and  C.   THE  GREATER  FOURTH  PROPORTIONAL. 

Draw  EH  equal  to 
given  line  C,  and  EF,  at 
any  angle  with  it,  equal  to 
given  line  B.  Join  FH, 
and  produce  EH  to  D, 
making  ED  equal  to  given 
line  A.  Draw  DK  parallel 
to  FH  till  it  meets  EF 
produced  in  K  (Prob.  3). 
Then  KE  will  be  the 
greater  fourth  proportional 
to  the  lines  A,  B,  and  C, 
i.e.  C  :  B  :  :  A  :  KE,  e.g. 
if  C  =  6feet,  B  =  8  feet,  A  = 


A. 

B: . 

C' ' 

Fig.  166. 

■  12  feet,  then  KE=^  16  feet 


74 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


112.    To  find  a  fourth  proportional  to  tliree  given  lines  A,  B,  and  C. 
THE   LESS   FOURTH   PROPORTIONAL. 

Draw  the  line  DE 
equal  to  given  line  A, 
and  EF,  at  any  angle 
with  it,  equal  to  given 
line  B.  Join  FD.  From 
E,  along  ED,  set  off 
EG  equal  to  given  line 
C.  From  G  draw  GH 
parallel  to  FD  (Prob. 
3).  Then  HE  is  the 
less  fourth  proportional  to 
the  given  lines  A,  B,  and 
C,  /.^.  A  :  B  :  :  C  :  HE. 


Fig.  167. 


113.    To  find  a  third  proportional  between  two  given  lines  A  and  B. 

THE  GREATER  THIRD  PROPORTIONAL. 

Draw  CD  equal  to  given 
line  A,  and  CE,  at  any 
angle  with  it,  equal  to 
given  line  B.  Join  DE. 
With  C  as  centre,  and  CD 
as  radius,  draw  the  arc.  DG 
to  meet  CE  produced  in 
G.  From  G  draw  the  line 
GF  parallel  to  DE  till  it 
meets  CD  produced  in  F 

^  (Prob.  3).    Then  CF  is  the 

greater  third   proportional 

'  to  the  given  lines  A  and  B, 

Fig.  168.  I.e.  B  :  A  :  :  A  :  CF. 


114,   To  find  a  third  proportional  between  two  given  lines  A  and  B. 

THE   LESS   THIRD   PROPORTIONAL. 
Draw    CD    equal   to    the    given    line    A,   and    CE,    at   any 


PROPORTION. 


75 


angle  with  it,  equal  to 
given  line  B.  Join  DE. 
From  C  as  centre,  and 
with  radius  CE,  draw  the 
arc  EF  cutting  CD  in  F. 
Draw  FG  parallel  tc  DE 
(Prob.  3).  Then  CG  is 
the  less  third  proportional 
to  the  given  Hnes  A  and  B, 
z\e.A:B::B:  CG. 


\  1 

\ 

^-v^ 

G 

C 

Fig.  169. 

115.   To  find  the  MEAN  PROPORTIONAL  between  two  given  lines 
AB  and  CD. 

Produce  the  given  line  AB 
to  E,  making  AE  equal  to 
the  given   line  CD.     Bisect  /^ 

the  line  EB  in  H  (Prob.  i). 
From  H  as  centre,  and  with     / 
radius   HB,   draw  the  semi-    / 
circle  EKB.     At  A  draw  the   / 
line  AK  perpendicular  to  EB,  |~ 
cutting  the   semicircle  in   K 

(Prob.  5).      Then  AK  is  the   1 

mean  proportional  to  the  given  ^ 

lines    AB   and    CD,   e.o-.    if 

AB  =  9  feet  and  CD -4  feet,  then  AK: 


H 


A 


Fie. 


6  feet. 


116. 


To  divide  a  line  in  medial  section,  i.e.  into  EXTREME  and 
MEAN  proportion. 


Let  AB  be  the  line.  At  A 
draw  AC  perpendicular  to 
AB,  and  equal  to  it.  Bisect 
AC  in  D.  With  D  as  centre, 
and  DB  as  radius,  draw  the 
arc  cutting  CA  produced  in 
E.  With  A  as  centre,  and 
AE  as  radius,  draw  the  arc 
cutting  AB  in  F.  Then 
AB  :  AF  :  :  AF  :  BF. 


B 


76 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


117.    To  divide  any  straight  line  AB  in  the  point  C,  so  that 
AC  :  CB  :  :  3  :  4. 


At  A  draw  the  line  AD  of 
indefinite  length,  and  at  any 
angle  to  AB.  From  A,  along 
AD,  mark  off  seven  equal 
distances  of  any  convenient 
length.  Join  7B.  At  3  draw 
the  line  3C  parallel  to  7B 
(Prob.  3).     Then 

AC  :  CB  :  :  3  :  4, 
or,      AB  :  AC  :  :  7  :  3. 


118.    To  divide  a  line  proportionally  to  a  given  divided  line. 


Let  AB  be  a  given  divided 
line,  and  GH  a  line  which  is 
to  be  divided  proportionally 
to  AB.  Join  GA  and  HB, 
and  produce  them  to  meet  in 
C  ;  join  C  to  the  divisions 
in  AB  and  produce  them. 
These  lines  will  divide  GH 
as  required.  Divide  BC  into 
four  equal  parts,  and  draw 
the  lines  D,  E,  and  F  parallel 
to  AB  ;  join  the  divisions  on 
AB  with  C,  then  the  divisions 
on  the  lines  D,  E,  and  F  will 
represent  respectively  the 
proportions  of  |,  ^,  and  j 
of  the  divisions  on  the  given 
line  AB. 


/  / '     , 

f      •    > 

^/  /  i — i 
\^ — / — f '. 

_/     / hJ 


PROPORTIONAL   LINES. 


77 


119.    To  construct  a  triangle  on  a  given  line  AB,  so  that  the 
three  angles  may  he  in  the  proportion  of  2  :  3  :  4. 

From  B,  with  any  radius,  describe  a  semicircle  and  divide  it 
into  nine  equal  parts  (Prob.  48).  Draw  the  lines  B4  and  B7. 
Then  the  three  angles  7BC, 
4B7,  and  4BA  are  in  the 
proportion  of  2  :  3  :  4.  The 
sum  of  the  three  angles  are 
equal  to  two  right  angles, 
because  a  semicircle  con- 
tains 180°  ;  so  they  must 
be  the  three  angles  of  a 
triangle,  because  the  three 
angles  of  any  triangle  are 

together  equal  to  two  right  angles.  From  A  draw  the  line 
AD  parallel  to  B7  till  it  meets  B4  produced  in  D  (Prob.  3). 
Then  ABD  is  the  triangle  required. 


120.    This  problem  illustrates  an  important  principle  in  proportion. 

Take    a    triangle    ABC,    the    sides   of  which    shall    bear   a 
certain  ratio.     For  example, 

let  AB  :    BC  as  2  :  i.     Pro-  D 

duce  AB  to  D,  and  bisect  the  /  ^, 

angles  ABC  and  DBC  by 
lines  meeting  AQ  and  AC 
produced  in  H  and  E. 
Bisect  the  line  HE  in  K 
(Prob.  i).  With  K  as  centre, 
and  KE  as  radius,  draw  the 
circle  EBH.  Now,  if  we 
take  any  point  M  in  this 
circle,  and  join  MA  and  MC, 
we  shall  find  that  they  bear 
the  same  ratio  as  the  lines 
AB  and  BC.  In  the  example 
given  MA  :  MC  as  2:1.  The  same  result  would  be  obtained 
from  any  point  in  the  circle. 


78 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


121.    To  divide  a  right  angle  into  five  equal  parts. 


Let  ABC  be  the  right 
angle.  Divide  BC  in  D,  so 
that  BC  :  BD  :  :  BD  :  DC 
(Prob.  1 1 6).  With  C  as 
centre,  and  CB  as  radius, 
describe  the  arc  BE  ;  and 
with  B  as  centre,  and  BD  as 
radius,  describe  the  quadrant 
DF,  cutting  BE  in  E  FE  is 
one-fifth  of  the  quadrant  FD. 
Arcs  equal  to  it  set  off  on 
FD  will  divide  it  into  five 
equal  parts. 


122 


--— ^.E 


To  find  the  Arithmetic,  the  Geometric,  and  the  Harmonic  means 
between  two  given  lines  AB  and  BC. 

Bisect  AC  in  D  (Prob.  i). 

With  D  as  centre,  and  radius 

DA,     draw     the     semicircle 

^        AEC.     At  B  draw  BE  per- 

'^       pendicular  to  AC  (Prob.  5). 

\      Join  DE.     From  B  draw  BF 

I     perpendicular  to   DE.     AD 

D  B  C.  is   the  Arithmetic,    BE    the 

Geometric,     and     EF     the 


177. 


Harmonic  mean  between  the  two  lines  as  required. 


Fig.  178. 


123.    Taking  the  given  line  AB  as  the  unit ;  find 
lines  representing  \^  and  sfs. 

Draw  AC  perpendicular  to  AB,  and  of  the 
same  length  (Prob.  5).     Join  i:B.     CB  =  n/2. 

Draw  CD  perpendicular  to  CB,  and  equal 
in  length  to  AB  and  AC.    Join  DB.     DB  =  v'3. 

If  AB  is  the  edge  of  a  cube,  CB  is  the 
diagonal  of  its  face,  and  DB  the  diagonal  of 
the  cube,  which  are  therefore  to  one  another 
as  I  :  \/2  :  \/3. 


PROPORTIONAL   LINES. 


79 


Table  of  Foreign  Road  Measures  and  their 
Equivalents  in  English  Yards. 


English  Yards. 

Austria,     -  -       • 

mile 

8297 

Bavaria,    - 

)) 

8059 

Belgium,  -         -         -         - 

kilometre 

1094 

Berne,       -         -         -         - 

league 

5770 

China,       .         =         -         - 

li 

609 

Denmark, 

mile 

8238 

England,  -         -         =         - 

55 

1760 

France,     -         -         -         - 

kilometre 

1094 

Germany, 

mile 

8101 

Greece,     -         -         -         - 

)) 

1640 

Holland,  -         -         -         - 

5» 

1094 

India  (Bengal), 

coss 

2000 

Italy,         -         -         -         - 

mile 

2025 

Netherlands,     - 

kilometre 

1094 

Norway,   -         -         -         - 

mile 

12,182 

Persia,      .         -         .         - 

parasang 

6076 

Portugal,  -         -         -         - 

mile 

2250 

Prussia,    -         -         -         - 

5> 

8238 

Russia,      -         -         -         - 

verst 

I167 

Siam,        ...         - 

roeneng 

4204 

Spain,       ...         - 

mile 

1522 

Sweden,    .         -         -         - 

55 

11,690 

Turkey,     -         -         -         - 

berri 

1827 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Draw  three  lines    1.25",    2.3",  and   2.75"  respectively,   and  find 
their  greater  fourth  proportional. 

2.  Draw  two  lines  2.7"  and   1.5"  in  length,  and  find  their  less  third 
proportional. 

3.  Draw  a  line  2.5"  in  length,  and  produce  it  so  that  its  extra  length 
shall  be  in  proportion  to  its  original  length  as  3  :  5. 

4.  Draw   two   line's    25"   and    |"   in    length,    and    find    their   mean 
proportional. 

5.  Construct  a  triangle  on  a  base  3.25"  in  length,  so  that  its  three 
angles  are  in  the  proportion  of  3,  4,  and  5. 


8o  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

6.  Divide  a  line  3.4"  in  Kngth  in  extreme  and  mean  proportion. 

7.  Divide  a  line  2.75"  in  length  so  that  one  part  is  in  proportion  to 
the  other  as  2  :  4. 

8.  Draw  two  lines  1.25"  and  2.3"  respectively,  and  find  their  greater 
third  proportional. 

9.  Draw  three  lines  3",  2^",  and  i|"  in  length,  and  find  their  less 
fourth  proportional. 

10.  The  base  of  a  triangle  is  l  '6^"  long,  and  the  angles  at  the  base 
are  88°  and  53°.  Construct  the  triangle,  and  find  a  fourth  proportional 
less  to  the  three  sides.  Measure  and  write  down  the  length  of  this  line. 
(The  angles  should  be  found  from  the  protractor  or  scale  of  chords.) 

(April,  '01.) 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

PLAIN   SCALES,    COMPARATIVE    SCALES,  AND 
DIAGONAL  SCALES. 

On  a  drawing  representing  a  piece  of  machinery  the  scale  is 
written  thus  :  Scale  j  full  size.  From  this  we  know  that  every 
inch  on  the  drawing  represents  4  inches  on  the  actual  machine, 
so  the  relation  between  any  part  represented  on  the  drawing  and 
a  corresponding  part  in  the  real  object  is  as  i  :  4  or  j.  This  is 
called  the  representative  fraction. 

A  drawing  representing  a  building  has  drawn  upon  it  a  scale; 
e.g. — Scale  \  of  an  inch  to  a  foot.  One-quarter  of  an  inch  is 
contained  forty-eight  times  in  i  foot,  so  the  R.F.  is  -^^. 

On  a  large  drawing  showing  a  district  the  scale  is  written 
thus  :  R.F.  yyVo-  As  there  are  1760  yards  to  a  mile,  it  is 
evident  that  every  3  feet  on  the  drawing  is  equal  to  i  mile 
on  the  land  represented.  This,  of  course,  is  a  very  large 
scale. 

Our  Ordnance  Survey  Office  publishes  a  map  of  25  inches  to  a  mile, 
which  is  useful  for  small  districts  or  estates  ;  one  of  6  inches  to  a  mile, 
useful  for  maps  of  parishes  ;  and  one  of  I  inch  to  a  mile,  useful  for 
general  purposes. 

The  R.F.  for  the  last  would  be  g^eo- 

mile,    yards.       feet.         inches. 
I  =  1760=5280  =  63,360. 
F 


82 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


124. 


To  construct  a  scale  4  inches  long,  showing  inches  and 
tenths  of  an  inch.     Fig.   179. 

Draw  a  line  4  inches  long,  and 
divide  it  into  four  equal  parts,  each 
of  which  will  be  i  inch.  At  the  end 
of  the  first  inch  mark  the  zero  point, 
and  from  this  point  mark  the  inches 
to  the  right  i,  2,  3.  These  are  called 
primary  divisions,  and  the  amount 
by  which  they  increase  is  called  the 
value  of  the  scale  length. 

The  division  left  of  the  zero 
point  has  to  be  divided  into  ten 
equal  parts.  The  best  way  to  do 
this  is  to  take  a  piece  of  paper  and 
set  off  along  its  edge  ten  equal 
divisions  of  any  convenient  size 
(Fig.  179).  Produce  the  perpendi- 
cular marking  the  division  at  the 
zero  point,  and  arrange  this  piece 
of  paper  so  as  to  fit  in  exactly 
between  the  end  of  the  division  and 
this  perpendicular  line.  If  we  now 
draw  lines  parallel  to  the  perpendi- 
cular at  the  zero  point,  they  will 
divide  the  inch  into  ten  equal  parts. 
These  are  called  the  secondary 
divisions  ;  they  have  the  same  zero 
point  as  the  primary,  and  their 
numbers  increase  from  this  poini 
by  the  value  of  their  scale  length. 

This  scale  will  measure  inches 
to  one  decimal  place.  Supposing 
we  wish  to  measure  3.6  inches, 
that  is  3  primary  and  6  secondary 
divisions.     Place  one  point  of  the 


\ 

.\X    V 

-  ro -^ 

1- 

Co 

Fig.  179. 


dividers  on  division  3  of  the  primary  parts,  and  open  them 
till  the  other  point  reaches  the  division  (^  of  the  secondary 
divisions. 


PLAIN,    COMPARATIVE,    AND   DIAGONAL   SCALES.    8- 


125. 


<T>- 


00- 


cs- 


lO' 


HI? 


^-- 


to- 


CVJ 


To  construct  a  scale  of  g^g,  or  1  incli  to  equal  3  feet 

Fig.  i8o. 
Number  of  feet  to  be  repre- 
sented    may    be     assumed     at 
pleasure,  say  I2  feet. 

36  :  12  :  :  12  :;r, 
I2X  12 


whence  ,r: 


4  inches. 


Fig.  180. 


36 

Draw  a  Hne  4  inches  long, 
and  mark  off  each  inch.  Trisect 
each  of  these  divisions  by  a  piece 
of  paper,  as  shown  in  Fig.  179. 
We  now  have  the  total  length 
divided  into  twelve  ecjual  parts. 

At  the  end  of  the  first  division 

*§  mark  the  zero  point,  and  from 

^•^  this    point    towards    the    right, 

^  figure  the  primary  divisions  i, 

2,  3,  etc.  :  these  will  represent 

feet.      To   the   left  of  the  zero 

point  mark  oflf  twelve  divisions  : 

these  will  represent  inches. 

In  this  scale  the  numbers 
increase  on  each  side  of  the 
zero  point  by  unity. 

This  scale  will  measure  feet 
and  inches. 

126.  To  construct  a  scale  with  the 
R.F.  o|s,  or  1  inch  to  equal 
8  yards  ;  to  measure  40  yards. 

Fig.   18  T. 

288  :  40  :  :  36  :;r, 
36x40 


whence  x 


288 


=  5  mches. 


O 


Draw  a  line  5  inches  in  length,  and  divide  it 
into  four  equal  parts,  i.e.  1.25  for  each  division. 
At  the  end  of  the  first  division  mark  the  zero 
point.      As  each  of  the  primary    divisions    is 


O- 

00 

O. 
Fig.  181 


I 


84 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


ro-- 


C\] 


O 

c\J 

CD 

Ik 

Fig.  182. 


^ 
^ 


equal  to  10  yards,  we  must 
figure  them  from  the  zero 
point  to  the  right  10,  20, 
and  30  yards. 

The  division  to  the  left 
of  the  zero  point  we  divide 
into  ten  equal  divisions. 
Each  of  these  secondary 
divisions  represents  i 
yard. 

127.  To  construct  a  scale, 
RF.  6  356 o>  or  1  iiich 
to  a  mile  ;  to  measure 
5  miles.     Fig.  182. 

If  I  mile=i  inch,  5 
miles  =  5  inches. 

Draw  a  line  5  inches 
long.  Mark  off  each  inch. 
At  the  end  of  the  first 
division  mark  the  zero 
point,  and  number  the 
primary  divisions  to  the 
right  I,  2,  3,  4  miles. 
Divide  the  division  to  the 
left  of  the  zero  point  into 
eight  equal  parts  :  these 
secondary  divisions  repre- 
sent furlongs. 

Comparative  Scales. 


o 


0-- 


0J-- 


On  an  old  French  map 
a     scale    of    leagues     is    -^ 
shown,  as  Fig.  183.     Upon 
measuring  this  scale  with    qo 
an      English      scale,     30 
leagues  are  found  to  coin-    oo 
cide  with  4  inches. 


o 

00 


I 


o  __ 

CM 


o  ■ 

CO 

00 
O   - 


Fig.  i»3. 


PLAIN,    COMPARATIVE,   AND   DIAGONAL   SCALES.    85 


128.    To   construct 
Scale  to 
A  French  league  = 
French 

leagues,  miles, 

4262.84 


a  comparative  scale  of  English  miles 
measure  80  miles.      Fig.  183. 
4262.84  English  yards. 
English  O 


30  = 


1760 


X  30 


4262.84  X  30 


1 760 
whence 

4  X  80  X  1 760 


:  80  :  :  4  :  x 


4.4  inches  nearly. 


4262.84x30 

Draw  a  line  of  this  length,  and  place 
the  zero  point  at  the  left-hand  end  and 
80  at  the  other  extremity.  Divide  this 
line  into  eight  equal  divisions  :  each 
of  these  primary  divisions  will  repre- 
sent 10  miles. 

For  the  secondary  divisions,  set  off 
one  of  the  primary  divisions  to  the  left 
of  the  zero  point,  and  divide  it  into  ten 
equal  divisions :  each  of  these  will 
represent  i  mile.  The  representative 
fraction  of  both  the  French  and  English 
scales  will  of  course  be  the  same. 

On  a  Russian  map  a  scale  of  versts 
is  shown,  as  Fig.   184,  by  measuring 
which  by  an  English  scale 
120  versts  =  4  inches. 

129.  To  construct  a  comparative  scale  of 
English  miles  Scale  to  measure  80 
miles.     Fig.   184. 

A  Russian  verst=ii67  English  yards. 
1 167  X  120 


120  versts  = 


1 167  X  120 


1760 


miles. 


1760 


80  :  :  4  :  X, 


o— - 


I 


o 

00 


whence 


4  X  80  X  1 760 
1167x120 


=  4  inches  nearly. 


R 


o 


o 


o 

CO 


o 

CM 


o- 

CVJ 

to 

00 

o_ 


-^ 


Fig.  184. 


86  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Draw  a  line  of  this  length,  and  divide  it  into  eight  equal 
divisions  :  each  of  these  primary  divisions  will  represent  lo  miles. 
Place  the  zero  point  at  the  left-hand  end  of  the  line,  and  figure 
the  divisions  towards  the  right  lo,  20,  30,  etc.  Set  off  one  of 
the  primary  divisions  to  the  left  of  the  zero  point,  and  divide  it 
into  ten  equal  divisions  :  each  of  these  will  represent  i  mile. 

Diagonal   Scales. 

In  the  preceding  scales  we  have  only  primary  and  secondary 
divisions,  and  if  we  wish  to  measure  a  fractional  proportion  of  a 
secondary  division,  we  cannot  do  it  with  any  accuracy  ;  but  by 
means  of  a  diagonal  scale  we  are  enabled  to  measure  hundredths 
of  primary  divisions,  as  will  be  seen  from  the  following  scale. 

130.    To  construct  a  diagonal  scale  3  inches  long,  to  measure  inches, 
tenths  of  inches,  and  hundredths  of  inches.     Fig.   185a. 
Draw  a  rectangle  ABDC  6  inches  long  and  about  ij  inches 
wide,  and  divide  it  into  six  equal  parts.     At  the  end  of  the  first 


I" I  I  I  I  I 


Fig.   i«5a. 


Fig.  185b. 


N.B. — These  two  figures  are  half  the  size  described  in  the  text,  and  should  be 
drawn  full  size  by  the  student. 

division  from  A  fix  the  zero  point,  and  to  the  right  of  this 
figure  each  division  i,  2,  3,  4,  and  5.  Divide  AC  into  ten 
equal  parts,  and  figure  them  from  A  towards  C,  then  draw  lines 
parallel  to  AB  from  one  end  of  the  scale  to  the  other.     Divide 


PLAIN,  COMPARATIVE,  AND  DIAGONAL  SCALES.     87 

Ao  into  ten  equal  divisions,  and  figure  them  from  o  towards  A. 
Join  9  to  C,  and  from  each  of  the  other  divisions  between  A 
and  o  draw  hnes  parallel  to  9C.  Note. — The  divisions  between 
o  and  B  are  primary,  between  o  and  A  secondary  and  between 
A  and  C  tertiary. 

To  take  off  from  this  scale  a  measurement  equal  to  2.73 
inches,  we  place  one  point  of  the  dividers  on  the  primary 
division  figured  2,  and  the  other  on  the  secondary  division 
figured  7,  but  both  points  must  be  on  the  line  that  is  figured  3 
on  AC.     The  points  are  marked  by  a  small  circle  on  the  scale. 

To  take  off  3.17  inches,  place  one  point  of  the  dividers  on 
the  primary  division  3,  and  the  other  on  the  intersection  between 
the  secondary  division  i  and  the  line  7  on  AC.  These  points 
are  shown  by  two  crosses  on  the  scale. 

131.     To  construct  a  diagonal   scale  showing  miles,  furlongs,  and 
chains,  to  show  6  miles,  R.F,  =  g3.^gQ.     P^ig.   j85b. 

I   mile  =  8  furlongs. 
T  furlong=io  chains. 
The  length  of  scale  =  g3^go  of  6  miles  =  6  inches. 

In  this  scale  there  will  be  six  primary,  eight  secondary,  and 
ten  tertiary  divisions. 

Construct  a  rectangle  ABDC  6  inches  long  and  about  ij 
inches  wide,  and  divide  it  into  six  primary  divisions.  Place  the 
zero  point  o  at  the  end  of  the  first  division  from  A,  and  divide 
Ao  into  eight  secondary  divisions,  figured  from  o  towards  A. 
Divide  AC  into  ten  equal  divisions,  and  figure  them  from  A  to 
C.  Join  the  secondary  division  figured  7  to  the  point  C,  and 
from  each  of  the  other  secondary  divisions  draw  lines  parallel 
to  7C,  thus  completing  the  scale. 

To  take  off  from  this  scale  2  miles,  5  furlongs,  and  7  chains, 
take  one  point  on  the  primary  division  2,  and  the  other  where 
the  line  from  the  secondary  division  5  intersects  the  division 
7  on  AC.  These  two  points  are  marked  by  two  small  circles  on 
the  scale. 

To  take  off  3  miles,  2  furlongs,  and  3  chains,  one  point  will  be 
on  the  primary  division  3,  and  the  other  where  the  secondary 
division  2  intersects  the  tertiary  division  3.  These  points  are 
marked  by  two  small  crosses  on  the  scale. 


88 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


132.   To  take  off  any  number  to  three  places  of  figures  from 
a  diagonal  scale. 

On  the  parallel  indicated  by  the  third  figure,  measure  from  the 
diagonal  indicated  by  the  second  figure 
to  the  vertical  line  indicated  by  the  first. 


DISTANCE 

61 


lOLOMtrJlES 

Fig.  186. 


Comparative  Diagonal  Scales 

useful  for  transferring  the 
value  of  quantities  in  one 
measure  to  another.  To 
make  the  scales  less  cum- 
bersome they  are  so 
arranged  that  in  some 
cases  the  number  to  be 
taken  off  must  be  halved. 
With  this  proviso,  any 
quantity  may  be  converted 
from  one  scale  to  another. 
The  number  expressing 
the  quantity  in  one  unit  is 
taken  off  on  the  scale  for 
that  unit,  and  the  number 
expressing  it  in  the  other 
unit  is  at  once  read  off  on 
the  parallel  scale. 

For  example,  a  length 
of  638  miles.  Its  half, 
319  miles,  corresponds  to 
5 1 3  kilometres,  so  that  638 
miles  corresponds  to  1026 
kilometres. 


The      diagonal      scale 
generally  found  in  instru- 
ment-boxes   is    shown    in 
Fig.  187. 
diagonal   scales.      In    one, 


are  very 


3)  y> 

«-N 

7> 

>o 

f 

<t> 

^-■■U 

■■■«» 

0 

- 

■     f 

4- . 

■       rt 

: ,    II 

1  ty 

_ 

~ 

- 

CD 

-     T 

-  i  -  ■ 

•r" 

:i:,: 

:::|- 

!:::" 

eoo  >■ 

el 

Fig.  187. 

It  consists  of  two  diagonal  scales.  In  one,  the  distance 
between  the  primary  divisions  is  half  an  inch,  and  in  the  other 
a  quarter  of  an  inch. 


PLAIN,    COMPARATIVE,    AND   DIAGONAL   SCALES.    89 

There  is  a  small  margin  on  each  side  of  the  scale  for  figures  : 
on  one  side  the  half  inches  are  figured,  and  the  quarter  inches 
on  the  other. 

One  primary  division  at  each  end  is  divided  into  ten  secondary 
divisions,  and  there  are  ten  tertiary  divisions  drawn  from  one 
end  of  the  scale  to  the  other. 

The  primary  divisions  bemg  taken  for  units,  to  set  off  the 
numbers  5.36  by  the  diagonal  scale.  This  measurement  is 
shown  by  two  crosses  on  the  scale. 

If  we  reckon  the  primary  divisions  to  stand  for  tens,  the 
dimension  would  have  one  place  of  decimals,  e.g.  to  take  off  36.4 
from  the  diagonal  scale.  These  points  are  shown  on  the  scale 
by  two  small  circles. 

The  primary  divisions  being  hundreds,  to  take  off  227.  This 
dimension  is  shown  on  the  scale  by  two  small  squares. 


Proportional    Scales. 

These  are  used  for  enlarging  or  reducing  a  drawing  in  a  given 
proportion :  three  varieties  are  here  illustrated. 

The  simplest  form  is  that  shown  in  Fig.  188.     Suppose  we  wish 
to  enlarge  a  drawing  in  the  proportion  of  3  :  i. 

Draw  the  line  AB  of  convenient 
size,  to  suit  the  measurements  on 
the  drawing,  and  produce  it  to  C  ; 
make  BC  one-third  of  AB.  On  AB 
erect  the  perpendicular  BD  any 
length,  and  join  AD  and  DC. 
Divide  BD  into  any  number  of 
equal  parts,  and  draw  lines  parallel 
to  AB.  These  lines  are  simply  a 
guide  to  enable  the  measurements 
to  be  made  parallel  to  the  base — 
e.g.  on  placing  a  measurement  from  Fig.  188. 

the  original  drawing  on   the  scale 

we  find  it  occupies  the  position  of  ef:  the  distance  between  e 
and  g  will  then  give  the  length  of  the  measurement  to  the 
enlarged  scale,  i.e.  in  the  proportion  of  3  :  i.  We  proceed  in  the 
same  manner  with  every  measurement  we  wish  to  enlarge. 


D 

\ 

/- 

~~\ 

./    

e      V 

/ : 

/ 

\ 

A 

i         c 

@ 

■■•••. 

^--.   / 

F               ty  ^ 

/ 

--          — ;>%. 

/rt 

/9 

I 

V' 

90  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Should  we  wish  to  reduce  a  drawing  in  the  same  proportion, 
viz.  I  :  3,  the  original  measurements  would  be  placed  on  the 
left-hand  side  of  the  scale,  and  the  required  proportion  taken 
from  the  right-hand  side. 

In  Fig.  189  we  have  a  series  of  measurements — Az',  Kh^  Ag^ 

etc. — which  we  wish  to  enlarge,  say  in  the  proportion  of  3  :  2. 

^  Draw  the  line  AB  any  convenient 

length    to    suit    size    of    drawing. 

From  B   draw    BD    perpendicular 

to   AB.     Produce    AB    to    C,    and 

make    BC    equal   to    half  of   AB. 

With    centre    A,    and   radius   AC, 

draw  an  arc  till  it  meets  BD  in  D  ; 

and  join  DA.     From  each  of  the 

points,  /,  //,  g,  /,  etc.,  draw  Hnes 

parallel  to  BD.     The  distances  A/', 

Ak\  A^,  etc.,  will   then   give   the 

original  measurements  to  the  en- 

^  Fig.  189.  larged  scale  of  3  :  2. 

To  reduce  the  original  drawing 
in  the  same  proportion,  i.e.  2  : 3.  With  A  as  centre,  and 
radius  AB,  draw  the  arc  BE.  From  E  draw  the  line  EF 
parallel  to  BD.  AF  will  then  represent  AB  reduced  in  the 
proportion  of  2  :  3,  and  so  on  with  any  other  measurement  that 
we  may  require. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Construct  a  scale  to  measure  feet  and  inches;  the  R.F.  to  be  tjVj 
and  its  scale  length  value  15  feet. 

2.  Construct  a  scale  to  measure  yards  and  feet,  the  R.F.  to  be  ^V, 
to  measure  18  yards. 

3.  Construct  a  diagonal  scale  to  measure  feet  and  inches,  R.F.  yV, 
to  measure  36  feet.      Take  off  a  length  of  17'  9". 

4.  On  a  map,  a  distance  known  to  be  20  miles  measures  10" ; 
construct  a  diagonal  scale  to  measure  miles  and  furlongs,  long  enough 
to  measure  12  miles. 

5.  Construct  a  diagonal  scale  to  measure  yards  and  feet,  R.  F.  ■^\-^, 
to  measure  30  yards. 

6.  On  a  map  showing  a  scale  of  kilometres,  60  are  found  to  equal 
3".  What  is  the  R.F.?  Construct  a  comparative  scale  of  English 
miles,  to  measure  100  miles. 


PLAIN,    COMPARATIVE,    AND   DIAGONAL  SCALES.    91 

7.  A  line  4f "  long  represents  a  distance  of  4'.  Construct  a  scale  by 
which  feet  and  inches  may  be  measured  up  to  4  feet.  The  scale  must 
be  neatly  finished  and  correctly  figured.  (April,  '96.) 

8.  Construct  a  scale  to  show  yards  and  feet,  on  which  3^"  represent 
8  yards.  Make  the  scale  long  enough  to  measure  10  yards,  and  finish 
and  figure  it  properly.  (May,  '97.) 

9.  Construct  a  scale  of  7^'  to  i",  by  which  single  feet  may  be 
measured  up  to  30'.  The  scale  must  be  neatly  finished  and  correctly 
figured.  (June,  '97.) 

10.  The  diagram  represents  an  incomplete  scale  of  feet  (Fig.  190.) 
Complete  the  scale  so  that  distances  of  2'  may  be 

measured    by  it  up  to  50'.     The   scale  must  be   '  ^  J^ 

properly  finished  and  figured.  (April,  '98. )  Fig.  190. 

11.  Construct  a  scale  one-tenth  of  full  size,  to  measure  feet  and 
inches  up  to  5  feet.     The  scale  must  be  properly  finished  and  figured. 

(June,  '98.) 

12.  Construct  a  scale  of  feet  and  inches  one-ninth  ( ^)  of  full  size  long 
enough  to  measure  4  ft.  The  scale  must  be  properly  finished  and 
figured,  and  should  not  be  "fully  divided"  throughout  i.e.  only  one 
distance  representing  i  ft.  should  be  divided  to  show  inches.     (April,  '99. ) 

13.  T  he  line  AB  (2.75  inches  long)  represents  a  distance  of  2^  ft. 
Make  a  scale  by  which  feet  and  tenths  of  a  foot  may  be  measured  up 
to  4  ft.  The  scale  must  be  properly  finished  and  figured,  and  should 
not  be  "fully  divided  "  throughout,  ?'.<?.  only  one  distance  representing 
I  foot  should  be  divided  to  show  tenths.  (June,  '99.) 

14.  The  given  line  AB  (3.2  inches  long)  represents  a  distance  of  35  ft. 
Construct  a  scale  by  which  single  feet  may  be  measured  up  to  40  ft. 
The  scale  is  not  to  be  "fully  divided"  i.e.  single  feet  are  not  to  be 
shown  throughout  the  whole  length,  and  it  must  be  properly  finished 
and  figured,  (April,  '00. ) 

15.  A  drawing  is  made  to  a  scale  of  i^"  to  i' ,  and  another  drawing 
is  required  on  which  the  dimensions  shall  be  three-quarters  of  those  on 
the  fir.-t  drawing.  Make  a  scale  for  the  second  drawing  to  show  feet 
and  inches  up  to  5',  The  scale  is  not  to  be  "fully  divided"  [i.e.  only 
one  length  of  i'  is  to  be  divided  to  show  inches)  and  it  must  be  properly 
finished  and  figured.  (June,  '00.) 

16.  Construct  a  scale  \  of  full  size,  by  which  feet  and  inches  may  be 
measured  up  to  2  feet.  Show  also  distances  of  ^"  by  the  diagonal 
method.  Finish  and  figure  the  scale  properly,  and  show  by  two  small 
marks  on  it  how  you  would  take  off  a  distance  of  i'  7V'.       (April,  '01.) 

17.  Draw  a  diagonal  scale,  one-tenth  of  full  size,  by  which  centi- 
metres may  be  measured  up  to  one  metre.  Mark  on  the  scale  a  length 
of  47  centimetres. 

One  metre  (100  centimetres)  may  be  taken  as  39".  (^lay,  '03,) 


CHAPTER    IX. 

INSTRUMENTS    FOR   MEASURING   ANGLES,    ETC. 

A  protractor  is  an  instrument  used  for  measuring  or  setting  off 
angles ;  it  may  be  either  semicircular  or  rectangular  in  shape,  as 


shown  in  Fig.  191.  The  point  C  marks  the  centre  from  which 
the  radiating  lines  are  drawn,  and  corresponds  with  the  centre 
of  the  circle. 

The  degrees  are  numbered  in  primary  divisions,  equal  to 
ten  degrees  each,  on  the  outside  line  from  A;  and  on  the  inside 
line  from  B.  In  the  actual  instrument  each  of  these  primary 
divisions  is  subdivided  into  ten  secondary  divisions,  each  of 
which  represents  one  degree.  Only  one  of  these  is  divided  in 
the  figure. 


133.    To  construct  a  scale  of  chords. 

A   scale  of  chords   is   constructed   in   the   following   manner 
(Fig.  192).     Draw  the  Hues  AC  and  CD  perpendicular  to  each 


INSTRUMENTS   FOR   MEASURING  ANGLES,    ETC.     93 

other.  With  C  as  centre,  draw  any  quadrant  AED,  and 
divide  the  arc  into  degrees  (only  the  primary  divisions  are 
shown  in  the  figure).  Join  AD.  With  A  as  centre,  and  each  of 
the  primary  divisions  as  radii,  draw  arcs  cutting  the  chord  AD, 
which  will  form  the  scale 
of  chords.  .     ??- 

To  use  this  scale  in 
setting  off  an  angle — for 
example,  to  draw  a  line 
that  will  make  an  angle 
of  40°  with  line  CB  (Fig. 
192). 

With  C  as  centre,  and 
radius  equal  to  A60  on 
the  scale  of  chords,  draw  an  arc  BFD.  With  a  pair  of  dividers, 
take  the  distance  A40  from  the  scale,  and  set  it  off  on  the  arc 
BF  from  B.  Join  FC.  Then  FCB  will  be  the  angle  of  40° 
required. 

Note. — A60  is  always  equal  to  the  radius  of  the  quadrant 
from  which  the  scale  of  chords  is  constructed. 


134.    To  construct  any  angle  without  a  protractor. 

Draw  CD  perpendicular  to  AB.  With  C  as  centre,  and 
CA  as  radius,  draw  the  semicircle  ADB.  Trisect  the  angle 
DCB  in  E  and  F  (Prob.  13).  Trisect  the  angle  ECB  in  H  and 
K  (Prob.  14).  Bisect  FK 
in  L  (Prob.  12).  Then 
DE  =  3o°,EH  =  2o°,HF=io°, 
and  FL  =  5°.  Therefore 
between  D  and  B  we  can 
construct  any  angle  that  is  a 
multiple  of  5°. 

Divide  the  angle  ACD  into 
five  equal  parts  by  the  radii 
from  M,  N,  O,  and  P  (Prob.  121).  From  A  set  off  AR  equal  to 
DE.  As  AN  =  36°  and  AR  =  3o°,  AN-AR  =  6°,  MR  =  12°, 
AM  =  18°,  and  RO  =  24°.  Therefore  between  A  and  D  we  can 
construct  any  angle  that  is  a  multiple  of  6°, 


tig.  193. 


94  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

If  we  subtract  the  multiples  of  5°  from  those  of  6°  we  can 
obtain  any  desired  angle,  e.g. — 

6-   5  =  1° 

12-10  =  2° 

18-15  =  3° 
24-20  =  4° 

30-25  =  5° 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

All  the  regular  polygons,  with  the  exception  of  two — the 
heptagon  and  undecagon — can  be  constructed  with  angles  that 
are  multiples  of  5°  or  6°. 

If  the  polygon  is  to  be  inscribed  in  a  circle,  the  angle  would 
be  set  off  at  the  centre  of  the  circle  ;  but  if  one  side  of  the 
polygon  is  given,  the  angle  would  be  set  off  externally,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  74,  page  31. 

The  exterior  angle  of  a  Pentagon       is  72°  a  multiple  of  6°. 
„  „  Hexagon         „  60°  „  6°. 

„  „        an  Octagon  „  45°  „  5°. 

„  „  a  Nonagon        „  40°  „  5°. 

M  i'  Decagon         „  36°  „  6°. 

„  „  Duodecagon  „  30°  „  5°and6°. 


The  Sector. 

The  Sector  is  an  instrument  of  great  utility  for  facihtating  the 
work  of  Practical  Geometry.  It  consists  of  graduations  on  the 
two  radii  of  a  foot-rule,  and  it  is  used  by  measuring  the  arc 
between  the  graduations.  Hence  its  name.  The  legs  can  be 
opened  to  contain  any  angle  up  to  a  straight  line. 

In  the  illustration  (Fig.  194)  only  the  lines  most  used  in 
Practical  Geometry  are  shown  :  viz.  line  of  lines,  marked  L  on 
each  leg  ;  a  pair  of  lines  of  chords,  marked  C  ;  and  a  line  of 
polygons,  m.arked  POL,  on  the  inner  side  of  each  leg. 

The  sectoral  lines  proceed  in  pairs  from  the  centre  of  the 
hinge  along  each  leg,  and  although  the  scales  consist  of  two 
or  three  lines,  parallel  to  the  sectoral  lines,  all  measurements 
must  be  made  on  the  inner  lines  of  each  scale,  i.e.  the  lines 
that  radiate  from  the  centre. 


INSTRUMENTS   FOR   MEASURING   ANGLES,    ETC.     95 


When  the  measurement  is  confined  to  a  Hne  on  one  leg  of  the 
sector,  it  is  called  a  lateral  distance ;  but  when  it  is  taken  from  a 


Fig.  194. 

point  on  a  line  on  one  leg  to  a  similar  point  on  a  corresponding- 
line  on  the  opposite  leg,  it  is  called  a  transverse  distance. 

Simple    proportion. — Let    AB    and    AC    (Fig.    195)    represent 
a   pair  of  sectoral  lines,   and   BC    and    DE  b, 
two  transverse  measurements  taken  between 
this  pair  of  Hnes  ;  then  AB  is  equal  to  AC, 

and  AD  to  AE,  so  that  AB  :  AC  :  :  AD  :  AE,       d\  -    - -7£ 

and  the  lines  AB  :  BC  :  :  AD  :  DE. 


The  Line  of  Lines. 

The  primary  divisions  only  are  shown  in 
the  illustration  ;  in  the  real  instrument,  each 
of  these  is  subdivided  into  ten  secondarv  divisions 


135.    To  find   the   fourth   proportional   to   three  given  lines. 

From  the  centre,  measure  along  one  leg  a  lateral  distance  equal 
to  the  first  term  ;  then  open  the  sector  till  the  transverse  distance 


96  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

between  this  point  and  a  corresponding  point  on  the  other  leg 
is  equal  to  the  second  term  ;  then  measure  from  the  centre 
along  one  leg  a  lateral  distance  equal  to  the  third  term  ;  the 
transverse  distance  from  this  point  to  a  corresponding  point  on 
the  opposite  leg  will  then  give  the  fourth  term. 

Example. — To  find  the  fourth  proportional  to  the  numbers  3, 
4  and  9.  From  the  division  marked  3,  which  is  the  first  term, 
open  the  sector  till  the  distance  between  this  point  and  the 
corresponding  division  on  the  other  leg  is  equal  to  4  divisions  : 
this  will  be  the  second  term.  Then  9  being  the  third  term,  the 
transverse  distance  between  the  corresponding  divisions  at  this 
point  will  give  the  fourth  term,  viz.  12. 


136.    To  find  the  third  proportional  to  two  ^ven  lines  or 
numbers. 

Make  a  third  term  equal  to  the  second,  then  the  fourth  term 
will  give  the  required  result 


137.   To  bisect  a  given  line. 

Open  the  sector  till  the  transverse  distance  between  the  end 
divisions,  10  and  10,  is  equal  to  the  given  line  ;  then  the  transverse 
distance  between  5  and  5  will  bisect  the  given  Hne. 


138.    To  divide  a  given  line  AB  into  any  number  of  equal  parts. 

For  example,  eight  (Fig.  196).     When  the  number  of  parts  is  a 

power  of  2,   the  division 

A       '        D — -^ Q ' ' ' ^  is  best  performed  by  suc- 

Fig.  196.  cessive  bisections.    Thus, 

make  AB  a  transverse 
distance  between  10  and  10,  then  the  distance  between  5  and 
5  will  give  AC  =  half  AB.  Then  make  the  transverse  distance 
between  10  and  io  =  AC,  the  distance  between  5  and  5  will 
then  give  AD  =  one  quarter  of  AB.  By  repeating  the  operation 
each  quarter  will  be  bisected,  and  the  given  line  divided  into 
eight  equal  parts  as  required. 


INSTRUMENTS    FOR   MEASURING   ANGLES,   ETC.     97 

When  the  number  of  divisions  are  unequal,— for  example, 
seven  (Fig.  197), — make  the  transverse  distance  between  7  and 

I  1  I  I  1  I  '  I 

A  c        B 

Fig.  197. 

7  equal  to  the  given  line  AB  ;  then  take  the  distance  between 
6  and  6,  which  will  give  AC.  The  distance  CB  will  then  divide 
the  line  into  seven  equal  parts. 

139.    How  to  use  the  sector  as  a  scale. 

Example. — A  scale  of  1  inch  equals  5  chains.  Take  one  inch 
on  the  dividers,  and  open  the  sector  till  this  forms  a  transverse 
distance  between  5  and  5  on  each  line  of  lines  ;  then  the  corre- 
sponding distances  between  the  other  divisions  and  subdivisions 
will  represent  the  number  of  chains  and  links  indicated  by 
these  divisions  :  for  instance,  the  distance  between  4  and  4 
represents  4  chains,  6.5  =  6  chains  50  links,  Z-7="3  chains  70 
links,  etc. 

Note. — i  chain  is  equal  to  100  links. 

140.    To  construct  a  scale  of  feet  and  inches,  in  which  2^  inches  shall 
represent  20  inches. 

Make  the  transverse  distance  between  10  and  10  equal  to  2\ 
inches ;  then  the  distance  between  6  and  6  will  represent  12  inches. 
Make  AB  (Fig.  198)  equal  to  this  length.     Bisect  this  distance 

'  P .  .  ^  .  t .  ,  ^  .  t  ^/ ^.^ 

A  D  C  E    F  B  " 

Fig.  198. 

in  C,  as  described  for  Fig.  196  ;  then  bisect  AC  and  CB  in  D 
and  E  in  the  same  manner.  Take  the  transverse  distance 
between  5  and  5,  which  will  give  AF  10  inches  ;  EF  will  then 
trisect  each  of  the  four  divisions  already  obtained.  AB  will  then 
be  divided  into  twelve  divisions,  which  will  represent  inches. 
Produce  the  line  AB  to  H,  and  make  BH  equal  to  AB.  BH 
will  then  represent  one  foot. 

G 


98  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

141.   How  the  sector  may  be  used  for  enlarging  or  reducing  a 
drawing. 

Let  ABC  (Fig.  199)  represent  three  points  in  a  drawing,  let 
it  be  required  to  reduce  this  in  the  proportion  of  4  to  7. 
Make  the  transverse  distance  between  7  and  7  equal  to  AB  ; 
then  take  the  distance  between  4  and  4,  and  make  DE  equal  to 
this  length.     Also  make  the  distance  between  7  and  7  equal  to 

A 


Fig.  199. 

AC  ;  then  take  the  distance  between  4  and  4,  and  from  D  as 
centre,  with  this  distance  as  radius,  describe  an  arc.  In  the 
same  manner  make  the  distance  between  7  and  7  equal  to  BC  ; 
then  with  a  radius  equal  to  4,  4,  describe  another  arc  from  E, 
cutting  the  other  arc  in  F.  Join  EF  and  DF.  Then  DEF  will 
be  a  reduced  copy  of  ABC,  in  the  proportion  of  4  :  7  as  required. 

142.    To  enlarge  a  drawing  in  the  proportion  of  7  to  4. 

In  this  instance  the  sector  would  be  opened  so  that  the 
transverse  distance  between  4  and  4  should  represent  the 
original  measurements,  while  those  required  for  the  copy  would 
be  taken  between  7  and  7. 

The  Line  of  Chords. 

In  the  scale  of  chords  already  described  (Prob.  133)  we  are 
limited  to  one  radius  in  setting  off  angles — viz.  a  radius  equal  to 
the  60  marked  on  the  scale  ;  in  the  double  line  of  chords  on  the 


INSTRUMENTS   FOR   MEASURING  ANGLES,   ETC.     99 


sector  there  is  no  such  hmitation — we  can  set  off  any  radius 
equal  to  the  transverse  distance  between  the  two  points  60  and 
60,  from  their  nearest  approach  to  each  other  up  to  the  fullest 
extent  the  opening  of  the  sector  will  admit  of. 


143.    To  construct  an  angle  of  50^. 
Open   the    sector   at    any    convenient   distance. 


Take    the 


transverse  distance  between  the 
points  60  and  60,  and  construct  an 
arc  with  this  radius.  Let  AB 
(Fig.  200)  represent  this  radius. 
Now  take  the  transverse  distance 
between  50  and  50,  and  set  it  off 
from  B  on  the  arc,  which  will  give 
the  point  C.  Join  AC.  Then  BAC 
will  be  50°,  as  required. 

A  greater  angle  than  60°  cannot 
be  taken  from  the  sector  with  one  measurement  ;  if  the  angle  to 
be  measured  is  more  than  60°,  successive  measurements  must  be 
taken. 

144.    On  an  arc  f  inch  in  radius,  to  construct  an  angle  of  125°. 

Make  the  transverse  distance  between  the  points  60  and  60 
I  inch.  Let  AB  (Fig.  201)  represent  this  distance.  Describe 
an  arc  with  AB  as  radius.  Take 
the  distance  between  the  points 
50  and  50  from  the  sector,  and 
set  it  off  on  the  arc  from  B  to  C. 
Also  take  the  distance  from  40 
to  40,  and  set  it  off  from  C  to 
D.  Then  take  the  distance 
between  35  and  35,  and  set  it 
off  from  D  to  E.  Join  EA.  Then  the  angle  BAE  will  be  125°. 
5o°  +  4o°  +  35°-i25°. 

145.    To  construct  an  angle  of  3^  on  the  same  arc. 
With  the  sector  open  at  the  same  angle  as  before,  take  the 
transverse  distance  between  the  points  47  and  47,  and  set  it  off 
on  the  arc  from  B  to  H.     Join  HA  and  CA.     Then  HAC  will 
be  3°  as  required.     50° -47°  =  3° 


loo  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


The  Line  of  Polygons. 

This  pair  of  lines  is  used  for  dividing  a  circle  into  any  number 
of  equal  parts  between  four  and  twelve,  by  joining  which  the 
regular  polygons  are  formed.  The  transverse  distance  between 
the  points  6  and  6  is  always  used  for  the  radius  of  the  circle  to 
be  divided ;  because  the  radius  of  a  circle  containing  a  six-sided 
figure,  i.e.  a  hexagon,  is  always  equal  to  one  side  of  the  figure. 

Open  the  sector  till  the  transverse  distance  between  6  and  6 
is  equal  to  the  radius  of  the  circle  ;  then  the  distance  between 
the  points  4  and  4  will  divide  the  circle  into  four  equal  parts, 
the  distance  between  5  and  5  into  five  equal  parts,  and  so  on 
up  to  twelve. 

If  it  be  required  to  construct  a  polygon  on  a  given  straight 
line,  open  the  sector  till  the  transverse  distance  between  the 
numbers  answering  to  the  number  of  sides  of  the  required 
polygon  shall  equal  the  extent  of  the  given  line,  then  the  distance 
between  the  points  6  and  6  will  give  the  radius  of  the  circle  to 
be  divided  by  the  given  line  into  the  required  number  of  equal 
parts. 

146.    On  a  given  line  1  inch  in  length,  to  construct  a  heptagon. 

Open  the  sector  till  the  transverse  distance  between  the 
points  7  and  7  shall  equal  i  inch  ;  the  distance  between  the 
points  6  and  6  will  then  give  the  radius  of  a  circle,  to  which 
the  given  line  will  form  seven  equal  chords. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  On  a  line  4"  long,  draw  a  semicircle,  and  upon  it  set  out  the 
primary  divisions  of  a  protractor,  by  construction  alone. 

2.  Construct  a  scale  of  chords  from  the  protractor  set  out  in  the 
preceding  question. 

3.  Make  a  scale  of  chords  of  2"  radius,  to  read  to  lO°  up  to  90°. 
The  scale  must  be  finished  and  figured.  At  the  ends  of  a  line  2^"  long 
construct,  from  the  scale,  angles  of  20°  and  70° respectively.       (April,  '99. ) 


CHAPTER    X. 


THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  SIMILAR  FIGURES. 
PRINCIPLES   OF   SIMILITUDE. 

Similar  Figures. 

Similar  figures  have  their  angles  equal  and  their  corresponding 
sides  proportional. 

All  regular  figures — such  as  equilateral  triangles,  squares, 
and  regular  polygons — are  similar.  Other  quadrilateral  figures — 
triangles  and  irregular  polygons — can  be  constructed  similar  to 
given  ones  by  making  their  angles  equal. 

147.    To  construct  within  a  given  triangle  ABC,  and  equidistant 

from  the  sides  of  it,  a 

similar    triangle,    the 

base  of  which  is  equal 

to  the   given   line   D, 

Fig.  202. 
Bisect  the  angles  BAC 
and  ACB  by  lines  meet- 
ing at  the  centre  E  (Prob. 
12).  Join  EB.  On  the 
line  AB  set  off  AF  equal  to 
the  given  line  D.  From 
F  draw  a  line  parallel  to 
AE  till  it  cuts  EB  at  G 
(Prob.  3).  From  G  draw 
a  line  parallel  to  BC  till  it 
cuts  EC  at  H.     From  H 

draw  a  line  parallel   to  AC  till  it  cuts   EA  at   K. 
KGH  will  be  the  similar  triangle  required. 


Fig.  202. 


Join   KG. 


102 


GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


148.    To  construct  about  a  given  triangle  ABC,  and  equidistant 

from  its  sides,  a  similar  triangle,  the  base  of  which  is  equal 

to  a  given  line  L.     Fig.  202. 

Set  off  on  the  base  AB  produced,  AN  equal  to  the  given  line 

L.     From  N  draw  a  line  parallel  to  EA  (Prob.  3)  till  it  meets 

EB  produced  at  O.     From  O  draw  a  line  parallel  to  AB  till  it 

meets  EA  produced  at  M.     From  M  draw  a  line  parallel  to  AC 

till  it  meets  EC  produced  at  P.     Join  PO.     Then  MOP  will  be 

the  similar  triangle  required. 


To  construct  within  a  given  square  ABDC,  and  equidistant 


150. 


from  its  sides,  a  square,  one 
side  of  which  is  equal  to  the 
given  line  E. 

Draw  the  diagonals  AD  and 
CB.  From  A  set  off  AF  along 
AB  equal  to  the  given  line  E. 
From  F,  parallel  to  AD,  draw  a 
line  till  it  meets  CB  at  G  (Prob. 
3).  With  M  as  centre,  and 
radius  MG,  set  off  the  points  H, 
K,  and  L,  and  join  GH,  HK, 
KL,andLG.  Then  HGLKwill 
be  the  square  required. 


Fig.  203. 


To  construct  a  triangle  similar  to  a  given  triangle  CDE,  and 
having  its  perimeter  equal  to  a  given  straight  line  AB. 

On  the  given  line  AB  construct 
a  triangle  ABF  similar  to  the 
given  triangle  CDE,  by  making 
the  angles  at  A  and  B  equal  to 
the  angles  at  C  and  D  respec- 
tively. Bisect  the  angles  at  A 
and  B  by  lines  meeting  at  G. 
From  G  draw  a  line  parallel  to 
FB  till  it  meets  AB  at  L  ;  and 
also  a  line  parallel  to  AF  till  it 
meets  AB  at  H.  Then  HLG 
will  be  the  triangle  required. 


CONSTRUCTIOX   OF    SIMILAR   FIGURES. 


103 


Principles  of  Similitude. 

Draw  a  rectangle  ABDC,  and  join  each  angle  to  any 
E.  Bisect  EB  in  G,  EA  in  F,  ED  in  K,  and  EC  in  H. 
FG,  GK,  KH,  and 
HF,  then  FGKH 


point 
Join 


will 
be  a  rectangle  with 
sides  one -half  the 
length  of  the  rectangle 
ABCD.  If  we  draw 
the  diagonals  BC  and 
GH,  we  shall  find 
they    are    parallel    to 

each    other,  and    that  i"ig-205. 

BC  :  GH  as  2:1.  If  we  take  any  point  L- in  BD  and  join 
it  to  point  E,  LE  will  intersect  GK  in  M,  and  will  divide  GK 
in  the  same  proportion  as  BD  is  divided. 

On  the  principle  of  this  problem,  we  can  draw  a  figure  similar 
to  a  given  figure,  and  having  any  proportion  desired,  e.g. — 

If  we  wish  to  draw  a  rectangle  having  sides  equal  to  one- 
third  of  a  given  rectangle,  we  should  trisect  the  lines  drawn 
from  the  angles  of  the  given  rectangle  to  E.  The  point  E  is 
called  the  centre  of  similitude  of  the  two  figures  ABDC  and 
FGKH,  which  in  this  instance  are  said  to  be  in  direct  similitude. 
The  following  problem  shows  the  principle  of  inverse  similitude. 

151.    To  draw  a  trapezium  similar  to  a  given  trapezium  ABDC, 
with    sides    two -thirds    the    length    of    those    of    the    given 
trapezium,  In  INVERSE  SIMILITUDE. 
Take  any  point  E  in 
a  convenient  position. 
Produce  a  line  from  A 
through  E  to  K,  mak- 
ing EK  equal  to  two- 
thirds    of   AE    (Prob. 
117).     Proceed  in  the 
same  manner  with  each 
of  the  points  B,  C,  and 
D,  which  will  give  the  points  H,  G,  and  F.     Join  KH,  HF,  FG, 
and  GK.     Then  FGHK  will  be  the  trapezium  required. 


104 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


152.    To  draw  an  irregular  polygon  similar  to  a  given  polygon, 
but  with  sides  two-thirds  the  length  of  those  of  the  given 
polygon  ABCDEFG. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  the  centre  of  simihtude   should   be 

taken  outside  the  figure ;  if  more 
convenient,  we  can  use  one  of 
the  angles  of  the  figure,  e.g.  let 
A  be  the  centre  of  similitude. 
Draw  lines  from  all  the  angles 
of  the  polygon  to  A.  Make  AK 
two-thirds  of  AD  (Prob.  117), 
and  divide  all  the  other  lines  in 
the  same  proportion,  which  will 
give  the  points  L,  M,  N,  O,  H, 
andK.  Join  NM,  ML,  LK,  KH, 
and  HO,  which  will  give  the  polygon  required. 

Note. — The  figures  are  similar,  and  the  corresponding  sides 


Fig.  207.' 


are  parallel  to  each  other. 


153.    To  draw  an  irregular  pentagon  similar  to  a  given  pentagon 
ABCDE,    but    with   sides    one-half   the    length   of   those    of 

the  given  pentagon, 
without  using  any 
centre  of  similitude. 
Draw  FG  in  any 
convenient  position 
parallel  to  AB,  and 
half  its  length  (Prob. 
4).  From  G  draw 
GH  parallel  to  BC 
and  half  its  length. 
Proceed  in  the  same 
way  with  the  remaining  sides,  which  will  give  the  pentagon 
required. 


154. 


To  draw  a  curve  or  pattern  similar  to  a  given  figure, 
but  to  two-thirds  the  scale. 


Enclose  the   given   figure  in  a  convenient  rectangular  figure 
ABDC,  and  divide  the  sides  of  the  rectangle  into  equal  parts 


CONSTRUCTION    OF   SIMILAR   FIGURES. 


105 


(Prob.  9).     Join  these  divisions,  which  will  divide  the  rectangle 
into  a  number  of  equal  squares  or  rectangles.     Draw  another 


G 

> 

^ 

H 

/ 

/ 

"^ 

, 

/ 

^ 

,\ 

0 

0 

— 

^ 

E 

F 

r 

> 

-^ 

[ 

/ 

7 

-^ 

\ 

/ 

/ 

^ 

\ 

A 

/ 

/"^ 

^:^V(^ 

^^ 

w 

Fig.  209. 


Fig.  210. 


rectangle  EFGH  with  sides  two-thirds  the  length  of  the 
rectangle  enclosing  the  given  figure,  and  divide  it  in  a  similar 
manner. 

Draw  the  curves  to  intersect  these  smaller  divisions  in  the 
same  places  as  the  larger  divisions  are  intersected  by  the  given 
figure. 

Note. — This  method  is  used  for  enlarging  or  reducing  maps 
or  drawings  to  any  scale. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Draw  a  regular  hexagon  on  a  side  of  i";  construct  a  similar  figure 
on  a  side  of  ^",  using  one  angle  as  the  centre  of  similitude. 

2.  Draw  a  rectangle  with  sides  of  2  7"  and  1.5"  ;  construct  a  similar 
figure  by  inverse  similitude,  with  sides  in  the  proportion  to  those  given 
as  3  :  5- 

3.  Draw  a  regular  pentagon  in  a  circle  of  2§"  diameter  ;  construct  a 
similar  figure  by  direct  similitude,  with  sides  in  the  proportion  to  those 
of  first  pentagon  as  4  :  7. 

4.  Make  an  irregular  pentagon  ABODE  from  the  following  data  : 

Sides:  AB=:2i",  BC=ii",  CD  =  2r,   DE=i". 
Angles:  ABC  =105°,  ABE  =  30°,  BAE=io5°. 
Then  make  a  si7Jiilar  figure  in  which  the  side  corresponding  to  AB  is 
If"  long.  (June,  '98.) 


io6 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


5.  Construct  a  rectangle  hiavinq:  one  of  ils  sides  if",  and  its  diagonals 
2"  long.     Make  a  similar  rectangle  having  its  shorter  sides  i^"  long. 

(April,  '96.) 

6.  Construct  a  triangle,  sides  i^",  i|",  and  2^"  long,  and  a  similar 
triangle  having  its  longest  side  2^"  long.  Measure  and  write  down  the 
number  of  degrees  in  each  of  the  angles.  (Tune,  '97.) 

7.  Construct  a  figure  (Fig.  211)  similar  to  that  given  in  the  diagram, 


but  having  the  side  corresponding  to  AB  2"  long. 


(May,  '97.) 


Fig.  212. 


Fig.  213. 


8.    Construct  a  figure  similar  to  the  given  figure  (Fig.  212),  but  having 
the  distance  corresponding  to  CD  i"  long.  (June,  '99.) 

■  9.    Make  a  figure  similar  to  the  given  one  (Fig.  213),  but  having  the 
length  corresponding  to  CD  2"  long.  (April,  '00.) 


CHAPTER   XL 


CONIC    SECTIONS. 


A  conic  section  is  obtained  by  intersecting  a  cone  by  a  plane. 
There  are  fiv^e  different  sections  to  a  cone,  viz. : 

1.  A  triangle,   when  the  plane  cuts  the  cone 
through  its  axis. 

2.  A   circle,    when   the   plane   cuts   the  cone 
parallel  to  its  base,  as  at  A,  Fig.  214. 

3.  An  ellipse,  when  the  plane  cuts  the  cone 
obliquely,  without  intersecting  the  base,  as  at  B. 

4.  A  parabola,  when  the  plane  cuts  the  cone 
parallel  to  one  side,  as  at  C. 

5.  An  hjrperbola,  when  the  cone  is  cut  by  a  plane  that  is  per- 
pendicular to  its  base,  i.e.  parallel  to  its  axis,  as  at  D,  or  inclined 
to  the  axis  at  a  less  angle  than  the  side  of  the  cone. 

These  curves  can  be  drawn  with  the  greatest  accuracy  and 
facility  by  the  following  arrangement.  Cut  a  circular  opening  in 
a  piece  of  thin  card-board  or  stiff 
paper,  and  place  it  a  short  dis- 
tance from  a  lighted  candle  ;  this 
will  form  a  cone  of  light  (Fig. 
215).  If  we  place  a  plane,  e.g. 
a  piece  of  paper  pinned  to  a 
drawing-board,  so  as  to  allow 
the  hght  coming  through  the 
circular  aperture  to  fall  upon  it, 
we  can,  by  placing  it  in  the 
several  positions,  intersect  this  cone  of  light  so  as  to  form 
the  required  sections,  which  can  then  be  traced.  C  is  the 
candle,  A  is  the  circular  aperture,  and  P  the  plane. 


GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


In  Fig-.  215  the  plane  is  parallel  to  the  aperture,  so  the  section 
obtained  is  a  circle. 


Fig.  216. 


Fig.  217. 


If  the  plane  is  placed  obHquely  to  the  aperture,  as  in  Fig.  216, 
the  section  obtained  is  an  ellipse. 

By  placing  the  plane  parallel  to  the  side  of  the  cone,  as  in 

Fig.  217,  we  get  as  sec- 
^^'''  tion,  the  parabola. 

If  we  place  the  plane 
at  right  angles  to  the 
aperture,  we  obtain  the 
hyperbola,  Fig.  218. 

By  adjusting  the  posi- 
tions of  the  candle,  aper- 
ture,   and  plane,   we  can 
required  condition,  both  as 


Fig.  2 


obtain  a  conic  section  to  suit  any 
to  shape  or  size. 

A  truncated  cone  or  frustum  is  the  part  of  the  cone  below  any 
section  as  A  or  B,  Fig.  214. 


The  Ellipse. 

An  ellipse  has  two  unequal  diameters  or  axes,  which  are 
at  right  angles  to  each  other.  The  longer  one  is  called 
the  transverse  diameter,  and  the  shorter  one  the  conjugate 
diameter. 

The  transverse  diameter  is  also  called  the  major  axis,  as 
AB  (Fig.  219),  and  the  conjugate  diameter  the  minor  axis, 
as  CD. 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


109 


Fig.  219. 


155.  The  two  axes  AB  and 
CD  being  given,  to  con- 
struct an  ellipse. 
Take  a  strip  of  paper  and 
set  ofif  upon  it  the  distance 
FH,  equal  to  half  the  major 
axis  and  the  distance  FG, 
equal  to  half  the  minor  axis. 
By  keeping  the  point  G  on 
the  major  axis,  and  the 
point  H  on  the  minor  axis, 
the  point  F  will  give  a 
point  in  the  ellipse.  A 
succession  of  points  can  be 
found  in  this  manner, 
through  which  draw  a  fair 
curve,  which  will  be  the 
required  ellipse. 

156.    To  construct  an  ellipse,  given  an  axis  and  two  foci. 

An  ellipse  has  two  foci,  as  the  points  A  and  B,  Fig,  220, 
and  the  sum  of  the  radii  from  these  two  points  is  always 
equal. 

Let  A  and  B  represent 
two  pins,  and  ABC  a  piece 
of  thread.  The  point  of  a 
pencil  is  placed  inside  the 
thread  at  C  and  moved 
so  as  to  keep  the  thread 
always  tight  ;  the  point 
will  trace  out  an  ellipse. 
As  the  length  of  the  thread 
is  constant,  the  sum  of 
the  two  radii  is  constant 
also. 

The  length  of  the  major 
or  minor  axis  given  will 
determine  the  length  of  the 
thread. 


Fig.  220. 


no  GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

157.    To  construct  an  ellipse  by  means  of  intersecting  lines,  the 

transverse  diameter  AB  and  the  conjugate  diameter  CD  being 

given. 

Draw  the  lines  AB   and  CD  bisecting  each  other  at  right 

angles  in  the  point  E  (Prob.  5).     Draw  HK  and  FG  parallel  to 

AB,    through    C    and    D, 


H 


W\ 

E      '         '        /' 

V^4 

,2>  /2.     -'I 

B 


and  HF  and  KG  parallel 

to  CD  through  A  and  B. 

(Prob.  3).    Divide  AH  and 

BK   into  any  number  of 

equal  parts,  say  four  (Prob. 

9),  and  AE  and  EB  into 

the  same  number.     Join 

C  with  the  three  points  in 

AH  and  BK,  and  produce 

lines  from  D  through  the 

three   points    in  AE  and 

EB.     Where    these   lines 

intersect  those  drawn  from  C,  points  in  one-half  of  the  ellipse 

will  be  obtained.     Find  corresponding  points  for  the  other  half 

in  the  same  manner,  and  draw  a  fair  curve  through  the  points 

obtained,  which  will  be  the  required  ellipse. 


D 

Figr.  221. 


158.    To  find  the  normal  and  tangent  to  a  given  ellipse  ABCD,  at  a 
given  point  P. 

With  C  as  centre,  and 
radius  equal  to  EA,  draw 
the  arc  FH,  which  will 
give  the  two  foci  in  F  and 
H.  Join  the  given  point 
P  with  F  and  H,  and 
bisect  the  angle  FPH  by 
the  line  PK  (Prob.  12). 
PK  is  the  normal.  Draw 
the  line  NO  through  P, 
perpendicular  to  PK. 
This  is  the  tangent  re- 
quired. 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


Ill 


159.    To  complete  an  ellipse  from  an  elliptical  curve. 
Let  AB  be  the  given  curve.     Draw  any  two  sets  of  parallel 

Join  the  points  of  bisection 


v^F 


chords  and  bisect  them  (Prob 

in  each  set  by  lines  meeting 

in  C.     Produce  one  of  these 

lines  till  it  meets  the  given 

curve    in    D.      With    C    as  y^VA  \  ^M 

centre,  and  CD  as  radius,  set 

off  on  the   given   curve    the 

point  A.    Join  AD.    Through 

C   draw  a  line  HK  parallel 

to   AD    (Prob.    3),    also   the   ^ 

line  CL  perpendicular  to  AD 

(Prob.  7).      Produce   CL   to 

M,  making  CM  equal  to  CL. 

Also  make  CK  equal  to  CH. 

Then    LM    will    be    the   transverse    and    HK    the    conjugate 

diameters.     The  ellipse  can  then  be  completed  by  any  of  the 

constructions  already  described.    From  A  and  D  lines  are  drawn 

parallel  to  LM  ;   with  C  as  centre,  and  radius  CD,  set  off  E 

and  F,  these  will  be  two  more  points  in  the  ellipse. 

160.  To  draw  an  ellipse  to  pass  through  three  given  points  A,  B,  C. 

Join  AC  and  bisect  it  in  D.  Join  BD.  From  A  and  C  draw 
the  lines  AE  and  CF  parallel  to  BD.  Through  B  draw  the  line 
EF  parallel  to  AC.  E  B 

Produce  BD  to  H, 
and  make  D  H  equal 
toBD.  Divide  AD 
and  DC  and  also 
AE  and  CF  into  a 
number  of  equal 
parts,  say  four.  Join 
the  divisions  on  AE 
andCFtoB.  From 
H,  through  the  divisions  on  AC,  draw  lines  till  they  meet  the 
corresponding  lines  drawn  to  B.  Draw  a  fair  curve  through 
these  points,  which  will  give  half  of  the  required  ellipse.  Proceed 
in  the  same  way  with  the  other  half. 


112  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

161.    To  determine  points  for  drawing  a  parabola,  the  focus  A 
and  the  directrix  BC  being  given. 

Draw  the  line  EAD  perpendicular  to  the  directrix  BC  (Prob.  y), 
which  will  give  the  axis.  Bisect  AD  in  F  (Prob.  i),  which  will 
be  the  vertex  of  the  curve.  Take  any  points  a,  d,  c,  d,  and  e  in 
the  axis,  and  draw  perpendiculars  through  them.  From  A  as 
centre,  mark  off  on  the  perpendiculars,  arcs  with  radii  equal  to 
aD,  dD,  cD,  dD,  and  eD,  cutting  the  perpendiculars  in  a'^  b\  ^, 
d\  and  e' .  These  are  the  points  required  for  the  lower  half  of 
the  parabola.  The  points  above  the  axis  are  found  in  the  same 
manner. 


B 

V 

A 

^ 

K/^ 

■^ 

f 

/' 

1 

\ 

-E 

c 

A 

\ 

-b 

C 

a' 

d    L 

e 

Fig.  225. 


162.  To  draw  a  tangent  to  a  parabola  at  a  given  point  H. 
Join  AH.  From  A  set  off  AK  on  the  axis  produced  equal 
to  AH.  Join  KH,  which  will  be  the  required  tangent.  This 
could  also  be  found  by  drawing  a  Hne  from  H  parallel  to  the 
axis  till  it  meets  the  directrix  in  B,  and  then  bisecting  the  angle 
AHB  by  the  line  KH  (Prob.  12),  which  is  the  tangent.  If  from 
H  we  draw  the  line  HL  perpendicular  to  the  tangent,  it  will  be 
the  normal. 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


113 


163.    To  draw  a  parabola,  an  abscissa  AB  and  an  ordinate  BC 
being  given. 

Complete  the  rectangle  ABCD.  Divide  BC  into  any  number 
of  equal  parts,  say  six 
(Prob.  9),  and  CD  into 
the  same  number.  From 
each  division  in  BC  draw 
lines  parallel  to  CD  (Prob. 
3),  and  from  each  of 
the  divisions  in  CD  draw 
lines  to  the  vertex  A. 
Where  these  lines  of 
corresponding  numbers 
intersect,  e.g.  where  i 
intersects  with  i',  2  with 
2',  etc.,  are  points  in  the 
parabola.  Find  corre- 
sponding points  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  axis,  and  draw  a 
fair  curve  through  them. 


164.   To  draw  an  hyperbola,  the  diameter  AB,  an  ordinate  CD, 
and  an  abscissa  BD  being  given. 

Draw  BE  parallel  to  CD  (Prob.  3),  and  complete  the  rectangle. 
Produce  BD,  and   make 
AB    equal    to    the   given 
diameter.        Divide     CD 
and  CE  into  any  number 
01   equal   parts,    say  four 
(Prob.    9),   «,  ^,   c.      The 
divisions  on   CD  join  to 
A,  and  those  on  CE  to  B.  c' 
The    intersection    of   the  u 
corresponding    lines,    e.g.    , 
where  a  intersects  c^',  b  b\  ^ 
and  c  c\  are  points  in  the 
hyperbola  required.    Find 
corresponding  points   for 

the  other  half,  and  draw  a  fair  curve  through  them. 

H 


114 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


A  form  of  hyperbola  frequently  used  is  the  rectangular  hyper- 
bola. Let  AB  and  AC 
represent  two  axes,  and 
E  the  vertex  of  the  curve. 
Complete  the  rectangle 
ABDC.  Take  any  point 
H  in  CD  and  join  it  to 
A.  Let  fall  a  perpendi- 
cular from  E  till  it  meets 
HA  in  O  (Prob.  7). 
From  O  draw  OK  parallel 
to  AB  till  it  meets  a  line 
from  H  parallel  to  AC  in  the  point  K  (Prob.  3).  This  will  be 
one  point  in  the  curve,  and  others  may  be  found  by  taking  fresh 
points  on  CD  and  treating  them  in  a  similar  manner. 

One  peculiar  property  of  this  figure  is  that,  if  we  take  any 
point  in  the  curve  and  draw  lines  from  it  perpendicular  to  the 
lines  AB  and  AC, — for  example,  KN  and  KM, — the  rectangle 
contained  by  the  two  lines  is  always  equal,  i.e.  KN  x  KM  would 
be  the  same  for  any  point  in  the  curve. 


165.    A  mechanical  method  of  drawing-  a  parabola  or  hyperbola. 
Let  AB  represent  the  edge  of  a  drawing-board  and  CD  the 

edge  of  a  tee-square.  Take 
a  piece  of  string  equal  in 
length  to  CD,  fix  one  end  at 
D  and  the  other  at  E,  which 
is  the  focus  of  the  curve.  If 
a  pencil  be  held  against  the 
string  so  as  to  keep  it  tight 
against  the  tee -square  when 
the  tee-square  is  moved  up- 
wards, the  pencil  will  trace 
half  a  parabola.  AB  is  the 
directrix,  and  K  the  vertex  of 
Fig.  229.  the    curve.      Compare     this 

method  with  the  construction  of  Prob.   161. 

If  the  angle  DCA  were  an  acute  or  obtuse  angle  instead  of  a 

right  angle,  the  pencil  would  trace  an  hyperbola. 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


"5 


166.    To  draw  an  oval  by  arcs  of  circles,  its  transverse  diameter  AB 
and  its  conjug-ate  CD  being  given. 

Set  off  on  AB  the  distance  AE  equal  to  half  the  conjugate 
diameter.      Through    E    draw  the    line    FG    perpendicular   to 

A 


AB  (Prob.  7).  With  E 
as  centre  and  EA  as 
radius,  draw  the  semi- 
circle CAD.  From  C 
and  D  set  off  CF  and 
DG  equal  to  EA.  From 
B  set  off  BH  equal  to 
half  of  EA.  Join  FH 
and  GH.  With  F  and 
G  as  centres,  and  FD, 
GC  as  radius,  draw  the 
arcs  DL  and  CK.  With 
H  as  centre,  and  H  K  as 
radius,     draw     the    arc 


/ 

c/ 

^ 

E          \ 

V         i 

1 

-1 

> 

/  ' 

\N 

X  / 

\       ^ 

^    / 

H^'    / 

\                 X 

\               ^ 

N        X 

*K^ 

j/l 

D  C, 


B 

Fig.  230. 


KBL,  which  wili  complete  the  oval  required. 

The  conic  sections  are  of  frequent  occurrence  both  in  science 
and  art :  the  heaAcnly  bodies  trace  them  in  their  courses ;  they 
are  used  by   engineers   where      A  ^ 

great  strength  is  required,  such 
as  the  construction  of  bridges  ; 
and  they  form  the  contour  of 
mouldings,  etc.  Those  subtle  w 
curves  that  we  admire  in  the 
outline  of  Japanesehandscreens 
and  vases  are  often  parabolas. 

Fig.  231  is  an  illustration 
showing  how  these  curves  are 
applied  to  art  forms. 

To  draw  the  curve  CB. 
Draw  the  lines  AB  and  AC 
at  right  angles  to  each  other 
(Probi*  5).  Di-^id^^ch  into 
the  same  number  of  equal  jjarl#^.^, 
(Prob.  9),  and  join  them.     Pro- 


Fig.  231, 


ceed  in  the  same  manner  with  the  other  curve** 


ii6  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Cycloidal   Curves. 

If  a  circle  is  rolled  along  a  line  in  the  same  plane,  a  point  in 
the  circle  will  describe  a  curve  of  a  class  called  cycloidal. 

The  line  along  which  the  circle  rolls  is  called  a  director,  and 
the  point  itself  is  called  the  generator. 

The  curve  is  called  a  Cycloid  when  the  generator  point  is  in 
the  circumference  of  the  rolling  circle  and  the  director  is  a 
straight  line  ;  but  a  Trochoid  when  the  point  is  not  in  the  circum- 
ference of  the  circle. 

When  the  director  is  not  a  straight  line,  but  the  outside  of 
another  circle,  and  the  generator  is  in  the  circumference  of  the 
rolling  circle,  the  curve  desc^bed  is  called  an  Epicycloid  ;  but 
when  the  point,  or  generator,  is  not  in  the  circumference  of  the 
rolling  circle,  it  is  called  an  Epitrochoid. 

If  the  director  is  the  inside  of  a  circle  and  the  generator  a 
point  in  the  circumference  of  the  rolling  circle,  the  curve  is 
called  a  Hypocycloid  ;  but  if  the  generator  is  not  in  the  circum- 
ference of  the  rolling  circle,  it  is  called  a  Hypotrochoid. 

The  Epicycloid  and  Hypocycloid  are  the  true  curves  for  the  teeth 
of  gearing.  The  director  is  the  pitch  circle  of  each  wheel  :  and 
if  the  rolling  circle  be  the  same  for  the  whole  set,  they  will  gear 
into  one  another. 

In  constructing  a  cycloid  it  is  necessary  to  make  a  line  equal 
in  length  to  the  arc  of  a  semicircle.     The  exact  relation  betwee" 
the  diameter  and  circumference  of  a  circle  cannot  be  express 
in  numbers  ;  but  the  following  problem  will  enable  us  to  arri- 
at  an  approximation,  correct  to  six  places  of  decimals. 

167.   To  draw  a  line  equal  to  tlie  length  of  a  semicircle. 

Let  AC  represent  the  radius.  Draw  the  semicircle  ABD. 
Produce  AC  to  D,  and  draw  BC  perpendicular  to  it.  From  A 
and  D  draw  tangents  parallel  to  BC,  and  through  B  drav/  a 
tangent  parallel  to  AD.  From  B  set  off  ;S£>»e(ifiial  to  the  jadius, 
and  draw  the  line  BF  through  E«  Pj-oduce  the  tangent  through 
A  to  H,  and  makej^H  equal  to  AD.  Join  HF,  which  will  be 
the  line  require^ 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


If  we  take  AC  to  represent  a  length  equal  to  the 
of  a  circle,  then  HF  will  equal  the  circumference, 


to  the  dimneter 


F  D 

Fig.  232. 

We  are  also  enabled  to  find  the  length  of  an  arc  by  this 
means  ;  e.g:  the  arc  to  the  chord  formed  by  one  side  of  a  pentagon, 

'  irfH  IS- eq3.l.tn  j^he  circumference,  then 
arc  required. 


FH 


-theleno-fh-(;,;\,,e 


168.   To  draw  a  cycloid. 

Let  AB  be  the  director,  and  /  the  generator  or  point  in  the 

rolling   circle   AM/).      Draw   Ak   equal    in   length   to  half  the 

circumference  of  the  circle  AM/,  and  divide  it  into  any  number 

^ ""  equal  divisions  (Prob.  10),  say  six,  at  d,  e,/,  j^,  and  /t.     Divide 

the  semicircle  into  the  same  number  of  equal  divisions  (Prob. 

14),  and  draw  lines  from  each  division  parallel  to  the  director 

AB.     Draw  the  line  CK  from  the  centre  of  the  circle  parallel  to 

AB.     Draw  lines  perpendicular  to  AB  at  the  points  d,  e,/,g;  /i, 

and  k  till  they  meet  the  line  CK  in  the  points  D,  E,  F,  G,  H, 

and   K.     With   each   of  the  points   D,  E,  F,  G,  H,  and   K  as 

mtres,  and  a  radius  cqunl  to  Cp,  draw  arcs  cutting  the  parallel 

^^»f^l^m^tltei  the  dnisions  ii^'tb^  fliiftlicircle  in  the  points 

K^  ^f  f^,f3lV  »hid  T.     This  wilT  give  points  in  half  the  cycloid. 

ndf:<^  40rt-^s(pWiciwig'  rtcjfnts  for  the  remaining  half,  and  draw 

feU'CtiWfe'  through  tlve  p«hir  ;v^^liH  give  the   cycloid 

furtTe'd. 


ii8 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


To  determine  the  tangent  and  normal  to  the  curve  at  any 
point  /:— Draw  the  Hne  //'  parallel  to  AB   till  it   meets  the 


Fig.  233. 

generating  circle  at  /'.  Join  /'A.  Through  /  draw  the  line 
WW  parallel  to  /'A.  This  will  be  the  normal  to  the  curve.  The 
tangent  rs  is  at  right  angles  to  this  line. 


169.   To  draw  an  epicycloid. 


Note. — The  length  of  the  di 


a  complete  curve  is 


to  the  whole  circle  as  the  radius  of  the  rolling  circle  is  to  the 
radius  of  the  director;  e.g.  if  radius  of  rolling  circle  ==  i  inch,  and 
that  of  director  =  6  inches  ;  then  the  director  =  ^  of  the  circle. 

Let  AB  be  the  director,  which  is  a  part  of  a  circle,  and/  the 
generator.  Take  Ak  equal  in  length  to  half  the  rolling  circle, 
AM/,  and  divide  it  into  any  number  of  equal  divisions,  say  six, 
at  ^,  ^,  /,  g.,  and  //.  Divide  the  semicircle  into  the  same  number  ; 
of  equal  divisions,  and  draw  lines  from  these  points,  as  well  as 
from  the  centre  of  the  circle,  concentric  with  the  arc  /:.B. 
From  the  centre  of  the  circle  that  contains  the  arc  AB  draw 
lines  through  the  points  d,  e,f,g.,  h,  and  k  till  they  meet  the  arc 
drawn  from  the  centre  of  the  rolling  circle.  With  D,  E,  F,  G, 
H,  and  K  as  centres,  and  a  radius  equal  to  Cp,  draw  arcs  til) 
they  meet  the  concentric  arcs  drawn  from  the  divisions  of  th'^e 
semicircle  in  the 
sponding  points^ 
through  all  the 

At  any  poi^i^f  -^^WF"""^BHHm|^^^^^K  c  .^^^' 
proceed  ^,gJpllow^.  ^R'^  ^^^  arc  tt  concent^^MPp^'--AB» 


t:>  iy(X 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


119 


till  it  meets  the  generating  circle  in  /'.     Join  /'A.     With  /  as 
centre,  and  radius  equal  to  /'A,  draw  an  arc  intersecting  AB  at 


Fig.  234. 


w'.     Join  tu>\  and  produce  it  to  w. 
tangent  rs  is  at  right  angles  to  it. 


This  is  the  normal.     The 


170.  To  draw  a  hypocycloid. 

Let  AB  be  the  director,  which  is  the  arc  of  a  circle,  and  p 
the  generator,  which  is  a  point  in  the  circumference  of  the 
roUing  circle  M.  Make  A/j  equal  in  length  to  half  of  the  circle 
M,  and  divide  it  into  any  number  of  equal  parts,  say  six,  at  d^ 
^■> /■>  .^1  arid  h.  Divide  the  semicircle  into  the  same  number  of 
equal  parts,  and  from,  the  centre  of  the  circle  containing  the  arc 
AB  draw  concentric  arcs  from  these  points,  ^s  well  as  from  the 


centr 


.  e  C.     Draw  lines  from  the  points  d,  e^f,  g,  h^  and  k  towards 

the  centre  of  the  circle  co-^maining  the  arc  AB  till  they  meet  the 

\rQ  from  the  centre  C  in  the  points  D,  E,  F,  G,  H,  and  K.     With 

-  jt  oe^  noints  as  centred,  and  a  radius  equal  to  C/,  draw 

res  till  they  meet  the  concentric  arcs  drawn  from  the  divisions 

■  the  semicircle  in  the  points  N,  O,  p-,"  O,  R,  and  T.     Find 

:    corresponding  points  for  the  othef  half,   and  draw  a  fair 

•/e  through  all  the  points,  which  will  give  the  hypocycloid 

-juired. 


I20  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN.  

The  tangent  and  normal  at  any  point  /  are  thus  o  i.  ed. 
Draw  the  arc  W  concentric  to  the  arc  AB  till  it  meets  ihe 
generating  circle  at  /'.     Join  /'A.     With  /  as  centre,  and  radius 


Fig.  235. 

equal  to  /'A,  set  off  on  AB  the  point  w'.  Join  fw',  and  produce 
it  to  7U.  This  is  the  normal.  The  tangent  rs  is  at  right 
ano-les  to  it. 


171.  To  construct  a  continuous  curve,  by  a  combination  of  arcs  of 
different  radii,  through  a  number  of  given  points  A,  B,  C,  D,  E, 
F,  G,  and  H. 

Join  the  points  AC,  CD,  DE,  etc.     Find  the  centre  K  of  the 

circle  containing  the  arc 
ABC  (Prob.  35).  Join  CK. 
Bisect  the  line  CD  at  right 
angles,  and  produce  the 
bisecting  perpendicular  till  it 
meets  CK  produced  in  L. 
Join  DL.  Bisect  the  line-''^]g 
'^i^'A  produce  The  oisecting 
\ierpendicular  till  it  meets 
DL  produced  in  '^l.  Find 
the  remaining  points  N,  O, 
and  P  in  the  same  manner. 
'^'  '^  ■       •  The  points  K,  L,  M,  N,  O, 

and    P    are   the   centresr^of  the    circles    containing    the    arcs 
necessary  for  joining  the  given  points.  ; 


CONIC   SECTIONS. 


njiijdf^Q  construct  an  Arcliimedean  spiral  of  one  revolution. 
Draw  a  circle  and  divide  it  by  radii  into  any  number  of  equal 
parts,  say  twelve  (Prob.  9)  a^  b^ 
c,  d^  etc.  Divide  the  radius  o 
into  a  corresponding  number 
of  equal  parts  i,  2,  3,  4,  etc. 
(Prob.  9).  From  the  centre  of 
the  circle,  with  radius  i,  draw 
an  arc  till  it  meets  the  radius  a 
in  A,  and  from  2  till  it  meets 
the  radius  b  in  B,  and  so  on  till 
the  whole  twelve  are  completed. 
Draw  a  fair  curve  through  these 
points,  A,  B,  C,  D,  etc.,  which 
will  give  the  spiral  required  and 
proceed  in  exactly  the  same  manner  for  further  revolutions. 


173.    To  draw  the  logarithmic  spiral.. 

The  logarithmic  spiral  was  discovered  by  Descartes, 
also  called  the  equiangular 
spiral,  because  the  angle  the 
curve  makes  with  the  radius 
vector  is  constant.  The  curve 
also  bears  a  constant  proportion 
to  the  length  of  the  radius 
vector 

Take  any  line  AC  for  the 
radius  vector,  and  bisect  it  in  D 
(Fig.  238).  With  D  as  centre, 
and  radius  DA,  draw  the  semi- 
circle ABC.  From  the  points 
A  and  C  draw  any  two  lines  AB 
and  CB  cutting  the  semicircle. 
Then  ABC  is  a  right-angled 
triangle. 

Bisect  the  Hne  BC  in  E. 
With  E  as  centre,  and  EB  as 
"''^ius,     draw     the     semicircle 


It  is 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


BFC.  Make  the  angle  BCF  equal  to  the  angle  ACB,  and  pro- 
duce the  line  till  it  meets  the  semicircle  in  F.  Join  BF.  The 
triangle  BFC  is  then  similar  to  the  triangle  ABC.  By  repeating 
this  construction  we  obtain  a  succession  of  similar  triangles 
radiating  from  a  common  centre  C,  and  all  forming  equal 
angles  at  this  point.  The  exterior  points  of  these  triangles,  viz. 
A,  B,  F,  M,  N,  O,  etc.,  are  points  in  the  required  spiral. 

As  each  triangle  with  its  curve  forms  a  similar  figure,  it  is 
evident  that  the  curve  must  form  a  constant  angle  with  its 
radius  vector,'  i.e.  the  line  radiating  from  C,  and  the  portion  of 
the  curve  accompanying  each  triangle,  must  also  bear  a  constant 
proportion  to  the  length  of  its  radms  vector. 

If  we  bisect  the  angle  ABF  by  the  dotted  line  HB,  this  line 
will  be  the  normal  to  the  curve  ;  and  the  line  KL,  being  drawn 
at  right  angles  to  HB,  is  the  tangent  to  the  spiral. 

As  all  the  angles  at  C  are  equal,  the  spiral  could  be  con- 
structed with  greater  facility  by 
first  drawing  a  circle  and  divid- 
ing it  into  an  equal  number  of 
parts  by  radii,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  239. 

Let  AC  be  the  radius  vector. 
Bisect  it  in  D.  With  D  as 
centre,  and  radius  DA,  draw  an 
arc  cutting  the  next  radius  CB 
in  B.  Proceed  in  the  same 
manner  with  each  radius  in  suc- 
cession, which  will  determine 
the  points  H,  K,  L,  M,  N,  O, 
P,  etc.  Draw  a  fair  curve 
through  these  points,  and  we  shall  obtain  a  logarithmic  spiral. 

The  greater  the  number  of  radii  used  in  the  construction, 
the  larger  will  be  the  angle  BAC  ;  but  the  angle  ABC  will 
always  be  a  right  angle,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  construction  in 
Fig.  238. 


Fig.  239. 


174.  To  draw  a  spiral  adapted  for  the  Ionic  volute  by  means  of  arcs. 

Divide  the  given  height  AB  into  eight  equal  parts  (Prob.  9). 

Bisect  the  fourth  part   in  the  point  C  (Prob.   i),  and  from  it 


CONIC    SECTIONS. 


[23 


draw  a  line  perpendicular  to  AB  (Prob.  7). 
equal  in  length  to  four  of  the  divisions  of  AB 
the  eye  of  the  volute  D.  This 
is  shown  to  a  larger  scale  at  E. 
With  D  as  centre,  draw  a  circle 
with  a  radius  equal  to  C4.  In- 
scribe a  square  in  this  circle 
(Prob.  56),  and  bisect  each  of 
its  sides  in  the  points  i,  2,  3, 
and  4  (Prob.  i).  Join  these 
points,  and  draw  diagonals. 
Divide  each  semi-diagonal  into 
three  equal  parts  and  join  them 
(Prob.  9),  thus  making  three 
complete  squares  parallel  to 
each  other.  The  corner  of 
each  of  these  squares  in  succes- 
sion will  be  the  centre  of  one 
of  the  arcs,  commencing  at  i,  with 
dotted  hnes  and  arrow- heads. 


Make  this  line 
which  v/ill  sive 


L  as  radius,  as  shown  by 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Construct  an  ellipse:  major  axis  3.75",  minor  axis  2.25".     Select 
any  point  in  the  curve,  and  draw  a  tangent  to  it. 

2.  Construct  an  ellipse  ;  the  foci  to  be  2^"  apart,  and  the  transverse 
diameter  3f". 

3.  Draw  a  rectangle  3.25"  x  2.3",  and  inscribe  an  ellipse  within  it. 

4.  Draw  a  parallelogram   3I"  x  2|",   two  of  its  angles  to  be  60°  ; 
inscribe  an  ellipse  within  it. 

5.  Construct  an  ellipse  by  means  of  a  paper  trammel ;  the  transverse 
diameter  being  4I",  and  the  conjugate  diameter  3"  (Prob.  155). 

6.  Draw  the  two  diameters  of  an  ellipse  each  3"  long,  and  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with  each  other  ;  complete  the  ellipse. 

7.  Make  a  tracing  of  the  ellipse  given  in  question  3,  and  find  the 
diameters,  foci,  tangent,  and  normal. 

8.  With  an  abscissa  3"  long  and  an  ordinate  2"  long,  construct  a 
parabola. 

9.  With  a  diameter   1.4",  an  ordinate   1.8",  and  an  abscissa   1.4", 
construct  a  hyperbola. 


124  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

10.  Draw  a  rec'angle  3"  x  2",  and  let  two  adjacent  sides  represent 
the  axes  of  a  rectangular  hyperbola  ;  measure  off  along  one  of  its  longer 
edges  ^",  and  let  this  point  represent  the  vertex  of  the  curve  ;  complete 
the  hyperbola. 

11.  Draw  a  line  4"  long  to  represent  an  abscissa  of  a  parabola  ;  at  one 
end  draw  a  line  3"  long,  at  right  angles  to  it,  to  represent  the  directrix  ; 
from  the  directrix,  along  the  abscissa,  set  off  i"  to  mark  the  focus  ; 
complete  the  parabola.  At  any  point  in  the  curve,  draw  a  tangent  and 
normal  to  it. 

12.  Draw  geometrically  an  ellipse,  a  parabola,  a  hyperbola,  each 
2  inches  long,  and  a  cone  2  inches  high,  and  write  the  name  to  each. 
Show  the  following  five  sections  on  the  cone — a  horizontal  section,  a 
vertical  one,  not  through  the  apex,  and  one  through  the  apex,  one 
parallel  to  one  side,  and  one  cutting  both  inclined  sides.  Name  figure 
each  section  makes.  (May,  '96.) 

13.  The  foci  of  an  ellipse  are  2|"  apart  and  its  major  axis  is  3^"  long. 
Describe  half  the  curve.  (April,  '96.) 

14.  The  foci  of  an  ellipse  are  2|"  apart,  and  its  minor  axis  is  2"  long. 
Draw  the  curve,  and  draw  also  a  tangent  from  a  point  on  the  curve  \" 
from  one  of  the  foci.  (June,  '00.) 

15.  Draw  the  curve  (Fig.  241)  every  point  of  which  is  at  equal 
distances  from  the  line  PQ  and  the  point  F.  The  curve,  which  is  a 
parabola,  need  not  be  shown  below  the  line  ST. 

(April,  '96.) 


Dimensions  to  be  trebled.  Fig.  242. 

Fig.  241. 

16.  Draw  a  straight  line  AB  3"  long.  Bisect  AB  in  F.  At  F  draw 
FV  f"  long  at  right  angles  to  AB.  F  is  the  focus,  and  V  the  vertex  of 
a  parabola,  A  and  B  being  points  on  the  curve.  Draw  the  curve  from 
A  to  B,  showing  the  construction  for  at  least  4  points.  (June,  '00. ) 

17.  Two  conjugate  diameters  of  an  ellipse  are  3^"  and  2|"  long 
respectively,  and  cross  one  another  at  an  angle  of  60°.     Draw  the  curve. 

(April,  '99.) 

18.  An  arch  in  the  form  of  a  semi-ellipse  is  6'  wide  and  2'  high. 
Describe  the  curve,  and  draw  two  lines  perpendicular  to  it  from  two 
points  on  the  curve,  each  2'  from  the  top  point  of  the  arch. 

Scale  (which  need  not  be  drawn)  ^"  to  i'.  (April,  '98.) 


CONIC   SECTIONS.  125 

19.  Draw  the  arch  opening  shown  (Fig.  242),  using  the  figured  dimen- 
sions. The  curve  is  a  semi-elUpse,  of  which  I'Q  is  a  diameter,  and  RS 
is  half  its  conjugate  character.  (June,  '99.) 

20.  Describe  the  spiral  of  Archimedes  of  three  revolutions,  whose 
radius  is  2  inches.  (April,  '98.) 

21.  Within  a  circle  of  2"  radius  describe  a  '  spiral  of  Archimedes '  of 
one  revolution.  (June,  '99.) 

22.  Sketch  the  three  sorts  of  spiral,  and  explain  how  each  is  gene- 
rated, and  illustrate  each  sort  by  shells,  plants,  or  animals.    (May,  '96.) 


PART    IL 


SOLID   GEOMETRY. 


CHAPTER   XII. 


INTRODUCTION. 


In  the  preceding  subject,  Plane  Geometry,  we  have  been 
restricted  to  figures  having  length  and  breadth  only,  but  Solid 
Geometry  treats  of  figures  that  have  thickness  in  addition  to 
length  and  breadth. 

The  objects  taken  to  illustrate  the  principle  of  this  subject 
are  described  under  the  head  of  Definitions,  Solids  (page  lo). 

By  means  of  Practical  Solid  Geometry  we  are  enabled  to 
represent  on  a  plane — such  as  a  sheet  of  paper — solid  objects  in 
various  positions,  with  their  relative  proportions,  to  a  given  scale. 

Let  us  take  some 
familiar  object,  a 
dressing-case  for  in- 
stance, ABDC,  Fig. 
243,  and  having  pro- 
cured a  stiff  piece 
of  drawing-paper 
HKLM,  fold  it  in  a 
line  at  X,  parallel  to 
one  of  its  edges  ; 
then  open  it  at  a  right  angle,  so  that  HX  will  represent  the 
edge  of  a  vertical  plane,  and  XL  the  edge  of  a  horizontal  plane ; 
the  line  at  X,  where  the  two  planes  intersect,  is  called  the  line 
of  intersection,  intersecting  line,  or  ground  line ;  it  shows  where 


INTRODUCTION. 


127 


the  two  planes  intersect  each  other,  and  is  generally  expressed 
by  the  letters  X  and  Y,  one  at  each  end. 

Having  placed  the  dressing-case  on  the  horizontal  plane, 
with  its  back  parallel  to  the  vertical  plane,  let  us  take  a  pencil 
and   trace    its    position    on    the     jj  g- 

horizontal  plane  by  drawing  a 
line  along  its  lower  edges  ;  also 
its  shape  on  the  vertical  plane. 
This  can  be  done  by  placing 
the  eye  directly  opposite  each 
of  its  front  corners  in  succes- 
sion and  marking  their  apparent 
position  on  the  vertical  plane, 
and  joining  them.  Having  done 
this,  we  will  remove  the  dress- 
ing-case and  spread  the  paper 
out  flat  upon  a  table  :  this  is 
shown  in  Fig.  244.  We  have  now  two  distinct  views  of  the 
object.  The  lower  one  is  called  a  PLAN,  and  represents  the 
space  covered  by  the  object  on  the  horizontal  plane,  or  a  view 
of  the  dressing-case  seen  from  above.  The  upper  view  shows 
the  space  covered  on  the  vertical  plane,  and  is  called  an 
ELEVATION  :  it  represents  the  front  view  of  the  object. 

In  Solid  Geometry  all  objects  are  represented  as  they  would 
appear  traced  or  projected  on  these  two  planes  at  right  angles 
to  each  other :  they  are  b 
called   co-ordinate   planes. 


0 

/ 

J' 

B 

X 

c 

d 

0 

a 

b 

L 

M 


Fig.  244. 


It  is  not  necessary  that 
the  object  should  be 
parallel  to  them,  as  in 
Fig.  243  :  we  can  arrange 
it  in  any  position,  making 
any  possible  angle  with  X 
either  plane,  but  the  hne 
connecting  the  point  on 
the  object  with  its  respec- 
tive plane  must  always  be  perpendicular  to  that  plane.  We 
shall  understand  this  better  if  we  refer  to  Fig.  245,  in  which  we 
will  imagine  the  dressing-case  suspended  in  mid-air,  with  its  back 


128 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


still  parallel  to  the  vertical  plane,  but  its  under  side  inclined 
to  the  horizontal  plane.  We  will  now  trace  it  on  each  plane  as 
before,  then  by  spreading  the  paper  out  flat  we  get  a  drawing 
as  shown  in  Fig.  246. 

The  student  should  compare  Fig.  243  with  Fig.  244,  as  well 
as  Fig.  245  with  Fig.  246,  so  as  to  thoroughly  understand 
the    relation    between    the   co-ordinate   planes. 

The  lines  Aa\  B^',  Y.e  (Fig.  246),  are  all  perpendicular  to  the 
vertical  plane  ;  and  the  lines  A«,  B/^,  Cc,  etc.,  are  perpendicular 

to  the  horizontal  plane.  These 
lines  are  called  projectors,  and 
are  here  represented  by  dotted 
lines.  The  points  in  which 
these  lines  meet  the  two  co- 
ordinate planes  are  called  pro- 
jections :  if  they  are  on  the 
vertical  plane  they  are  called 
vertical  projections,  and  if  on  the 
horizontal  plane  horizontal  pro- 
jections, of  the  different  points  ; 
e.g.  a!  i§  the  vertical  projection  of 
point  A,  and  a  is  its  horizontal 
projection.  The  length  of  the 
horizontal  projector  shows  the 
distance  of  the  point  from  the  vertical  plane,  and  the  length 
of  the  vertical  projector  its  distance  from  the  horizontal  plane. 

This  method  of  representing  solid  objects  by  projection  on 
two  planes  is  called  orthographic  projection,  and  is  described 
more  in  detail  in  Chapter  XIV.  As  the  projectors  are  parallel 
to  each  other,  it  may  also  be  called  parallel  projection. 

All  through  this  subject  the  points  of  the  object  are  dis- 
tinguished by  capital  letters,  as  A,  B,  etc.,  while  their  horizontal 
projections  are  represented  as  <2,  b.,  etc.,  and  their  vertical  pro 
jections  as  «',  b\  etc.  ;  by  this  means  we  are  enabled  to  dis- 
tinguish the  plan  from  the  elevation.  v.P.  will  also  be  used  to 
express  the  vertical  plane,  and  h.p.  the  horizontal  plane ;  the 
letters  XY  will  always  stand  for  the  ground  line. 

The  student  should  take  particular  notice  that  the  lower  points 
in  the  plan  always  represent  the  front  points  in  the  elevation. 


Fig.  246. 


INTRODUCTION 


129 


It  is  not  necessary  to  have  an  object  to  trace  ;  if  we  know 
its  dimensions,  and  its  distances  from  the  two  planes,  we  can 
construct  the  plan  and  elevation  as  shown  in  Figs.  244  and  246. 

Figs.  243  and  245  are  perspective  views,  and  Figs.  244  and  246 
are  geometrical  drawings  of  the  same  object.  If  the  latter 
were  drawn  to  scale,  we  could  find  out  the  length,  breadth,  and 
thickness  of  the  object  from  these  drawings. 

Each  perspective  view  is  supposed  to  l3e  taken  from  one 
fixed  point,  i.e.  the  eye  ;  and  lines  drawn  from  different  parts  of 
the  object  converge  towards  the  eye  considered  as  a  point. 
These  lines  represent  rays  of  light  from  the  object,  and  are 
called  visual  rays  :  they  form  a  cone,  the  vertex  of  which  is  the 
position  of  the  eye  ;  consequently,  Perspective  is  called  conical, 
radial,  or  natural  projection,  because  it  represents  objects  as  they 
appear  in  nature.  It  is  impossible  to  see  an  object  as  it  is 
represented  by  orthographic  projection. 

We  will  now  take  four  simple  solids,  viz.  a  cube,  a  rectangular 
solid,  a  pyramid,  and  a  triangular  prism,  and  show  the  different 
positions  they  can  occupy  with  reference  to  the  co-ordinate 
planes,  i.e.  the  v.p.  and  H.P. 

Fig.  247  represents  the  four  solids  in  what  is  called  simple 
positions,  i.e.  parallel  to  both  the  v.p.  and  H.P. 


H 


'nx 


D 

Fig.  247. 

A  is  the  plan  of  the  cube  and  A'  its  elevation. 
B                 „                rectangular  solid       „    B'  „ 

C  „  pyramid  „    C  „ 

D  .,  triangular  prism       „    D'  „ 


130  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Fig.  248. 
Fig.  248  represents  the  same  solids  with  their  bases  on  the  H.P. 
as  before,  but  their  sides  are  now  inclined  to  the  V.P. 


Fig.  249. 

Fig.  249  shows  them  with  their  fronts  and  backs,  parallel  to  the 
V.P.,  as  in  Fig.  247,  but  with  their  bases  inclined  to  the  H.P. 


Fig.  250. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Fig.  250. — They  are  here  represented  inclined  to  both  the  v.p. 
and  H.P.,  but  they  still  have  one  set  of  edges  parallel  to  the  H.P. 

Fig.  251. — Here  they  are  shown  with  every  line  inclined  to  both 
planes  :  instead  of  having  one  ecige  resting  on  the  H.P.,  as  in 


Fig.  25 


Fig.  250,  they  are  each  poised  on  a  corner.  To  distinguish  this 
position  from  the  one  illustrated  in  Fig.  250,  we  will  call  it  com- 
pound oblique;  although  Figs.  250  and  251  generally  come  under 
one  head,  as  objects  inclined  to  both  planes^ 


CHAPTER   XIII. 

SIMPLE   SOLIDS    IN   GIVEN   POSITIONS   TO   SCALE. 

Note, — Feet  are  indicated  by  one  dash,  and  inche5i  by  two 
dashes  :  thus — 3'  6"  represents  3  feet  6  inches. 

The  student  should  draw  the  problems  in  Solid  Geometry 
to  a  scale  three  times  that  of  these  figures. 


175.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  5"  x  2^"  x  2h"  with  one  of  its 
smaller  faces  on  the  H.P.,  parallel  to  the  v.p.,  and  |"  from  it. 
Scale  }  full  size.     Fig.  252  a. 

First  draw  the  line  XY  ;    then  draw  the  plan  abc'c;^  |  inch 
below   it.      Draw  perpendicular  lines  above    XY,  immediately 

over  the  points  a  and  6, 
^l>'  5"  in  height,  which  give 

the  points  a'  and  b'.  Join 
a'b'.  This  is  the  elevation 
of  the  solid. 

176.  To  project  the  same 
solid  with  one  of  its 
longer  faces  resting  on 
the  H.P.,  parallel  to 
the  V.P.,  and  l|"  from 
it,  to  the  same  scale. 
Fig.  252  B. 

Draw  the  plan  e/^^^, 
S"X2^",  and  if  inches 
below  XY.  Draw  perpendiculars  above  XY,  2^"  high,  and 
directly  over  the  points  e  and  /,  which  will  give  the  points  ^' 
and/'.     Join  <?'  and/,  which  completes  the  elevation. 


Fig.  252. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


^33 


The  student  should  now  project  the  four  sohds  illustrated 
in  Fig.  247  in  the  positions  there  shown,  but  to  the  following 
dimensions  and  scale  : 

A  to  have  a  base  4"  x  4",  to  be  4"  high  and  2h"  from  v.  p. 
B  „  „  8"x4"  „  2"  „  2^"  „  v.P. 
C         „         „         4"X4"      „      8"         „         2i"     „     v.P. 


D 


6"X4"      „      4" 
Scale  J  full  size. 


v.P- 


177.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  10 "  x  5"  x  5",  with  one  of  its 
smaller  faces  on  the  h.p.,  at  an  angle  of  45'  with  v.p.,  and 
one  edge  3^"  from  v.P.  Scale  ^^  full  size.     Fig.  253  A, 

DrawXY.  Take 
the  point  ^,  3^" 
below  XY,  and 
draw  the  square 
abed  below  this 
point  with  its  sides 
at  an  angle  of  45° 
with  XY.  This 
will  be  the  plan. 
Erect  perpendicu- 
lars 10"  high  above 
XY,  and  directly 
over  the  points  a, 
b,  and  c.  Join  the 
tops  of  these  per- 
pendiculars, which  completes  the  elevation. 


I 

' 

g- 

'          t 

r 

X 

Y 

A 

',d 

a 

c       g 

r" 

y 

f 

/ 

I-  253- 

h 

', 

178.  To  project  the  same  solid  lying  on  one  of  its  longer  faces  on 
the  H.P.  with  its  longer  edges  forming  an  angle  of  30°  with 
the  V.P.,  and  one  of  its  corners  l|"  from  v.P.,  to  the  same 
scale.     Fig.  253  P.. 

Draw  the  point  /i,  i|"  below  XY,  and  construct  the  plan  £/(^/i 
at  the  required  angle  below  this  point.  Erect  perpendiculars 
5"  high  above  XY,  immediately  over  the  points  o-^  e,  and  /. 
Join  the  tops  of  these  perpendiculars,  which  completes  the 
elevation. 


134 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


The  student  should  now  project  the  four  soHds  illustrated  in 
Fig.   248,   in  the  positions   there  shown,   but  to  the   following 
dimensions  and  scale  : 
A  to  have  a  base  5"  x  5",  to  be  5"  high,  with  one  side  inclined  at 

an  angle  of  30°  with  the  V.P.,  and  2"  from  it. 
B  to  have  a  base  10"  x  5",  to  be  25"  high,  with  both  sides  inclined 

at  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  V.P.,  and  2"  from  it. 
C  to  have  a  base  5"  x  5",  to  be  10"  high,  with  one  edge  of  the  base 

making  an  angle  of  60°  with  the  V.P.,  and  its  nearest  point 

2"  from  it. 
D  to  have  a  base  8"  x  5",  to  be  5"  high,  with  both  sides  of  its  base 

making  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  v.?.,  and  the  nearest  point 

2"  from  it. 


179.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  7i"x3|"x3|",  resting-  on 
one  of  its  shorter  edges  on  the  H.P.,  and  with  its  longer  edges 
parallel  to  the  v. P.,  but  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  to  the  H.P. ; 
one  of  its  faces  to  be  2^"  from  v.p.    Scale  J  full  size.    Fig.  254  B. 


Draw  XY.     At   point   e'  draw   the   elevation   e'a'h'c'   at   the 
required  angle.     2J"  below  XY  draw  the  line  df  parallel  to  it. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


m 


Let  fall  lines  from  a',  b',  and  c\  at  right  angles  to  XY,  and 
make  da  and  /c  each  3|"  long.  Join  ac^  which  completes  the 
plan. 

The  student  should  now  project  the  four  solids  illustrated  in 
Fig.  249  from  the  following  conditions  : 
A  to  be  2^"  X  2^^"  X  2^",  with  its  base  inclined  at  an  angle  of  45° 

to  H.P.  ;  to  be  parallel  to  the  v.  p.,  and  2^"  from  it. 
B  to  be  5"x2V'x  i^",  with  its  base  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30° 

to  H.P.  ;  to  be  parallel  to  the  v.p.,  and  2^"  from  it. 
C  to  be  2^"x2^"x  5",  with  its  base  incHned  at  an  angle  of  45° 

to  H.P.  ;  to  have  the  edge  of  its  base  parallel  to  the  v.p., 

and  2h"  from  it. 
D  to  be  4"  X  2|"  X  2|",  with  its  base  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30° 

to  H.P.  ;  to  have  its  ends  parallel  to  v.p.,  and  if"  from  it. 
Scale  ^  full  size. 
Before  proceeding  with  the  next  problem.  Fig.  254  B,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  understand  thoroughly  the  angles  which  the  solid 
forms  with  the  co-ordinate  planes. 

The  longer  edges  are  still  inclined  to  the  H.P.  at  an  angle  of 
60°  ;  but  instead  of  being  parallel  to  the  v.p.,  as  in  Fig.  254  A,  they 
axe  in  planes  inclined  to  the 
V.P.  at  an  angle  of  45°.  This 
does  not  mean  that  they 
form  an  angle  of  45°  with 
the  V.P.  Let  us  illustrate  this 
with  a  model. 

Take  a  sheet  of  notepaper 
and  draw  a  diagonal  to  each 
of  its  inside  pages,  as  ad  and 
dc,  Fig.  255.  Now  stand  it 
on  a  table  against  the  45° 
angle  of  a  set-square.  The 
two  pages  will  then  represent 
two  planes  at  an  angle  of  45° 
with  each  other.  Let  the 
page  a  represent  the  V.P., 
and  the  line  6c  one  of  the  edges  of  the  solid.  The  angle  which 
dc  makes  with  the  page  a  will  be  considerably  less  than  45°. 


Fig.  25s 


136  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

180.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  7h"  x  3|"  x  3|",  resting  on 
one  of  its  shorter  edges  on  the  H.P.,  with  its  longer  edges 
inclined  to  the  h.p.  at  an  angle  of  60°,  and  in  vertical  planes 
inclined  to  the  v. p.  at  an  angle  of  45°  ;  one  of  its  lower  comers 
to  be  1;^"  from  v.p.     Scale  |  full  size.     Fig.  254  B. 

Find  the  position  of  point  n,  i^"  below  XY,  and  draw  the 
lines  nm  and  nk  at  an  angle  of  45°  to  XY.  Make  nm  and  n/c 
equal  in  length  to  ^  and  da  (Fig.  254  a).  Draw  the  line  k/ 
parallel  to  7?m,  and  of  the  same  length.  Join  /;;z.  Make  k^ 
and  /o  equal  to  ae  and  cd  (Fig.  254  a).  Draw^//  and  o^  perpen- 
dicular to  /^/.  This  will  complete  the  plan.  As  every  point  in 
the  elevation  is  found  in  precisely  the  same  way,  it  is  only 
necessary  to  explain  the  projection  of  one  point :  <?',  for  example. 
Draw  a  perpendicular  from  o  on  plan  till  it  meets  a  hori- 
zontal line  drawn  from  d'  (Fig.  254  a).  This  gives  the  position 
of  point  o'. 

The  student  should  now  project  the  four  solids  shown  in  Fig. 
250  from  the  following  conditions  : 
A  to  be  4"x4"x4",  with  one  set  of  edges  parallel  to  H.P.  ;  its 

other  edges  to  be  inclined  to  h.p.  at  an  angle  of  45°,  and 

in  vertical  planes  inclined  to  v.p    at  an  angle  of  30°  ;  its 

nearest  corner  to  be  4"  from  v.p. 
B  to  be  8"  X  4"  X  2",  with  one  set  of  edges  parallel  to  H.P,  ;  its 

longest  edges  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30°  to  H.P.,  but  which, 

with  its  shortest  edges,  are  to  be  in  vertical  planes  inclined 

to  the  V.P.  at  an  angle  of  30°.     Its  nearest  corner" to  be  4" 

from  v.p. 
C  to  be  4"x4"x8"  ;  its  base  to  be  inclined  to  the  H.P.  at  an 

angle  of  45°  ;  its  axis  in  a  vertical  plane  incHned  to  V.P. 

at  an  angle  of  30°  ;  and  its  nearest  corner  4"  from  v.  p. 
Note. — The  axis  is  a  line  drawn  from  the  vertex  to  the  centre 
of  the  base  ;  as  ai?,  Fig.  250. 
D  to  be  6"  X  4"  X  4",  to  have  one  side  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30° 

with  H.P.,  and  its  ends  in  a  vertical  plane  inclined  to  v.p. 

at  an  angle  of  60°.     The  nearest  corner  to  be  4"  from  V.P. 

Scale  ^  full  size. 

Note. — The  heights  in  these  elevations  are  obtained  by  first 
drawing  side  views- of  the  objects,  as  shown  in  Fig.  249.  The 
connection  is  fully  shown  in  Figs.  254  A  and  B. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


137 


181.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  6j"  x  3^"  x  3|"  resting  on  one 
corner  on  H.P.,  and  its  faces  forming  equal  angles  with  it,  with 
its  longer  edges  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  to  H.P.,  and  parallel 
to  v.p.     Its  nearest  edge  to  be  Ij"  from  v.  P.     Scale  ^  full  size. 

Fig.  256  A. 

Draw  XY,  and  ij"  below  it  draw  the  line  ;;/;;.  In  any  con- 
venient position  draw  the  line  ca  perpendicular  to  ;«;?,  and 
from  c  draw  c^  3^"  long,  at  an  angle  of  45°.  From  d  as  centre, 
and  with  radius  dc,  draw  an  arc  cutting  ca  in  a.  Join  L?a.  Also 
draw  M  perpendicular  to  ca.  This  represents  one-half  of  the 
actual  shape  of  the  base  of  the  prism. 


Fig.  256. 


At  any  point  c'  on  XY  draw  the  line  //'  6^"  long  at  an  angle 
of  60°  to  XY,  and  the  line  ///  perpendicular  to  it.  From  /, 
along  e7i',  set  off  the  distances  e',  ^',  h\  equal  to  those  of  <?,  <y,  c. 
At  each  of  these  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  e'f\  and  equal  to  it. 
Join  the  tops  of  these  lines.  This  completes  the  elevation. 
Draw  lines  from  b  and  a  parallel  to  i7in.  Every  point  in  the 
plan  must  come  on  one  of  these  three  lines.  Drop  a  line  from 
/'  at  right  angles  to  XY  till  it  meets  the  horizontal  line  from  b  \ 
this  gives  the  point/  Every  other  point  in  the  plan  is  found 
in  the  same  manner. 


f38 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


182.  To  project  the  same  prism,  with  its  longer  edges  stUl  inclined 
at  an  angle  of  60°  with  H.P.,  and  its  faces  making  equal  angles 
with  it ;  taut  instead  of  taeing  parallel  to  v. p.,  as  in  Fig.  256  A, 
let  them  be  in  vertical  planes,  inclined  at  an  angle  of  45°  with 
v.P.  The  nearest  corner  of  prism  to  be  Ij"  from  V.P.  Scale  J 
full  size.     Fig.  256  B. 

Note. — We  can  always  imagine  any  line  to  be  contained  in  a 
vertical  plane,  whether  the  object  contains  one  or  not.  In  Fig. 
254  B  the  line  k'o'  is  contained  in  the  vertical  plane  J^o'l'g' ;  but 
in  this  instance  s'w'  (Fig.  256  b)  is  not  contained  in  one,  as  the 
solid  does  not  contain  a  vertical  plane. 

At  any  point  o  ij"  below  XY,  draw  oq  at  an  angle  of  45°  with 
XY.  Make  oq  equal  in  length  to  nm  (Fig.  256  a).  The  plan  Fig. 
2 56 B  is  precisely  similar  in  shape  to  the  plan  Fig.  2 56  A,  but  turned 
to  make  an  angle  of  45°  with  XY  ;  so  if  we  take  the  line  qo  to 
represent  the  line  nin^  we  can  complete  the  plan  from  Fig.  256  A. 

Every  point  in  the  elevation  is  found  in  the  same  way  :  erect 
a  perpendicular  upon  point  r  till  it  meets  a  horizontal  hne 
drawn  from/'  (Fig.  256 a)  ;  this  gives  the  point  r',  and  so  on 
till  the  elevation  is  completed. 

183.  To  project  a  regular  hexagonal  prism  10"  long,  and  with  sides 

3^"  wide,  standing  on  its 
4r-4  taase  on  H.P.,  with  one 

face  parallel  to  v.P.  and 
2^"  from  it.     Scale    jV 
full  size.     Fig.  257  A. 
Draw  the  Hne  XY,  and 
2|"  below  it  draw  the  line 
ab.    Complete  the  hexagon. 
Above  XY  draw  perpendi- 
culars 10"  long  immediately 
above  the  points  c^  e^f,  d. 
Join  the  tops  of  these  per- 
pendiculars,    which     com- 
pletes the  elevation. 


184.  To  project  the  same   prism  lying  on   one   face   on  the  H.P., 
with  its  longer  edges  parallel  to  the  v.P. ;  its  nearest  edge  to 
be  if"  from  v.P.     Scale  ^V  full  size.     Fig.  257  B. 
Draw  the  line  /w,  10"  long  i|"  below  XY  and  parallel  to  it. 

Draw  the  lines  Is  and  mp  perpendicular  to  Im.     Set  off  the 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


139 


.^  distances  w,  n^  <?,  p  on  mp  equal  to  the  distances  c\  /,/',  d 
I  (Fig.  257  a).    Draw  lines  from  «,  o,  and^,  parallel  to  /w,  till  they 
meet  the  line  /s.     This  completes  the  plan. 

Draw  perpendiculars  above  XY  immediately  above  the  points 
s,  pj  and  set  off  the  distances  u',  s',  r  equal  to  the  distances 
K,  H,  G  (Fig.  257  a).  Draw  lines  from  the  points  /  and  r  parallel 
to  XY  till  they  meet  the  perpendicular  p'd.  This  completes  the 
elevation. 


185.  To  project  a  regular  hexagonal  prism  7V'  long,  and  with  sides 
2^"  wide,  standing  on  its  base  on  the  H.P.,  with  one  face  in- 
clined to  the    v.P. 
at  an  angle  of  45".         ^'  c'       ^'    g* 
Its  nearest  edge  to 
be    l|"    from   v.P. 
Scale    \    full    size. 
Fig.  258  A. 

Draw  the  line  XY, 
and  if"  below  it  mark 
the  position  of  point  a. 

From  a  draw  the 
line  ab^  i|"  long,  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with  XY. 
Complete  the  hexagon. 
Above  XY  draw  per- 
pendiculars 7^"  long 
immediately  above  the 
points  b^  r,  d^  e,  and 
join  the  tops  of  these  Hnes 


Fig.  258. 

This  completes  the  elevation. 


186.  To  project  the  same  prism,  l3ring  with  one  face  on  H.P. ;  its 
longer  edges  to  be  inclined  to  the  V.P.  at  an  angle  of  30° ;  its 
nearest  corner  to  be  l\"  from  v.P.     Scale  |^  full  size.     Fig.  258  B, 

Fix  the  point/  i  j"  below  XY.  Draw  the  line  f^,  y\"  long, 
at  an  angle  of  30°  with  XY  ;  and  from /" and ^ draw  lines  perpen- 
dicular to  fg.  From  ^,  along  the  line  gk,  set  off  the  distances 
g,  w,  /,  k,  equal  to  the  distances  c,  i,  p,  o  (Fig.  258  a).  From  the 
points,  m,  /,  and  k^  draw  lines  parallel  to  fg  till  they  meet  the 
\\ne.fk.     This  completes  the  plan. 


140 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


The  heights  K,  H,  G,  which  give  the  horizontal  Hnes  in  the 
elevation,  are  obtained  from  the  distances  6,  z,  d  in  the  plan 
(Fig.  258  a).  Having  obtained  these  heights,  draw  the  lines  h'k' 
and  n'm'.  Carry  up  perpendicular  lines  from  the  points  in  the 
plan  till  they  meet  these  lines,  which  give  the  corresponding 
points  in  the  elevation.     Join  them  as  shown. 


187. 


To  project  a  regular  hexagonal  prism  12 V'  long,  with  sides  4" 
wide,  resting  on  one  of  its  smaller  edges  on  the  h.p.  ;  its  longer 
edges  to  be  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  to  the  H.P.,  and  parallel 
to  the  v.p.  Its  nearest  edge  to  be  2"  from  v.  p.  Scale  ^  full 
size.     Fig.  259  A. 

In  any  convenient  position  draw  the  hexagon  AEDF  with 
4"  sides,  with  lines  joining  the  opposite  angles  as  shown.     Draw 

XY,  and  at  any 
point  d  draw  the 
line  dc\  12^"  long 
at  an  angle  of  60 
with  XY.  From  a! 
and  c'  draw  the 
lines  ciU  and  c'd' 
perpendicular  to 
a!c' .  Set  off  the  dis- 
tances a!^  /',  b' 
along  db\  equal  to 
thedistancesE,B,F 
of  hexagon.  From 
these  points  draw 
lines  parallel  to  cic' 
till  they  meet  the 
line  c'd' .  This  com- 
pletes the  elevation. 
Draw  a  line  2"  below  XY,  and  parallel  to  it.  From  L  on 
this  line  let  fall  a  perpendicular,  and  on  it  set  off  the  distances 
L,  K,  H,  G  equal  to  the  distances  A,  B,  C,  D  of  hexagon.  From 
each  of  these  points  draw  lines  parallel  to  XY,  and  let  fall 
lines  from  the  various  points  in  the  elevation  till  they  meet 
these  lines.  This  gives  the  corresponding  points  in  the  plan. 
Join  them  as  shown. 


259- 


SIMPLE    SOLIDS. 


141 


188.  To  project  the  same  prism  standing  on  one  of  its  shorter 
edg-es  on  the  H.P.,  at  an  angle  of  30^  with  v. p.,  with  its  longer 
edges  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  the  H.P.,  and  in  vertical 
planes  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  to  v.p. ;  its  nearest  comer  to 
be  3"  from  v.p.     Scale  ^V  full  size.     Fig.  259  B. 

Fix  the  position  of  point  vi  3"  below  XY,  and  draw  the  line 
vip  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  XY.  This  represents  the  line  KH  in 
Fig.  259  A.  The  plan  in  Fig.  259  B  is  precisely  the  same  as  that 
shown  in  Fig.  259  A,  turned  to  a  different  angle.  Complete  the 
plan  against  the  line  ;;//,  from  Fig.  259  A.  As  every  point  in  the 
elevation  is  found  in  the  same  way,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
describe  one  point.  Erect  a  line  on  point  r  at  right  angles 
to  XY  till  it  meets  a  horizontal  line  drawn  from  point  e' .  This 
gives  the  point  r.  Find  the  other  points  in  the  same  way,  and 
join  them,  as  shown. 

189.  To  project  a  regular  hexagonal  prism,  Tj"  long,  with  faces  2V 
wide,  resting  on  one  comer  on  the  H.P. ;  its  longer  edges  to  be 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  H.P.;  one  face  to  be  parallel 
to  the  v.p.  and  2V'  from  it.     Scale  \  full  size.     Fig.  260  .A.. 

Construct  a  hexagon  with   2o"  sides,  and  join  the  opposite 

J? 
,    d.' 

k 


angles  by  lines  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  as  shown.  Draw 
the  line  XY,  and  at  any  point  (^  draw  the  line  a!h\  7\"  long,  at 
an  angle  of  45°  with  XY.     From  the  points  a'  and  h'  draw  the 


142  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

lines  rtV  and  Hd'  perpendicular  to  cih' .  Set  off  the  distances 
6',  e\  f\  d  on  h'd'  equal  to  A,  B,  C,  D  of  hexagon,  and  draw  lines 
from  these  points  parallel  to  h'a'  till  they  meet  the  line  c^c. 
This  completes  the  elevation. 

Draw  the  line  mk  2V  below  XY.  From  H  on  mk  produced 
draw  the  line  HL  perpendicular  to  mk,  and  set  off  the  distances 
H,  D,  L  equal  to  the  distances  E,  B,  F  of  hexagon.  Draw  Hnes 
from  these  points  parallel  to  XY.  All  the  points  of  the  plan 
must  come  on  these  three  lines,  and  are  determined  by  dropping 
perpendiculars  from  the  corresponding  points  in  the  elevation. 

190.  To  project  the  same  solid,  with  its  longer  edges  still  inclined  at 
an  angle  of  45°  to  the  H.P. ;  but  instead  of  being  parallel  to  the 
V.P.,  as  in  the  last  problem,  let  them  be  in  vertical  planes, 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  the  v.  P. ;  its  nearest  corner  to 
the  v.p.  to  be  Ij"  from  it.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  260  B, 

Fix  the  position  of  point  n  ij"  below  XY,  and  draw  the  line 
no  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  it.  The  plan  in  this  problem  is 
precisely  similar  to  the  plan  in  the  last  problem,  but  turned  round 
at  an  angle  of  30°  with  XY,  and  the  line  no  corresponds  with 
the  line  km  (Fig.  260  a).     Complete  the  plan  as  shown. 

Every  point  in  the  elevation  is  found  in  the  same  manner. 
For  example,  erect  a  perpendicular  on  point  o  till  it  meets  a 
horizontal  line  drawn  from  point  e';  this  will  give  the  point  o'. 
Proceed  in  the  same  way  with  all  the  other  points,  and  join  them. 

The  Regrular  Solids. 

There  are  five  regular  solids,  and  they  are  named  after  the 
number  of  faces  they  each  possess ;  viz.  the  Tetrahedron  has  four 
faces,  the  Hexahedron  six  faces,  the  Octahedron  eight  faces,  the 
Dodecahedron  twelve  faces,  and  the  Icosahedron  twenty  faces. 

They  possess  the  following  properties,  viz.  : 

(i)  The  faces  of  each  solid  are  equal,  and  similar  in  shape, 
and  its  edges  are  of  equal  length.  (2)  All  their  faces  are  regular 
polygons.  (3)  All  the  angles "  formed  by  the  contiguous  faces 
of  each  solid  are  equal.  (4)  Each  can  be  inscribed  in  a  sphere, 
so  that  all  its  angular  points  lie  on  the  surface  of  the  sphere. 

The  student  is  advised  to  make  these  drawings  to  a  scale 
three  times  that  of  the  diagrams. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


H3 


191.  To  project  a  tetrahedron  with  edges  9^'  long-,  with  one  face 
resting  on  the  H.P. ;  one  of  its  edges  to  be  at  an  angle  of  16° 
with  V.P.,  and  its  nearest  angular  point  3|"  from  v.P.  Scale 
jV  full  size.     Fig.  261  A. 

All  the  faces  of  this  solid  are  equilateral  triangles. 

Draw  XY,  and  fix  the  position  of  point  a  3I"  below  it.  From 
a  draw  the  line  ah 
9"  long,  at  an  angle 
of  16°  with  XY.  On 
the  line  ab  con- 
struct an  equilateral 
triangle  ahc.  Bisect 
each  of  the  angles 
at  ^,  6,  and  c  by 
lines  meeting  at  d. 
This  completes  the 
plan. 

To  find  the  alti- 
tude of  the  eleva- 
tion, produce  the 
line  bd  to  e,  and  at 
d  draw  the  line  df 
perpendicular  to  eh. 
With  b  as  centre,  and  radius  be,  draw  an  arc  cutting  d/mf. 

To  draw  the  elevation,  erect  a  perpendicular  d'g'  directly 
above  d,  and  make  d'g'  equal  to  df.  Carry  up  the  points  a,  c,  b  till 
they  meet  XY  in  a',  c',  and  b'.    Join  the  point  d'  to  a'^  c ,  and  b'. 


Fig.  261. 


192.  To  project  the  same  solid  tilted  on  to  one  of  its  angular  points 
with  its  base  inclined  at  an  angle  of  20^  with  H.P.  Scale  ^V  full 
size.     Fig.  261  B. 

Fix  the  point  k'  on  XY,  and  draw  the  line  k'k'  at  an  angle 
of  20°  with  it,  and  equal  in  length  to  the  line  b'a'  (Fig.  261  a).  As 
this  elevation  is  precisely  similar  to  the  last,  complete  it  from 
that  figure  on  the  line  k'k'. 

Draw  lines  from  the  points  a,  b,  d,  and  c  (Fig.  261  a)  parallel 
to  XY.  All  the  points  of  the  plan  must  come  on  these  four 
lines,  and  are  found  by  dropping  lines  at  right  angles  to  XY 
from  the  corresponding  points  in  the  elevation. 


144 


■GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


193.  To  project  a  hexahedron  or  cube  with  edges  3|"  long,  resting 
on  one  edge  on  the  H.P.,  and  its  base  making  an  angle  of  22° 
with  it;  the  side  nearest  the  V.P.  to  be  parallel  to,  and  l|" 
from  it.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  262  A. 

All  the  faces  of  this  solid  are  squares. 
Draw  the  line  XY,  and  at  any  point  d  draw  the  line  cih'  at  an 
angle  of  22°.     Complete  the  square  dh'c'd' . 


Fig.  26 


Below  XY  draw  the  line  ef  i|"  from  it.  Draw  the  lines  a'a^  b'b, 
c'c  and  d'd  at  right  angles  to  XY.  Make  eb  and  fd  each  equal 
to  dh\  and  join  hd  \  cc'  cuts  efm.g. 


194.  To  project  the  same  solid  with  its  edge  stiU  resting  on  the  H.P. 
but  inclined  to  the  v. P.  at  an  angle  of  60°,  the  base  still  forming 
the  same  angle  with  the  H.P.,  Tdz.  2°;  its  nearest  corner  to  be 
1'  from  V.P.     Scale  \  full  size.     Fig.  262  B. 

Fix  the  position  of  point  h  \"  below  XY,  and  draw  the  line  hk 
equal  X.o  fe  (Fig.  262  a)  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  XY.  Complete 
this  plan  from  Fig.  262  A,  to  which  it  is  precisely  similar  in  shape. 

Draw  lines  through  the  points  5',  </,  and  d  (Fig.  262  a)  parallel 
to  XY.  Draw  perpendiculars  from  the  points  in  the  plan  till 
they  meet  these  lines,  the  intersections  give  the  corresponding 
points  in  the  elevation.     Join  these  points  as  shown. 


SIMPLE    SOLIDS. 


HS 


195.  To  project  an  octahedron,  with  edges  4"  long,  poised  on  one  of 
its  angiUar  points  on  the  H.P.;  its  axis  to  be  perpendicular  to 
H.P.,  and  its  edge  nearest  to  the  v.P.  to  be  parallel  to,  and  l|" 
from  it.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  263  A. 

All  the  faces  of  this  solid  are  equilateral  triangles. 

Draw  the  line  XY,  and  if"  below  it  draw  the  line  ab  4"  long. 
Complete  the  square  ^- 

ab(/c,  and  draw  its  di- 
agonals. This  will  be 
the  plan  of  the  solid. 

As  every  angular 
point  is  equidistant 
from  the  centre  of  a 
sphere  circumscribing 
the  solid,  the  point  e 
must  be  the  centre  of 
the  plan  of  the  sphere 
and  (u/  its  diameter. 

Draw  the  projector 
ee'  from  the  point  t\ 
Make  e'f  equal  in 
length  to  ac/.  This  will 
be  the  axis  of  the  solid. 
Bisect  e'/'  by  the  line  cUf  parallel  to  XY,  and  erect  perpendi- 
culars from  the  points  c  and  ^/till  they  meet  this  line  in  the  points 
c'  and  d.    Join  c'e'  and  c'f,  d'e  and  d'f\  to  complete  the  elevation. 

196.  To  project  the  same  solid  with  one  face  resting  on  the  H.P. ; 
the  edge  nearest  the  v.P.  to  be  parallel  to,  and  l|"  from  it. 
Scale  \  full  size.     Fig.  263  B. 

Fix  the  positions  of  the  points  g'  and  //  on  XY  the  same 
distance  apart  as  the  points  c'  and/'  in  the  preceding  problem. 
On  this  line  complete  the  elevation  from  Fig.  263  A. 

Draw  lines  from  the  points  6,  e,  and  d  parallel  to  XY. 
All  the  points  of  the  plan  must  come  on  these  three  lines, 
and  are  found  by  dropping  perpendiculars  from  their  correspond- 
ing points  in  the  elevation. 

The  Dodecahedron  and  Icosahedron  can  hardly  be  described 
as  '  simple  solids.'  Their  projection  will  be  found  in  Spanton's 
Complete  Geometrical  Course  {Macinilla?i\  pp.  229  sqq. 

K 


146 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Octagonal   Pyramids. 

197.  To  project  a  re^lar  octagonal  pyramid,  8"  high,  with  each 
side  of  its  base  2h"  wide,  standing  on  its  base  on  the  H.P.,  with  an 
edge  of  its  base  parallel  to  the  V.P.  and  2^"  from  it.  Scale  jV  full 
size.     Fig.  264  A. 

Draw  XY,  and  2h"  below  it  draw  ad  2\"  long.  On  ab 
construct    a   regular   octagon,   and  join   the    opposite    angles 


Carry  up  projectors  from  the  points  d,  e^f^g  perpendicular  to 
XY.  Fix  the  point  c'  immediately  above  r,  and  8"  above 
XY.  Join  the  point  c'  to  d'^  e\f\  and  g\  which  completes  the 
pyramid. 


198.  To  project  the  same  solid  lying  with  one  face  on  the  H.P.,  but 
with  its  axis  in  a  plane  parallel  to  the  v.  P.  Scale  ^V  full  size. 
Fig.  264  B. 

On  XY  mark  off  the  distance  J^k'  equal  to  g'c'  (Fig.  264  a). 
Complete  the  construction  of  elevation  from  Fig.  264  A. 

Let  fall  lines  from  the  various  points  of  the  elevation,  at  right 
angles  to  XY,  till  they  meet  lines  drawn  from  the  corresponding 
points  in  the  plan  (Fig.  264  a),  parallel  to  XY.  The  intersection  of 
these  lines  give  the  required  points,  by  joining  which  we  obtain 
the  plan. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


147 


199.  To  project  the  same  solid  resting  on  one  of  its  shorter  edges, 
■with  its  base  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30^  with  H.P.  ;  its  axis  to  be 
in  a  plane  parallel  to  the  v.  P.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  264  c. 

Draw  XY,  and  fix  the  position  of  point  o'.  Draw  o'p'  at  an 
angle  of  30°  with  XY,  and  equal  in  length  to  /I'n'  (Fig.  264  b). 
Complete  the  elevation  from  Fig.  264  b. 

In  any  convenient  position  draw  the  line  DG  perpendicular  to 
XY,  and  set  off  upon  it  the  distances  D,  E,  F,  G  equal  to  /i\  /', 
m',  n'  (Fig.  264  b).  Draw  lines  from  these  points  parallel  to  XY. 
From  the  various  points  in  the  elevation  let  fall  lines  at  right 
angles  to  XY  till  they  meet  these'lines,  which  give  the  correspond- 
ing points  in  the  plan. 

Cones. 

Cones  are  projected  in  precisely  the  same  way  as  polygonal 
pyramids.  After  finding  the  points  in  the  base,  instead  of 
joining  them  by  lines,  as  in  the  case  of  pyramids,  a  fair  curve  is 
drawn  through  them.  Eight  points  of  the  base  are  found  in  the 
examples  here  given.  Should  more  points  be  required,  it  is 
only  necessary  to  select  a  pyramid  having  more  sides  than 
eight  to  construct  the  cone  upon, 

200.    To  project  a  cone  8"  high,  with  base  6h'  in  diameter,  resting 
on  the  H.P.     Scale  yV  full  size.     Fig.  265  A. 
Draw  XY,  and  in  any  convenient  position  below  it  draw  a 
circle  6V'  in  diameter,  and  a  diameter  ^/i  parallel  to  XY. 

1' .V' 


Carry  up  projectors  from  g-  and  /i  till  they  meet  XY  ;   also 
from  k,  and  produce  ke  8"  above  XY.     Join  k'g'  and  ^7i\ 


148  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

201.  To  project  the  same  solid  resting  on  its  edge,  with  its  base 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  30^  with  H.P. ;  its  axis  to  be  in  a  vertical 
plane  parallel  to  the  V.P.     Scale  ^V  fuU  size.     Fig.  265  B. 

Inscribe  the  circle  (Fig.  265  a)  in  a  square  abcd^  the  side 
nearest  XY  to  be  parallel  to  it.  Draw  diagonals,  and  through 
the  centre  draw  diameters  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  square. 
Through  the  four  points  where  the  diagonals  cut  the  circle 
draw  lines  parallel  to  the  sides  of  the  square. 

Fix  the  point  m'  on  XY,  and  draw  the  line  m'r'  at  an  angle 
of  30°  with  it.  Set  off  the-  distances  m'o'p'q'r'  equal  to  the  dis- 
tances /?',  ;/,  e\  l\g'  (Fig.  265  a).  Complete  the  elevation  from 
Fig.  265  A. 

Let  fall  lines  from  the  various  points  of  the  elevation  at 
right  angles  to  XY  till  they  meet  lines  drawn  from  the  corre- 
sponding points  of  the  plan  (Fig.  265  a).  Draw  a  fair  curve 
through  the  points  forming  the  base,  and  lines  from  the  vertex  s 
tangential  to  the  base.     This  completes  the  plan. 

202.  To  project  the  same  solid,  resting  on  its  edge,  with  its  base 
still  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  H.P.,  but  with  its  axis  in  a 
vertical  plane,  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  V.P,  Scale  j^Tr  full 
size.     Fig.  265  C. 

Draw  the  lines  enclosing  the  base  with  the  parallel  lines 
intersecting  each  other  where  the  diagonals  cut  the  circle  from 
the  plan  (Fig.  265  b).  The  line  xy  that  passes  through  the  axis 
to  be  inclined  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  XY.  Complete  the  plan 
from  Fig.  265  B. 

Draw  lines  from  the  various  points  of  the  plan  at  right 
angles  to  XY  till  they  meet  lines  drawn  from  the  corresponding 
points  of  the  elevation  (Fig.  265  b).  Complete  the  elevation  as 
shown. 


Cylinders. 

In  the  examples  here  given,  only  eight  points  of  the  circular 
base  are  projected,  to  save  confusion  of  lines  ;  but  any  number 
of  points  can  be  found  in  the  same  manner. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


149 


203.  To  project  a  cylinder,  5^"  in  diameter  and  8j"  high,  standing- 
on  its  base  on  the  h.p.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  266  A. 

Draw  XY,  and  in  any  convenient  position  below  it  draw  a 
circle  5V'  in  diameter.  Draw  tangents  to  it  at  the  points  aandd 
perpendicular  to  XY, 
and  produce  them  8j" 
above  XY.  Join  the 
tops  of  these  lines  to 
complete  the  cylinder. 


204.  To  project  the 
same  cylinder,  ly- 
ing on  its  side  on 
the  H.P.,  with  its 
axis  inclined  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with 
the  V.P.  Scale  ^ 
full  size.  Fig.  266B. 

Draw  four  diameters 
tothe  plan  (Fig.  266  a), 
by  first  drawing  the 
line  ad  parallel  to  XY, 
and  then  the  other  three  diameters  equidistant  from  it.  This 
gives  eight  points  in  the  circumference.  Draw  lines  from  these 
points  parallel  to  XY,  till  they  meet  the  line  AE  in  the  points 
A,  B,  C,  D,  E. 

At  any  convenient  point  c  below  XY  (Fig.  266  b),  draw  the 
line  cf  at  an  angle  of  45°  with  it.  Draw  the  line  cm,  8|"  long, 
perpendicular  to  c/,  and  from  m  draw  m£-  parallel  to  cf.  From 
m,  along  7n^,  set  off  the  distances  w, /, >^, //,^  equal  to  the  distances 
A,  B,  C,  D,  E  (Fig.  266  a),  and  from  these  points  draw  hues  parallel 
to  c?n.     This  completes  the  plan. 

Draw  a  line  from  /  perpendicular  to  XY,  and  produce  it 
above  the  ground  line.  Set  off  the  distances  E',  D',  C,  B',  A'  on 
this  line,  equal  to  the  distances  E,  D,  C,  B,  A  (Fig.  266  a),  and 
draw  lines  from  these  points  parallel  to  XY.  Draw  the  pro- 
jectors from  the  various  points  in  the  plan  till  they  meet  these 
lines,  which  give  projections  of  the  points  required  to  complete 
the  elevation. 


Fig.  266. 


ISO 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


205.  To  project  the  same  solid,  resting  on  its  edge,  with  its  base 
inclined  at  an  ang-le  of  30°  with  the  H.P.,  its  axis  being  parallel 
to  the  v.p.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  267  A. 

Draw  XY,  and  at  any  point  n'  upon  it  draw  the  line  n'r' 
at  an  angle  of  30°  with  the  ground  line.  On  the  line  n'r'  set 
off  the  distances  n',  o',  p\  q\  r'  equal  to  the  distances  g^  h,  k.  /,  m 
(Fig.  266  b),  and  from  each  of  these  points  draw  perpendiculars 
to  n'r\  8j"  long.     Join  s'^u'.     This  completes  the  elevation. 


From  y  let  fall  a  line  at  right  angles  to  XY,  and  set  off  upon 
it  from  any  convenient  point  A  the  points  B,C,D,  E  equal  to  the 
distances  n\  o\  p\  q\  r'.  From  each  of  these  points  draw  lines 
parallel  to  XY.  From  the  various  points  in  the  elevation  drop 
projectors  till  they  meet  these  Hues  in  the  corresponding  points, 
by  connecting  which  we  get  the  plan. 

206.  To  project  the  same  solid  resting  on  its  edge,  with  its  base  still 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  the  H.P.,  but  with  its  axis  inclined 
at  an  angle  of  60°  with  the  v.p.     Scale  ^  full  size.     Fig.  267  B. 

Draw  the  line  FG  equal  to  AE,  inclined  at  an  angle  of  30° 
with  XY.  Complete  the  plan  from  Fig.  267  A.  Draw  projectors 
from  the  plan  till  they  meet  lines  drawn  parallel  to  XY  from 
the  corresponding  points  in  the  elevation  (Fig.  267  a).  These 
give  the  necessary  projections  for  completing  the  elevation. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


151 


Spheres. 

The  plan  and  elevation  of  a  sphere  are  circles  ;  but  if  we 
divide  the  sphere  into  divisions  by  lines  upon  its  surface,  such 
as  meridians  of  longitude  and  parallels  of  latitude,  we  shall  be 
enabled  to  fix  its  position  and  inclination  to  the  co-ordinate 
planes,  and  project  it  accordingly. 

So  as  not  to  confuse  the  figure  too  much,  we  will  restrict 
ourselves  to  eight  meridians,  with  the  equator,  and  two  parallels 
of  latitude.  The  junction  of  the  meridians  will  of  course  give 
us  the  position  of  the  poles,  which  will  determine  the  axis. 

207.   To   project  a  sphere   5^"  in   diameter,   with   meridians    and 
parallels ;  its  axis  to  be  perpendicular  to  the  H.P. 
size.     Fig.  268  A. 

Draw  XY,  and 
in  any  conven- 
ient position  be- 
low it  draw  a 
circle  5^"  in  dia- 
meter. Draw  the 
diameters  ab 
parallel  to  the 
ground  line,  and 
rtf/at  right  angles 
to  it,  and  two 
other  diameters 
equidistant  from 
them. 

Produce  the 
line  dt  above 
XY,  and  make 
c'p'     equal     in 

length  to  the  diameter  ab.  Bisect  c'p'  in  d' .  With  d  as  centre, 
and  radius  equal  X.opa,  draw  a  circle.  Draw  db'  through  d  till  it 
meets  the  circle  in  d  and  b' .  Through  d'  draw  the  line  e'f  at 
an  angle  of  45°  with  db'.,  till  it  meets  the  circle  in  e  and  /'. 
From  e'  and  /'  draw  lines  parallel  to  db'  till  they  meet  the 
circle  in  g'  and  //.  These  lines  represent  parallels  of  latitude. 
Drop  a  perpendicular  from  g'  till  it  meets  ab  in  g.     With  p  as 


Fig.  268. 


152 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


centre,  and  radius  pg^  draw  a  circle, 
parallel  c'g' . 

v' 


This  is  the  plan  of  the 


To  avoid  con- 
fusion, the  pro 
jectors  for  half 
of  one  meridian 
only  are  shown ; 
but  they  are  all 
found  in  the 
same  manner. 

Erect  a  per- 
pendicular on 
point  k  till  it 
meets  the  equa- 
tor in  point  k'  ; 
also  from  point 
/till  it  meets  the 
parallels  in 
points  /"  and  /'. 
Draw  a  curve 
which  gives  the  projection  of 


through  the  points  c\  /",  k\  /',  p\ 

the  meridian. 

208.    To  project  the  same  sphere,  with  its  axis  inclined  to  the  H.P. 

at  an  angle  of  60°,  but  parallel  to  the  V.P.     Scale  \  full  size. 

Fig.  268  B. 

Note. — The  same  letters  are  taken  throughout  these  spherical 
problems  to  facilitate  reference. 

Draw  a  circle  5^"  in  diameter,  touching  XY,  and  draw  the 
line  c'p'  at  an  angle  of  60"  with  it.  Draw  the  line  db'  at  right 
angles  to  c'p\  and  set  off  the  distances  of  the  parallels  above  and 
below  a!b'  equal  to  their  distances  in  the  elevation  (Fig.  268  A). 
Draw  the  lines  e'g  and  hf  parallel  to  alb'.  Complete  the 
elevation  from  Fig.  268  A.  Draw  lines  from  all  the  points  of 
intersection  between  the  meridians  and  parallels  of  the  plan 
(Fig.  268  a)  parallel  to  XY,  and  let  fall  perpendiculars  from  the 
corresponding  points  in  the  elevation  till  they  meet  these  lines, 
which  give  the  projections  of  the  points  of  intersection.  Draw 
the  curves. 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


153 


209.    To  project  the  same  sphere,  with  its  axis  still  inclined  to  the 
H.P.,    at    an   angle   of  60°,   hut  in  a 
vertical  plane  inclined  at  an  angle  of 
60°  with  the   V.P.     Scale  ^  full   size. 

Fig.  269. 

Draw  the  line  cp  at  an  angle  of  60° 
with  XY,  for  the  plan  of  the  axis,  and  on 
this  line  complete  the  plan  from  Fig.  268  B. 
Perpendicular  to  XY  draw  the  line  XL, 
and  set  off  the  distances  X,  C,  L,  K,  C,  L 
equal  to  the  distances  Y,  C,  L,  K,  C,  L 
(Fig.  268  b).  From  each  of  these  points 
draw  lines  parallel  to  XY  till  they  meet 
projectors  drawn  from  the  corresponding 
points  in  the  plan,  which  give  the  projec- 
tions required. 

Fig.  269. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  The  plan  is  shown  of  three  bricks  (Fig.  270),  each  9"  x  4^"  x  3", 
one  resting  upon  the  other  two.  Draw  an  elevation  upon  the  given 
line  xy. 

Scale  (which  need  not  be  drawn)  2"  to  i',  or  \  of  full  size.       (April,  '98.) 


Fig.  270. 


Fig.  271 


2.    The  plan  is  given  (Fig.  271)  of  a  flight  of  three  steps  each  |" 
high,  of  which  3  is  uppermost.     Draw  an  elevation  on  the  given  xy. 

(June,  '00.) 


J,54 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


3.  Plan  and  elevation  are  given  of  a  solid  letter  H  (Fig.  272).  Draw 
an  elevation  when  the  horizontal  edge  ab  makes  an  angle  of  60  with  the 
vertical  plane  of  projection.  (June,  '97.) 


G,        b 


A 

Fig.  272.  Fig.  273. 

4.  The  diagram  ( Fig.  273)  shows  the  plan  of  two  square  prisms,  one 
resting  upon  the  other.  Draw  their  elevation  upon  the  given  xy.  The 
lines  AB  and  CD  are  plans  of  square  surfaces.  (June,  '99.) 

5.  The  plan  is  given  of  a  cube  (Fig,  274),  having  a  cylindrical  hole 
pierced  through  its  centre.     A  vertical  plane,  represented  by  the  line  Im, 


+ 

IlevcUion 


Fig.  274.  Fig.  275. 

cuts  off  a  portion  of  the  solid.  Draw  an  elevation  on  the  line  xy,  supposing 
the  part  of  the  solid  in  front  of  Im  to  be  re- 
moved. The  part  in  section  should  be  clearly 
indicated  by  lightly  shading  it.     (April,  '96.) 

6.  The  plan  is  given  (Fig.  275)  of  a  right 
prism  having  equilateral  triangles  for  its  bases. 
These  bases  are  vertical.  Draw  an  elevation 
of  the  prism  on  the  line  xy.  Show  the  form 
of  the  section  of  the  prism  made  by  the  vertical 
plane  Im.  The  part  in  section  should  be  indi- 
cated by  lightly  shading  it.  (June,  '98.) 

7.  Plan  and  elevation  are  given  (Fig.  276) 
of  a  solid  composed  of  a  half-cylinder  placed 

f'ig-  276.  upon  a  prism.     Draw  a  new  elevation,  when 

the  horizontal  edges  of  the  prism  make  angles  of  45°  with  the  vertical 
plane  of  projection.  (April,  '96. ) 


SIMPLE   SOLIDS. 


^55 


8.  An  elevation  is  given  (Fig.  277)  of  an  archway  with  semi-circular 
head,  in  a  wall  i'  6"  thick.  Draw  a  second  elevation  upon  a  vertical 
plane  which  makes  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  face  of  the  wall.  (Scale, 
which  need  not  be  drawn,  ^'  to  i'.)  (June,  '00.) 


Fig.  277. 


Fig.  278. 


Fig.  279 


9.  Plan  and  elevation  are  given  (Fig.  278)  of  a  rectangular  block  with  a 
semi-cylindrical  hollow  in  it.  Draw  a  new  elevation  upon  a  vertical  plane 
which  makes  an  angle  of  30°  with  the  horizontal  edge  ab.  (April,  '98.) 
10.  The  diagram  (Fig.  279)  shows  a  side  elevation  of  a  square  prism, 
pierced  through  its  centre  by  a  cylinder.  Draw  a  front  elevation  of 
the  solids.  (June,  'cxd.  ) 


Elevation 


PlOJl 

Fig.  280. 


Fig.  281. 


11.  Plan  and  elevation  are  given  (Fig.  280)  of  a  cylinder  through 
which  a  square  opening  has  been  cut.  Draw  a  fresh  plan  and  elevation 
of  the  solid,  the  plane  of  the  circular  base  FG  being  inclined  at  45°  to 
the  vertical  plane  of  projection.  (June,  '99.) 

12.  The  "block"  plan  and  end  elevation  are  given  (Fig.  281)  of  a 
building  having  a  square  tower  with  pyramidal  roof.  A  side  elevation 
of  the  building  is  required.  (June,  '98.) 


156 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


13.  The  plan  is  given  of  a  piece  of  cylindrical  rod  (Fig.  282)  cut  by  a 
vertical  plane  shown  at  Im.  Draw  an  elevation  of  the  solid  upon  an  xy 
parallel  to  Im.  (April,  '99.) 


Fig.  282. 


Fig.  283, 


14.  Plan  and  elevation  are  given  of  a  sloping  desk  (Fig.  283).  Draw 
an  elevation  upon  a  vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  Xvtxo.  pq.  Show  upon 
this  elevation  the  outline  of  the  section  made  by  the  vertical  plane 
represented  by /</.  (April,  '99.) 

15.  The  diagram  (Fig.  284)  shows  the  plan  of  two  cubes,  one  resting 
upon  the  two  others,  with  a  sphere  resting  on  the  upper  cube.  Draw 
an  elevation  on  the  given  xy.  (April,  '00.) 


Fig.  284. 


Fig.  285. 


16.  Show  in  plan  and  elevation  a  shallow  circular  metal  bath. 
Diameter  at  top  2'  6",  at  bottom  2',  height  6".  The  thickness  of  the 
metal  may  be  neglected.     Scale  (which  need  not  be  drawn)  i'  to  \". 

(April,  '99.) 

17.  The  diagram  (Fig.  285)  shows  the  elevation  of  a  right  cone  having 
its  vertex  at  V.     Draw  the  plan.  (April,  '00.) 


CHAPTER   XIV. 

ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION. 


Preparatory  to  the  study  of  sections  of  solids  it  is  desirable 
to  have  a  more  thorough  insight  into  the  principles  of  Ortho- 
graphic Projection,  though  its  simpler  applications  need  only  be 
considered. 

In  Solid  Geometry  objects  are  projected  by  means  of  parallel 
projectors  perpendicular  to 
two  co-ordinate  planes.  These 
planes  may  be  considered  as  in- 
definite in  extent.  For  instance, 
the  H.P.  might  be  extended 
beyond  the  V.P.,  and  the  v.  p. 
below  the  H.P. 

To  understand  this  fully,  let 
us  take  two  pieces  of  cardboard 
about  12"  square,  and  half-way 
across  the  middle  of  each  cut  a 
groove,  as  shown  in  Fig.  286. 
By  fitting  these  two  pieces 
together  we  obtain  two  planes  intersecting  each  other  at  right 
angles,  as  shown  in  Fig.  287. 

We  have  now  four  sets  of  co-ordinate  planes,  forming  four 
"  dihedral  angles,"  identified  by  the  letters  A,  B,  C,  D. 

The  angle  formed  by  the  upper  surface  of  the  H.P.  with  the 
front  of  the  V.P.  is  called  the  "  first  dihedral  angle,"  viz.  A,  fig.  287. 

The  angle  formed  by  the  upper  surface  of  the  H.P.  with  the 
back  of  the  V.P.  is  called  the  "  second  dihedral  angle,"  viz.  B,  fig.  287. 

The  angle  formed  by  the  under  surface  of  the  H.P.  with  the 
back  of  the  v.p.  is  called  the  "third  dihedral  angle,"  viz.  C,  fig.  287. 

The  angle  formed  by  the  under  surface  of  the  H.P.  with  the 
front  of  the  V.P.  is  called  the  "  fourth  dihedral  angle,"  viz.  D,  fig.  287. 


158 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


We  will  now  take  a  piece  of  cardboard  4"  x  3",  and  place  one 
of  its  shorter  edges  against  the  H.P.  and  a  longer  edge  against 

the  v.p.  in  the  first 
dihedral  angle,  with 
its  surface  perpen- 
dicular to  each 
plane  (Fig.  287). 
Let  the  corner  A 
represent  a  point 
we  wish  to  project 
on  to  each  plane  : 
the  top  edge  Aa' 
represents  its  verti- 
cal projector,  and 
the  point  a!  its  ver- 
tical projection;  the 
edge  Ka  represents 
its  horizontal  projector,  and  the  point  a  its  horizontal  projection, 
and  so  on,  placing  the  cardboard  in  each  of  the  dihedral  angles. 

Lines. 

To  illustrate  the  projection  of  lines,  we  will  restrict  ourselves  to 

the  two  co-ordinate  planes 
of  the  first  dihedral  angle 
(Fig.  288). 

Take  the  piece  of  card- 
board and  place  it  with 
one  of  its  shorter  edges 
on  the  H.P.,  with  its  sur- 
face parallel  to  the  v.p. 
Let  the  top  edge  AB 
represent  a  line  we  wish 
to  project.  The  edges  ha 
and  B6  will  then  represent  the  horizontal  projectors,  and  the  line 
ah  its  horizontal  projection.  If  we  draw  lines  A«'  and  B6' 
perpendicular  to  the  V.P.  from  the  points  A  and  B,  they  represent 
the  vertical  projectors,  and  the  line  clU  its  vertical  projection. 

We  will  now  place   the   piece  of  cardboard  touching  both 
planes,  with  one  of  its  shorter  edges  on  the  H.P.,  and  its  surface 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION, 


r?9 


perpendicular  to  both  planes.  Let  the  edge  Cc  represent  the 
line  to  be  projected,  Cc"  and  cc'  represent  the  vertical  projectors, 
and  the  line  c'c"  its  vertical  projection.  The  point  c  on  the  H.P. 
is  called  the  "  horizontal  trace  "  of  the  line. 

Note. — The  point  where  a  line,  or  a  line  produced,  would 
meet  either  plane  is  called  the  "  trace  "  of  that  line  :  if  this  point 
is  on  the  H.P.,  it  is  called  the  "horizontal  trace"  (h.t.);  and  if  it 
is  on  the  v.p.,  the  "vertical  trace"  (v.T.).  The  same  thing 
applies  to  the  projection  of  planes. 

Now  place  the  piece  of  cardboard  with  one  of  its  longer  edges 
on  the  H.P.,  and  its  surface  per- 
pendicular to  both  planes.  Let 
the  top  edge  Dd"  represent  the 
line  to  be  projected.  The  edges 
D^and  ^W  represent  the  hori- 
zontal projectors,  and  the  line  X 
dd'  its  horizontal  projection. 
The  point  d"  is  its  vertical  trace. 

Fig.   289  represents   the  co- 
ordinate    planes     opened    out 
into  one  flat  surface.    The  pro- 
jections   below   XY    represent  Fig.  289. 
the  plans  of  the  lines,  and  those  above  XY  the  elevations. 

We  will  now  use  the  same  piece  of  cardboard  to  illustrate  the 
projections  of  lines  inclined  to  one  or  both  co-ordinate  planes 


a 

b 

,c  ' 

i      / 

■ 

\c' 

d' 

b 

i 

a 

^0 

d 

Fig.  290. 

(Fig.  290).     In  the  first  case  we  will  incline  it  to  both  planes,  with 
one  of  its  shorter  edges  resting  on  the  H.P.  and  parallel  to  the  v,P 


i6o 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Let  the  edge  AB  represent  the  Hne  to  be  projected.  aB  is  its 
horizontal,  and  a'd'  its  vertical  projections. 

Then  incline  it  to  the  H.P.,  with  one  of  its  shorter  edges  still 
on  the  H.P.,  but  perpendicular  to  the  v.P. 

Let  CD  represent  the  line  to  be  projected.  The  line  D^:  is 
the  horizontal,  and  c'ci'  its  vertical  projections. 

Now  incline  it  to  the  V.P.,  with  its  lower  longer  edge  parallel 
to,  but  raised  a  little  above  the  H.P, 

Let  EF  represent  the  line  to  be  projected.  The  line  e/  is  its 
horizontal,  and/V  its  vertical  projections. 

Let  us  now  draw  a  diagonal  GF  across  the  piece  of  cardboard 
and  again  hold  it  in  the  same  position  ;  and  let  GF  represent 
the  line  to  be  projected. 

The  line  e/  still  represents  its  horizontal  projection,  but  the 
line/'^'  is  its  projection  on  the  vertical  plane. 

Fig.  291  shows  the  plans  and  elevations  of  these  Hnes,  with  the 
co-ordinate  planes  opened  out  flat. 

We  have  now  projected  a  line  in   seven  distinct   positions, 
viz.  : 
Fig.  288. — AB  parallel  to  H.P.  and  parallel  to 

C  perpendicular  to       „  „ 

D  parallel  to  , 


Fig.  290. 


-AB  inclined  to 
CD 

EF  parallel  to 
GF  inchned  to 


a' 

/ 

c  ' 

/ 

/     1  ' 

b' 

V 

a 

/ 

R 

i 

/ 

Pi 

'       f 

/ 

Fig.  291. 


perpendicular  to 

inclined  to 
parallel  to 
inclined  to 


The  student  should  parti- 
cularly notice  the  difference 
between  AB  and  FG  in 
Fig.  290.  Although  they 
are  both  inclined  to  both 
planes,  AB  is  in  a  vertical 
plane  perpendicular  to  the 
V.P.,  while  FG  is  in  one 
inclined  to  the  v.p. 

We  will  now  project  these 
lines  in  the  various  positions 
to  scale. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROTECTION. 


i6i 


210.  To  project  a  line  AB  2^"  long,  parallel  to  botli  the  H.P.  and 
V.P.,  its  distances  to  be  3"  from  the  H.P.  and  ih"  from,  the  V.P. 
Scale  J  full  size.     Fig.  292. 

Draw  XY,  and  iV'  below  it  draw  the  line  a^  2^'  long.  Draw 
the  projectors  aa'  and  bb'  at  right  angles  to  XY,  and  3"  above  it. 
Join  a'b'. 

211.  To  project  a  line  CD  3|"  long  to  the  same  Scale,  parallel  to 
the  V.P.  and  2^"  from  it,  but  perpendicular  to  the  H.P.   Fig.  292. 

Fix  the  position  of  point  c  2^"  below  XY.  Draw  a  line  per- 
pendicular to  XY,  and  produce  the  same  3I"  above  it.  c  is  the 
plan  or  H.  trace,  and  c'd'  the  elevation  required. 


212.  To  project  a  line  EF  3"  long  to  the  same  scale,  parallel  to  the 
H.P.  and  2j"  above  it,  but  perpendicular  to  the  v. p.     Fig.  292. 

Below  XY,  and  perpendicular  to  it,  draw  the  line  ef  3"  long. 
Draw  the  projector /V  2^"  long,  ef  is  the  plan,  and  e'  the 
elevation  or  V.  trace. 

213.  To  project  a  line  GH  3"  long  to  the  same  scale,  parallel  to  the 
V.P.  and  1^"  from  it,  but  inclined  to  the  H.P.  at  an  angle  of  60°o 
Fig.  292.  " 

At  any  point  £-'  on  XY  draw  the  line  g^/t'  3"  long,  and  inclined 
to  the  H.P.  at  an  angle  of  60°.  Let  fall  the  projectors  o^'o  and 
A'A  at  right  angles  to  XY.  Set  off  the  points  ^  and  /i  i^"  below 
XY,  and  join  them. 

214.  To  project  a  line  KL  3 "  long  to  the  same  scale,  inclined  to  the 
H.P.  at  an  angle  of  60°,  but  in  a  vertical  plane  perpendicular  to 

the  V.P.     Fig.  292. 
Draw  the  line  k7  at  right  angles  to  XY  till  it  meets  horizontal 
Hnes  drawn  from  //  and  //.     k'l'  is  the  elevation,  and  /'/the  plan. 

L 


J62 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


215.  To  project  a  line  MN  3"  long  to  the  same  scale,  parallel  to  the 
H.P.  and  l|"  atoove  it,  but  inclined  to  tlie  v.  p.  at  an  angle  of 
45°.  The  end  of  the  line  nearer  the  V.P.  to  be  |"  from  it. 
Fig.  292. 


Fix  the   point  n  |"  below  XY,  and  draw 


5"  long  at  an 


angle  of  45°  with  it.  Carry  up  the  projectors  perpendicular  to 
XY,  and  produce  them  i^"  above  it  in  the  points  in'  and  ;/. 
Join  in'7i' . 

216.  To  project  a  line  OP  3"  long-  to  the  same  scale,  inclined  to  the 
H.P.  at  an  angle  of  30°,  but  in  a  vertical  plane  inclined  to  the 
V.P.  at  an  angle  of  60  ;  one  end  of  the  line  to  be  on  XY. 
Fig.  292. 

From  point  o'  on  XY  draw  a  line  o'K  3"  long,  and  inclined 
to  XY  at  an  angle  of  60°.  From  the  same  point  o'  draw  the 
line  ^'B  at  an  angle  of  30°  with  XY.  With  o'  as  centre,  and 
radius  <?'A,  draw  an  arc  till  it  meets  ^'B  in  B.  Draw  the  Hne 
BC  perpendicular  to  XY.  With  0'  as  centre,  and  radius  o'C^ 
draw  an  arc  till  it  meets  o' k.  mp.  Draw  the  projector  pp'  till 
it  meets  a  horizontal  line  drawn  from  B  in  p' .  Join  p'o'.  op 
is  the  plan,  and  op'  the  elevation  of  the  line  required. 

Planes. 

The  lines  in  which  planes  intersect  the  co-ordinate  planes 
are   called  traces  :    if  on  the   H.P.,  the  horizontal  trace  (h.t.)  : 


Fig.  293. 

and  on  the  v.p.,  the  vertical  trace  (v.t.).     The  inclination  of 
planes  is  determined  by  means  of  these  traces. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION. 


163 


We  will  take  the  same  piece  of  cardboard  that  we  have  used 
for  our  previous  illustrations  and  place  it  on  the  H.P.  and 
parallel  to  the  V.P.,  as  A  (Fig.  293),  The  line  ab^  where  it 
intersects  the  H.P.,  will  be  its  H.T. 

If  we  place  it  parallel  to  the  H.P.  and  perpendicular  to  the  v. p., 
as  B,  the  line  </</,  where 
it    intersects     the    v. p., 
will  be  its  v.t. 

By  placing  it  perpen- 
dicular to  each  plane,  as 
C,  ^will  be  its  H.T.  and  X 
eg  its  V.T. 

On  opening  these  co- 
ordinate planes  out  flat 
these  traces  will  appear 
as  shown  in  Fig.  294. 

We  will  now  place  the 
piece  of  cardboard  perpendicular  to  the  H.P.  and  inclined  to 
the  V.P.,  as  D  (Fig.  295) :  hk  will  then  be  the  H.T.,  and  ///' 
the  V.T. 


Fig.  295. 


Now  incline  it  to  the  H.P.  and  make  it  perpendicular  to  the 
V.P.,  as  E  (Fig.  295)  :  mn  will  be  its  H.T.  and  mo'  its  V.T. 

By  inclining  it  to  both  planes  with  its  shorter  edges  parallel 
to  XY,  as  F  (Fig.  295),  pq  will  be  the  H.T.  and  r's'  the  V.T. 


164 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


For  our  next  illustration  we  will  take  a  60°  set- square  G,  as 
a  right  angle  will  not  fit  closely  to  the  two  planes  in  this  posi- 
tion ;  tu  will  be  the  H.T.  and  tw'  the  V.T. 

If  we  now  open  the  planes  as  before,  these  traces  will  be 
shown  as  in  Fig.  296. 


, 

0' 

r'           s' 

/o^ 

w' 

/ 

t^ 

/ 

/ 

aW 

m 

t^ 

^ 

/ 

5 

1 

■)               q 

\ 

Fig.  296. 


From  these  illustrations  we  can  'deduce  the  following  facts — 

A  plane  can  have  no  trace  on  the  plane  it  is  parallel  to  (see 
A  and  B,  Fig.  293. 

If  traces  are  not  parallel  to  XY,  they  must  intersect  each 
other  on  that  line  (see  D,  E,  and  G,  Fig.  295). 

If  the  traces  of  a  plane  are  in  one  straight  line  when  the  H.P. 
and  v.P.  are  opened  out  so  as  to  form  one  continuous  surface, 
the  angles  the  plane  forms  with  each  co-ordinate  plane  must 
be  equal. 

When  a  plane  is  perpendicular  to  either  co-ordinate  plane, 
its  inclined  trace  will  always  give  the  amount  of  its  inclination 
to  the  other  co-ordinate  plane  ;  e.g.  hk  (Fig.  296)  forms  with  XY 
the  angle  ^  or  the  inclination  of  D  (Fig.  295)  to  the  v.P.,  while 
mo'  forms  with  XY  the  angle  d  or  the  inclination  of  E  to  the  H.P. 

When  a  plane  is  inclined  to  both  planes,  but  has  its  traces 
parallel  to  XY,  the  sum  of  its  inclinations,  i.e.  d+cfi  =  go°;  as 
F  (Fig.  295). 

The  traces  of  planes  inclined  to  one  or  both  planes  are  not 
supposed  to  finish  at  XY  ;  they  are  indefinite,  and  are  generally 
produced  a  little  beyond  XY. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION. 


165 


217.   To  find  the  traces  of  the  foUowing  planes.     Scale  ^  full  size. 

Fig.  297. 

A,3"    X  2^"  perpendicular  to  the  H.P.  and  inclined  to  the  v.P.  at  60°. 
B,3rxif  „  „       v.P.  „  „      H.P.  „  45°- 

C,4^"X3"  inclined  „      H.P.   at    60°  with    shorter    edges 

parallel  to  each  plane. 

Draw  XY  ;  and  at  any  convenient  point  a  draw  a6  3"  long, 
and  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  XY.  From  a  draw  ac'  2^"  long. 
Then  ad  is  the  H.T.,  and  ac'  the  v.T.  of  A. 


Fig.  297. 


From  any  convenient  point  <-/  draw  ^/'  3I"  long,  and  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with  XY.  From  d  draw  de  if"  long  perpendicular 
to  xy.     Then  de  is  the  H.T.,  and  t/f  the  V.T.  of  B. 

Take  any  point  ^  on  XY,  and  draw  o-/i'  4I"  long  at  an  angle 
of  60°  with  it.  From  //  draw  /I'k  perpendicular  to  XY  ;  and 
from  o-  as  centre,  with  radius  ^k,  draw  an  arc  till  it  meets  a 
perpendicular  from  o-  in  /.  From  g-  draw  a  perpendicular  till  it 
meets  a  horizontal  line  from  //  in  7/1'.  Draw  ;;/'//  and  /o,  each 
3"  long,  parallel  to  XY.  Then  7/1' 72'  will  be  the  v.T.,  and  0/  the 
H.T.  of  C. 

We  will  now  proceed  with  planes  that  are  inclined  to  both 
planes  of  projection  :  they  are  called  oblique  planes.     Let  us  take 


1 66 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


a  60°  set  square  and  place  it  so  as  to  fit  closely  against  both 
planes,  as  shown  at  A  (Fig.  298).  ca  will  be  the  H.T.  and  cU 
the  v.T. 

The  inclination  of  a  plane  to  the  coordinate  plane  containing 
its  trace  is  the  angle  between  two  lines  perpendicular  to  the 
trace,  one  in  the  co-ordinate  plane  and  one  in  the  plane  itself. 


Fig.  298. 

The  line  ca  (Fig.  298)  is  the  H.T.  of  the  plane  A,  and  ab'  is 
a  line  in  the  plane  A,  and  af  a  hne  in  the  H.P.,  both  perpen- 
dicular to  the  H.T.;  therefore  b'af  is  the  angle  A  forms  with 
the  H.P. 


218.    To  determine  the  traces  of  a  plane  inclined  at  an  angle  of  45° 

to  the  H.P.,  and  at  an  angle  of  35°  to  the  v.P.     Fig.  299. 

Note. — In  the  Definitions  (page  10)  a  cone  is  described  as 
being  generated  by  the  revolution  of  a  right-angled  triangle 
about  one  of  its  sides  as  an  axis.  The  hypotenuse  of  this 
triangle  is  called  a  generatrix. 

The  problem  is  generally  solved  in  the  following  manner  : 
The  generatrices  of  two  cones  forming  the  necessary  angles  to 
the  two  planes  of  projection  are  determined  with  their  axes 
meeting  at  the  same  point  on  XY.  The  sides  of  these  two 
cones  should  be  tangential  to  a  sphere,  the  centre  of  which  is  the 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION.  167 

point  on  XY  in  which  their  axes  meet.     The  plane  required  is 
tangential  to  the  bases  of  these  two  cones. 

Draw  XY.  Select  any  point  c  for  the  point  in  which  the 
axes  of  the  cones  meet,  and  draw  a  line  through  it  at  right 
angles  to  XY,  At  any  point  d  on  XY  draw  a  line  at  an  angle 
of  60°  with  it  till  it  meets  the  perpendicular  on  c  in  b' .  With  c 
as  centre,  and  radius  cd^  draw  the  semicircle  def.  Join  fb'. 
Then  def\%  the  plan,  and /^W  the  elevation  of  a  semi-cone. 


From  c  draw  the  line  eg  perpendicular  to  dU .  With  c  as 
centre,  and  radius  cg'^  draw  a  circle.  This  will  represent  the 
plan  and  elevation  of  a  quarter  of  the  enveloped  sphere. 

Draw  the  line  ah^  at  an  angle  of  45°,  tangential  to  the 
plan  of  the  sphere,  cutting  b'c  produced  in  a.  With  c  as 
centre,  and  radius  ch^  draw  the  semicircle  hk'l.  Join  al. 
Then  hal  will  be  the  plan,  and  Ik'h  the  elevation  of  another 
semi-cone. 

From  a  draw  the  line  m7i  tangential  to  the  semicircle  y^^; 
i.e.  the  base  of  the  horizontal  semi-cone. 

From  b'  draw  the  line  b'ln  tangential  to  the  semicircle  Ik'h  \ 
i.e.  the  base  of  the  vertical  semi-cone. 

Then  a7n  is  the  H.T.  and  b'm  the  V.T.  required. 


i68  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Fig.  300  is  a  perspective  view  showing  this  construction.  The 
horizontal  semi-cone  is  dotted  in  each  instance. 

There  is  another  method  of  finding  the  traces  for  an  oblique 
plane,  viz.  by  first  finding  the  projections  of  a  line  perpendicular 


Fig.  300. 

to  the  plane  required,  and  then  drawing  the  traces  at  right 
angles  to  these  projections.  This  will  be  more  easily  understood 
by  referring  to  the  set-square  B  (Fig.  298). 

Let  Op  represent  a  line  at  right  angles  to  on\  and  perpen- 
dicular to  the  plane  B.  Then  op  is  the  horizontal  projection, 
and  o'p  the  vertical  projection  of  this  line  {Op)  ;  and  the  H.T.  ;;?<?, 
and  the  V.T.  inti  ^  are  at  right  angles  to  these  two  projections. 


{For  Exercises  see  p.  226,) 


CHAPTER   XV. 

SECTIONS  OF   SOLIDS,    CONSTRUCTION  OF   SECTIONAL 
AREAS. 

A  section  is  defined  as  the  intersection  of  a  solid  by  a  plane. 
This  plane  is  called  the  cutting  plane,  and  in  the  following 
problems  it  is  given  inclined  at  different  angles  to  both  the 
co-ordinate  planes.  The  surface  of  the  solids  cut  through  are 
projected,  and  the  true  shapes  of  the  sectional  area  are 
"  constructed." 


219.  To  project  a  cube  of  V  edge,  standing  on  the  H.P.,  and  inclined 
at  an  angle  of  30  to  the  v. P.,  intersected  by  a  cutting  plane 
inclined  to  the  H. P.  at  an 
angle  of  45",  and  perpendi- 
cular to  the  V.P.  ;  the  plane 
to  intersect  both  the  hori- 
zontal faces  of  the  cube. 
Fig.  301. 

Draw  the  plan  adcd  of  the 
cube,  and  carry  up  projectors 
from  the  points,  |"  above  XY, 
and  join  them  for  the  elevation. 

Find  the  traces  of  the  cutting 
plane  (Prob.  218). 

Where  the  v.T.  cuts  the  ele- 
vation in  the  points  e'  and  /', 
drop  projectors  which  will  in- 
tersect the  plan  in  the  lines  e/i  ' 
and  /£.  afgche  is  the  plan  of 
the  cut  surface  of  the  cube,  and  e'a'c'f  the  elevation. 


I70 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


The  sectional  surface  can  be  "  constructed  ■'  by  rotating  thf 
projecting  surface  of  the  section  on  either  the  h.t.  or  V.T. 

To  rotate  the  plan  of  the  section  on  the  H.T.  Draw  lines  at 
right  angles  to  H.T.  from  the  points  of  the  plan,  and  make  the 
lengths  of  these  lines  from  the  H.T.  equal  to  the  distances  of 
the  corresponding  points  on  the  V.T.  from  XY  ;  e.g.  to  obtain 
the  point  C,  set  off /tC  equal  to  e'c\  and  so  on  with  each  of  the 
other  points.  Join  them,  as  shown,  to  complete  the  construction  l 
of  the  sectional  surface. 

To  rotate  the  sectional  surface  on  the  V.T.  Draw  the  perpen- 
diculars from  the  points  e\  a\  ^,  /',  and  make  the  lengths  of 
these  lines  equal  to  the  distances  of  the  corresponding  points 
below  XY  ;  e.g.  make/'G'  equal  to  mg.,f'Y'  equal  to  inf.,  and  so 
on  with  the  other  points.     Join  them  as  shown. 

220.  To  project  a  quadrilateral  prism  10 V'  long,  with  a  base  6" 
square,  standing  on  its  base  on  the  H.P.,  with  its  longer  edges 
parallel  to  the  v.  p.,  and  one  of  its  sides  inclined  to  the  v.  p.  at 
an  angle  of  60^     Intersect  the  prism  with  a  plane  parallel  to 

XY,  and  inclined  to 
the  H.P.  at  an  angle 
of  30'.  Scale  J^  full 
size.     Fig.  302. 

Project  the  prism 
(Prob.  171).  Find  the 
traces  of  the  cutting 
plane  (Prob.  218). 

At  any  convenient 
point  e  draw  the  line 
E/  at  right  angles  to 
XY  cutting  the  H.  and 
V.  traces.  With  e  as 
centre,  and  radius  ^E, 
draw  an  arc  till  it  meets 
XY  vcif.    Join  e'f.     efe' 


Fig.  302. 


is  the  angle  the  cutting  plane  forms  with  the  H.P. 

Draw  lines  from  each  point  in  the  plan  perpendicular  to  ^E, 
and  meeting  it  in  the  points  C,  B,  D,  A.  With  e  as  centre,  and 
each  of  these  points  as  radii,  draw  arcs ;  and  where  they  meet  XY 
draw  perpendiculars  till  they  meet  ^yin  the  points  C',  B',  D',  A'. 


SECTIONS   OF   SOLIDS. 


171 


From  these  points  draw  horizontal  hnes  till  they  meet  projectors 
drawn  from  the  corresponding  points  in  the  plan  in  the  points 
c\  b\  d^  a'.     Join  these  points  for  the  elevation  of  the  section. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area.  Draw  perpendiculars  to  e'/aX 
the  points  C,  B',  D',  A',  and  make  their  lengths  equal  to  the 
distances  of  the  corresponding  points  in  the  plan  from  the  line 
^E  ;  e.g.  make  C'C"  equal  to  Cf,  B'B"  equal  to  B<^,  and  so  on 
with  the  other  points,  and  join  them. 

221.  Project  a  regular  hexag-onal  prism  9V'  long,  with  Stt"  sides, 
standing  on  its  base  on  the  H.P.,  with  one  of  its  faces  inclined 
to  the  V.P.  at  an  angle  of  58  .  Intersect  the  prism  by  a  plane 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  55'  with  the  H.P.,  and  46  with  the  v.p., 
the  plane  to  cut  through  the  base  of  the  prism.  Construct  on 
the  H.P.  the  sectional  area.     Scale  ^.i  full  size.     Fig.  303. 

Project  the  prism  (Prob.  185).     P^ind  traces  of  cutting  plane. 

Draw  lines  from  the  points  of  the  plan  parallel  to  the  H.T. 
till  they  meet  XY,  then  draw  perpendiculars  to  XY,  till  they 
meet  the  V.T.  in  the  points 
C,  A',  D',  F',  E'.  From 
these  points  draw  horizontal 
lines  till  they  meet  projectors 
drawn  from  the  correspond- 
ing points  of  the  plan  in  the 
points  c\  d\  e\f\  a\  b\  and 
join  them  as  shown.  This  is 
the  elevation  of  the  section. 

To  construct  the  true  shape 
of  the  section,  we  rotate  the 
plan  abcdef  on  the  H.T.  From 
e  draw  the  line  eg  parallel  to 
the  H.T.,  and  equal  in  length 
to  the  height  of  ^'above  XY. 

Draw  lines  from  each  of 
the  points  in  the  plan  at  right 
angles  to  the  H.T. :  the  one 
drawn  from  e  will  intersect  the  H.T.  in  //.  With  this  point  as 
centre  and  the  radius  kg.,  draw  an  arc  till  it  meets  the  line  from 
e  produced  in  E.  Find  all  the  other  points  in  the  same  way  as 
shown. 


Fig.  303. 


172 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


The  student  should  observe  that  the  Hue  JiK  is  the  true 
length  of  the  line  he.  A  simpler  method  of  obtaining  the 
length  of  these  lines  is  as  follows. 

Note. — The  true  length  of  a  projected  Hne  is  equal  to  the 
hypotenuse  of  a  right-angled  triangle,  the  base  of  which  is 
one  of  its  projections,  and  the  altitude  the  perpendicular  height 
of  the  other  projection. 

Let  kd  represent  the  horizontal  projection  of  a  line,  and  Yid' 
its  perpendicular  height.  From  k  set  off  on  the  H.T.  k7J  equal 
to  Kd'.  Then  the  distance  between  7i  and  d  will  be  the  true 
length  of  the  line  kd.  Set  this  distance  off  from  k  on  dk 
produced.  This  will  give  the  point  D.  The  other  points 
can  be  found  in  the  same  manner. 


222.    Project  a  regular  hexagonal  prism  10 V'  long-,  with  3^ 

lying  on  one  of  its  faces  on  the  H.P.,  with  its  longer  edges 
inclined  to  the  v.p.  at  an  angle  of  17°.  Intersect  the  prism 
with  a  plane  inclined  at  an  angle  of  50°  to  the  h.p.  and  56°  to 

the  v.p.  ;  the  plane  to 
intersect  all  its  longer 
edges.  Construct  on  the 
v.p.  its  sectional  area. 
Scale  jV  full  size.  Fig. 
304- 
Project  the  prism  (Prob. 
186). 

Find  the  traces  of  the 
cutting  plane  (Prob.  218). 

Let  BC  be  the  side  of  the 
prism  resting  on  the  H.P. 
Join  AD.  Then  BC,  AD, 
and  EF  are  horizontal  lines, 
and  B'A'  and  B'F'  their 
heights  above  XY. 

Note. — A  horizontal   Hne 
contained  by  a  plane  would 
Fig.  304-  be  drawn  parallel  to  the  H.T. 

on  plan,  and  parallel  to  XY  in  elevation. 

As  be  is  on  the  H.P.,  it  must  coincide  with  the  H.T.     Where 
the  lines  F'  and  A'  produced  meet  the  V.T.,  drop  perpendiculars 


SECTIONS   OF   SOLIDS.  173 

till  they  meet  XY,  and  then  draw  lines  parallel  to  the  H.T. 
Where  these  lines  intersect  the  lines  of  the  plan  they  will 
determine  the  points  of  the  section.     Join  them  as  shown. 

Carry  up  projectors  from  these  points  till  they  meet  the 
corresponding  lines  in  the  elevation,  and  join  them. 

Note. — The  projectors  are  omitted  in  several  of  these 
problems  to  save  confusion,  but  the  points  in  plan  and  eleva- 
tion bear  corresponding  letters  throughout,  so  they  can  be  easily 
recognised. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area  on  the  V.P.  Draw  lines  from 
each  of  the  points  in  the  elevation  at  right  angles  to  the  v.T. 
Take  the  distance  of  point  e  below  XY  as  ^E',  and  set  it  off  on 
the  v.T.  from  g  as  gh.  Set  off  gY!'  equal  to  he\  the  hypotenuse 
of  a  right-angled  triangle,  as  described  in  the  preceding  problem. 
Find  the  other  points  in  the  same  way,  and  join  them  as  shown. 

223.  Project  a  regular  pjrramid  standing  on  its  base  on  the  H.P., 
with  its  sides  inclined  to  the  V.P.  at  an  angle  of  45' ;  the  cutting- 
plane  to  be  inclined  at  an  angle  of  43^  to  the  H.P.  and  70°  to 
the  V.P.     Construct  the  sectional  area  on  the  V.P.     Fig.  305. 

Project  the  pyramid  (Fig.  248). 

Find  the  traces  of  the  cutting  plane  (Prob.  218). 

Produce  the  diagonal  eg  till  it  meets  the  H.T.  in  E.  Draw 
the  projector  EE',  and  from  E'  draw  a  line  parallel  to  the  V.T. 
Where  this  line  meets  the  edges  of  the  pyramid  in  b'  and  d'  will 
determine  two  points  in  the  section.  Drop  projectors  from 
these  points  till  they  meet  the  corresponding  hues  of  the  plan 
in  the  points  b  and  d. 

The  lines  forming  the  section  of  this  pyramid  are  really  the 
intersection  lines  of  two  planes  ;  the  cutting  plane  being  one, 
and  each  side  of  the  pyramid  the  other  plane.  We  know  that 
the  line  of  intersection  between  two  planes  must  have  its  .trace 
where  the  traces  of  the  two  planes  intersect.  Produce  three 
sides  of  the  base  of  the  pyramid  till  they  meet  the  H.T.  in 
the  points  k^  m,  and  /.  These  are  the  traces  of  the  lines 
required.  Draw  a  line  from  k  through  b^  and  produce  it  till 
it  meets  the  diagonal  fh  in  a.  Draw  lines  from  jn  and  /  in 
the  same  manner  till  they  meet  the  diagonals  in  d  and  c. 
Join  dc.     This  will  complete  the  plan  of  the  section. 


174 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


To  determine  the  elevation  of  the  points  a  and  c.  With 
centre  o^  and  radii  oa  and  oc,  draw  arcs  till  they  meet  the 
diagonal  es[  in  the  points  7t  and/.  Draw  projectors  to  these 
points  till  they  meet  the  edges  of  the  pyramid  in  the  points  n' 


Fig.  305. 

and  p'.  Draw  horizontal  lines  from  these  points  till  they  meet 
the  other  edges  of  the  pyramid  in  the  points  c'  and  a!.  Join 
the  points  as  shown,  to  complete  the  elevation  of  the  section. 

Another  method  of  obtaining  the  section  of  this  pyramid  is 
to  assume  a  horizontal  line  q'r'  in  any  convenient  position  in 
the  elevation,  and  drop  a  projector  from  r'  till  it  meets  the 


SECTIONS   OF   SOLIDS. 


175 


diagonal  eg  in  r.  Draw  rt  parallel  to  the  base  gh.  Produce 
q'r'  till  it  meets  the  v.T.  in  /.  Draw  a  projector  from  /  till  it 
meets  XY  in  s.  Draw  a  line  from  s  parallel  to  the  H.T.  till  it 
meets  the  line  r/  in  11.  Then  ii  is  a  point  in  the  plan  of  the 
section,  which  can  be  completed  from  the  traces  k,  ;;/,  and  /,  as 
previously  described. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area  ABCD,  proceed  in  the  manner 
described  in  the  preceding  problem. 


224.  To  project  a  section  through  a  right  vertical  cone  :  the  cutting 
plane  to  be  perpendicular  to  the  v.  P.  ;  to  be  inclined  at  an 
angle  of  45°  to  the  axis  of  the  cone,  but  not  to  intersect  its 
base.     Fig.  306.     This  section  is  an  ellipse. 

Let  DE  be  the  elevation  of  the  section.     Divide  it  into  any 


Draw  the  axis  of  the  cone, 

'% 
•if 


number  of  equal  parts,  e.g.  six. 
and  through  the  divisions  on  DE 
draw  lines  parallel  to  the  base  of 
the  cone. 

The  plan  of  the  section  is 
determined  by  first  finding  a 
succession  of  points  in  the  curve, 
and  then  drawing  a  fair  curve 
through  them.  We  will  take  the 
points  dd  as  an  example.  With 
C  as  centre,  and  a  radius  equal 
to  G'H  {/.e.  the  radius  of  the  cone 
at  the  level  of  &'),  draw  an  arc  till 
it  meets  a  projector  drawn  from 
d'  in  the  points  dd.  Proceed  in 
the  same  manner  with  the  other 
points,  and  draw  a  fair  curve 
through  them.  Fig.  306. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area.  Draw  the  line  D'E'  in  any 
convenient  position,  parallel  to  DE,  and  draw  hnes  from  each 
of  the  divisions  on  DE  at  right  angles  to  D'E'.  Take  the 
distance  Gd  from  plan,  and  set  it  off  on  each  side  of  G"  in  the 
points  d"d".  Find  all  the  other  points  in  the  same  manner,  and 
draw  a  fair  curve  through  them. 


176 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


225.  To  project  a  section  through  a  right  vertical  cone  ;  the  cutting 
plane  to  be  parallel  to  the  side  of  the  cone  and  perpendicular 
to  the  V.P.     Fig.  307.     This  section  is  a  parabola. 

Let  D'E'  be  the  elevation  of  the  section.     Divide  it  into  any 

number  of  parts — it  is  better 
to  have  the  divisions  closer 
together  towards  the  top. 
Draw  horizontal  lines  through 
these  divisions. 

The  plan  is  determined  by 
finding  a  succession  of  points 
as  in  the  preceding  problem. 
We  will  take  the  points  bb 
as  an  example. 

With  C  as  centre,  and  a 
radius  equal  to  the  semi- 
diameter  of  the  cone  at  the 
level  of  the  division  b\  i.e. 
G'H,  draw  an  arc  till  it  meets 
a   projector   from    b'   in    the 

points  bb.     Find  the  other  points  in  the  same  manner,  and  draw 

a  fair  curve  through  them. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area.     Draw  the  hne  D"E"  in  any 

convenient  position  parallel  to   D'E',  and  draw  lines  at  right 

angles  to  it  from  the  divisions  on   D'E'.     Take  the  distance 

Qb  from  plan,  and  set  it  off  on  each  side  of  G"  in  the  points  b"b". 

Proceed  in  the  same  manner  with  all  the  other  points,  and  draw 

a  fair  curve  through  them. 


Fig.  307. 


226.  To  project  a  section  through  a  right  vertical  cone;  the  cutting 
plane  to  be  perpendicular  to  the  H.P,  and  inclined  at  an  angle 
of  50°  to  the  V.P.     Fig.  308.     This  section  is  an  hyperbola. 

Let  DE  be  the  plan  of  the  section.  From  C  draw  the  line 
(Zd  perpendicular  to  DE.  With  C  as  centre,  and  radius  Qd^ 
draw  an  arc  cutting  AB  in  n.  Draw  the  projector  nn' .  n'  is 
the  vertex  of  the  section.  Divide  the  height  g'ji'  into  any 
number  of  divisions, — they  should  be  made  closer  together  near 
the  vertex, — and  draw  horizontal  lines  through  them  till  they 
meet  the  sides  of  the  cone. 


SECTIONS   OF   SOLIDS. 


77 


The  elevation  of  the  section  is  determined  by  first  finding  a 
succession  of  points,  and  then  drawing  a  fair  curve  through 
them.     We  will  take  the  points  b'b'  as  an  example. 

With  the  point  C  on  plan  as  centre,  and  a  radius  equal  to 
G'H  (the  semi-diameter  of  the  cone  at  the  level  of  b'\  draw  arcs 


intersecting  the  line  DE  in  the  points  bb.  Draw  projectors  to 
these  points  till  they  meet  the  line  drawn  through  G'H  in  the 
points  b'b' .  Find  the  other  points  in  the  same  manner,  and 
draw  a  fair  curve  through  them. 

If  the  cutting  plane  were  perpendicular  to  both  the  co-ordinate 
planes,  gh  would  be  the  plan,  and  g'ji'  the  elevation  of  the 
section  of  the  cone. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area.  Draw  the  line  ii'g"  in  any 
convenient  position  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  cone.     Produce 


178 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


the  divisions  on  7ig' .  Take  the  distance  db  from  plan,  and  set 
it  off  on  each  side  of  G"  in  the  points  b"b".  Find  all  the  other 
points  in  the  same  way,  and  draw  a  fair  curve  through  them. 

As  the  three  preceding  problems  are  conic  sections,  their 
sectional  areas  could  be  constructed  by  the  methods  described 
in  Chap.  XI.  (Plane  Geometry),  but  we  must  first  determine 
the  major  and  minor  axes  of  the  ellipse,  and  the  directrices  and 
foci  of  the  parabola  and  hyperbola. 

We  will  illustrate  by  a  perspective  view  (Fig.  309)  the 
principle  of  the  relation  between  the  directrix  and  focus  of  a 

parabola,  and  after- 
wards apply  it  to  the 
ellipse  and  hyperbola. 

ACB  is  a  cone,  and 
DEGF  the  cutting  plane. 
H  is  a  sphere  touching 
the  cutting  plane,  and 
inscribed  in  the  upper 
portion  of  the  cone.  A 
line  drawn  from  c,  the 
centre  of  the  sphere, 
perpendicular  to  the 
cutting  plane,  will  meet 
it  in  /,  which  is  the 
focus  of  the  parabola. 
The  plane  KLNM," 
containing  the  circle  of  contact  between  the  sphere  and  the 
cone,  intersects  the  cutting  plane  in  the  line  ag^  which  .is  the 
directrix  of  the  parabola. 

A  line  joining  the  centre  of  the  sphere  with  the  circle  of 
contact,  as  ce^  is  perpendicular  to  the  side  of  the  cone. 
Compare  this  figure  with  Fig.  228  (Plane  Geometry). 
Let  us  now  refer  to  Fig.  307.  cfe  is  the  inscribed  sphere, /is 
the  point  of  contact  with  the  cutting  plane,  ce  is  perpendicular 
to  the  side  of  the  cone,  and  e  determines  the  level  of  the  plane 
containing  the  circle  of  contact.  A  horizontal  line  drawn 
through  e  till  it  meets  the  cutting  plane  produced  in  d  will 
determine  the  position  of  the  directrix. 

Draw  a  line  from  y"  perpendicular  to  the  cutting  plane  till  it 


SECTIONS   OF   SOLIDS. 


179 


meets  the  line  D'E'  in  /' :  this  is  one  of  the  foci  of  the  elhpse, 
A  hne  drawn  from  d  perpendicular  to  the  cutting  plane  will 
determine  the  directrix  ag. 

The  line  D'E'  is  the  major  axis  of  the  ellipse,  and  if  we 
bisect  this  line  by  another  at  right  angles  to  it,  and  obtain  the 
position  of  the  points  K  and  L  in  the  same  manner  as  we 
determined  the  points  b"b'\  KL  will  be  the  minor  axis.  We  can 
obtain  the  other  focus  and  directrix  by  setting  off  their  distances 
on  the  opposite  side  of  KL  ;  or  we  could  construct  another 
sphere  in  the  lower  part  of  the  cone,  and  obtain  them  as 
already  described. 

In  Fig.  y:>'j^  the  same  construction  as  previously  described 
will  determine  the  position  of  the  directrix  and  focus  ;  and  as  it 
bears  corresponding  letters,  the  student  should  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  understanding  it.     Compare  Fig.  307  with  Fig.  309. 

The  same  thing  applies  to  Fig.  308. 


227.  To  project  the  section  of  a  rig-lit  vertical  cylinder ;  the  cutting 
plane  to  be  inclined  at  angle  of  36'  with  the  H.P.  and  73'  with 
the  V.P.,  hut  not  intersecting  the  base.  This  section  is  an 
ellipse.     Construct  the  sectional  area  on  the  H.P.     Fig.  310. 

Project  the  cylinder 
(Prob.  203). 

Find  the  traces  of 
the  cutting  plane  (Prob. 
218). 

Assume  a  vertical 
plane  passing  through 
the  axis  of  the  cylinder, 
and  perpendicular  to  the 
cutting  plane.  Draw  ab 
perpendicular  to  the  H.T. 
Draw  a  projector  to  a  till 
it  meets  the  v.T.  in  a . 
Draw  a  projector  to  b  till 
it  meets  XY  in  b' .  Join 
cib'.  ab  is  the  H.T.  of  this 
V.  plane,  and  ctb'  the  line  in  which  it  intersects  the  cutting  plane. 

Draw  a  projector  to  o  till  it  meets  ab'  in  o' . 


i8o  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Divide  the  plan  by  diameters  into  eight  equal  parts,  one 
of  these  diameters,  dh,  being  in  the  H.T.  of  the  V.  plane. 
Projectors  to  dh  will  give  d\  h',  two  of  the  points  in  the  section. 
Produce  the  diagonal  ie  till  it  meets  the  H.T.  of  the  cutting 
plane  in  7n.  Draw  the  projector  in7n\  and  draw  a  line  from  in' 
through  d.  This  will  give  the  corresponding  points  z\  e\  in 
the  elevation. 

Produce  the  diameter  jf  till  it  meets  XY  in  fi.  Draw  a 
perpendicular  to  XY  at  ft  till  it  meets  the  V.T.  in  n'.  Draw  a 
line  from  Jt'  through  d.  This  will  give  the  corresponding  points 
/',/'  in  the  elevation.    Find  the  points  c'^g*  in  the  same  manner. 

Draw  a  fair  curve  through  these  points  for  the  elevation 
of  the  section. 

Any  number  of  points  in  the  curve  could  be  found  in  the 
same  manner  by  drawing  additional  diameters  to  the  plan, 
but  eight  points  are  generally  deemed  sufficient. 

To  construct  the  sectional  area.  Find  the  points  B,  H,  F,  D, 
(Prob.  221),  and  complete  the  ellipse  (Prob.  1 57,  Plane  Geometry). 

228.  To  project  the  section  of  a  sphere ;  the  cutting  plane  to  be 
inclined  at  an  angle  of  35'  with  the  H.P.,  and  74'  with  the  V.P. 
Fig.  311. 

Find  the  traces  of  the  cutting  plane  (Prob.  218). 

As  a  sphere  is  a  continuous  surface  without  any  edges  or 
angles,  it  will  be  necessary  to  assume  certain  fixed  lines  upon  its 
surface  in  order  to  determine  where  the  cutting  plane  will  inter- 
sect it ;  meridians  and  parallels  are  best  suited  for  this  purpose. 

Project  the  sphere  with  meridians  and  parallels  (Prob.  207). 
It  will  be  better  to  arrange  the  meridians  on  plan  so  that  one 
of  them  is  parallel  to  the  H.T. 

Assume  a  V.P.  perpendicular  to  the  cutting  plane  and  con- 
taining the  axis  of  a  sphere.  Let  ab  be  the  H.T.  of  this  plane, 
and  db'  the  line  in  which  it  intersects  the  cutting  plane.  Where 
this  line  intersects  the  axis  will  determine  <?',  and  where  it 
intersects  the  meridian  dd'  will  give  two  points  in  the  section. 

Produce  the  meridian  jk  on  plan  till  it  meets  the  H.T.  in  ?t. 
Draw  the  projector  im',  and  draw  a  line  from  7t\  through  o\ 
till  it  meets  the  meridian  j'k'.  These  are  two  more  points  in 
the  section. 


SECTIONS    OF   SOLIDS. 


iSi 


Produce  the  meridian  ef  till  it  meets  XY  in  /.  Draw  a 
perpendicular  at  /  till  it  meets  the  V.T.  in  /'.  Draw  a  line 
from  /',  through  o\  till  it  meets  the  meridian  f  e\  giving  two 
more  points  in  the  section.  Obtain  the  points  h'  and  g'  in  the 
same  manner,  and  draw  a  fair  curve  through  all  the  points  found. 


Fig.  3". 


Drop  projectors  from  each  of  these  points  till  they  meet  the 
corresponding  meridians  on  plan,  and  draw  a  fair  curve  through 
them. 

These  projections  are  ellipses.  They  could  also  be  found  by 
first  projecting  their  conjugate  diameters,  and  then  completing 
them  as  in  Problem  157. 

The  true  shape  of  the  section  is  of  course  a  circle.  To  obtain 
its  radius,  bisect  cd  in  j,  and  draw  a  line  tii  through  s  parallel 
to  the  H.T. ;  st  is  the  radius  required  ;  tu  is  the  major  axis,  and 
/r^the  minor  axis  of  the  ellipse. 


I82 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


EXERCISES. 


1.  Draw  the  plan  of  a  right  pyramid  2j"  high,  base  an  equilateral 
triangle  of  2"  side.  The  pyramid  stands  on  its  base,  and  the  upper  part 
is  cut  off  by  a  horizontal  plane  i"  above  the  base.  Indicate  the  section 
clearly  by  light  shading.  (April,  '96.) 

2.  An  elevation  is  given  of  a  regular  hexagonal  prism  with  its  bases 
horizontal  (Fig  312).  Draw  its  plan.  Also  show  the  true  form  of  the 
section  made  by  the  inclined  plane  shown  at  bn.  (April,  '00.) 


Fig.  312 


Fig.  314- 


3.  The  diagram  (Fig.  313)  shows  the  end  elevation  of  a  right 
prism  if"  long  with  square  base,  and  a  horizontal  plane  Im  cutting  the 
prism.     Draw  a  plan  of  the  portion  below  Im.  (April,  '98. ) 

4.  The  diagram  shows  (Fig.  314)  the  plan  of  a  portion  of  a  sphere. 
Draw  an  elevation  upon  the  given  line  xy.  (June,  '98.) 

5.  Plan  and  sectional  elevation  are  given 
(Fig.  315)  of  a  short  length  of  moulding  which 
has  been  cut  across  for  "  mitreing  "  by  a  vertical 
plane  shown  in  plan  at  ////.  Determine  the  true 
form  of  the  section.  (June,  '97.) 

-^  6.  A  right  square  pyramid,  edge  of  base  i|", 
height  2",  is  cut  by  a  plane  which  contains  one 
edge  of  the  base,  and  is  inclined  at  45°  to  the 
plane  of  the  base.  Draw  the  plan  of  the  section, 
and  if  you  can  its  true  form.  (June,  '99. ) 

7.    A  sphere  of  \"  radius  has  a  portion  cut  off 
by   a  horizontal  plane  g"  above   its   centre,   and 
another  portion   by   a   vertical  plane  passing  ^" 
from  the  centre.      Draw  a  plan  of  what  remains 
Fig.  315-  of    the    sphere.       The    section    must   be   clearly 

indicated  by  lightly  shading  it.  (June,  '97. ) 

8.  A  right  cone,  height  2^"  ,  radius  of  base  i",  stands  with  its  base  on 
the  horizontal  plane.  A  sphere  of  i"  radius  rests  on  the  horizontal 
plane  and  touches  the  cone.  Draw  a  plan  and  elevation  of  the  two 
solids,  showing  clearly  your  construction  for  finding  the  centre  of  the 
sphere.  Show  also  the  true  form  of  the  section  of  each  solid  by  a 
horizontal  plane  ^"  above  the  centre  of  the  sphere.  (April,  '02.) 

i^For  fm-ther  Exercises  see  p.  228. ) 


PART   III. 


DESIGN. 


CHAPTER     XVI. 

The  eye  and  the  ear  are  both  pleasantly  affected  by  regularity 
of  effect.  The  ear  treats  as  music  the  even  beats  of  the  air,  and 
in  the  same  way  the  eye  is  a  very  accurate  judge  of  evenness 
and  regularity.  It  is  strange  how  unevenness  distresses  the  eye ; 
for  instance  if  the  hnes  of  this  page  were  unequal  distances 
apart,  the  effect  would  be  very  irritating. 

But  there  is  a  further  parallel  between  music  and  de- 
coration. A  discord  has  an  effect  on  the  enr  which  may  be 
described  as  unsatisfying,  and  the  "Resolution  of  the  Discord" 
is  called  for  to  satisfy  the  demand  for  evenness,  which  has 
been  temporarily  violated. 

In  the  same  way,  in  decoration,  the  eye  demands  regularity, 
even  uniformity  of  treatment  ;  while  at  the  same  time  it  has  a 
feeling  that  unevenness  or  the  interruption  of  uniformity  is 
pleasurable,  if  supplemented  by  regularity  in  the  whole  design. 
The  two  precisely  similar  spires  of  Cologne  or  Coutances  are 
not  altogether  satisfying,  because  of  their  want  of  contrast ; 
the  eye  is  not  challenged  by  contrast  into  attention  to  detail. 
This  constitutes  the  special  beauty  of  the  twin,  though  dis- 
;similar,  spires  of  Lichfield  or  St.  L6,  where  the  eye  is  piqued  by 
the  discord  into  the  discovery  of  the  prevailing  harmony  of 
■design. 

These  principles  should  guide  us  in  decorative  design. 
Regularity  must  prevail  in  the  main,  with  the  unexpected  to 
afford  and  challenge  interest. 


i84  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Construction  Lines  on  "w^hich  Patterns  are 
arranged. 

To  cover  a  wide  space  with  regularity  of  form  is  an  ancient 
device  of  man  ;  and  in  fact  the  old  Greeks  were  better  versed 
in  its  secrets  than  are  we  of  this  age.  And  yet,  if  we  note 
their  methods  carefully,  we  may  observe  that  geometrical 
balance  was  the  secret  of  their  success.  To  map  out  a  sur- 
face with  a  geometrical  network,  and  to  fill  it  with  balanced 
forms  satisfying  to  the  eye,  seemed  to  them  second  nature. 
Slowly  we  are  regaining  the  same  instinct,  and  the  beautiful 
decorations  of  modern  artists  are  the  product  of  dihgent  study 
of  geometrical  design. 


1 

1 

Fig.  316. 


Fig.  317. 


Fig.  318. 


Fig.  319. 


A  net  is  the  simplest  aid  to  mapping  out  a  surface,  and  we 
have  in  Fig.  316  this  groundwork  of  design,  a  square  net  like 
a  tennis  net ;  and  in  Fig.  317  a  45°  net,  rectangular,  and  each 
hne  making  equal  angles  of  45°  with  the  horizon.  Fig.  318  is  a 
60°  net,  covering  the  surface  with  a  vertical  diamond  or  lozenge : 
Fig.  319  a  30°  net,  forming  a  horizontal  diamond  or  lozenge. 
This  mapping  out  of  the  whole  surface  by  a  network,  or  skeleton, 
must  be  the  first  step,  as  it  is  the  geometric  basis  for  the 
pattern,  the  unit  of  which  will  be  the  subject  of  discussion  later. 


DESIGN. 


i8s 


The  geometric  framework  must  be  prepared  before  the  pattern 
which  it  is  to  carry.  It  will  be  noticed  that  in  these  nets  certain 
lines  are  emphasized,  showing  how  the  simple  net  may  be  the 
basis   of  a    more   complicated  network.      A   square    net   with 


xxix 

>< 

M>^>^jx 

y 

><i 

X!xp^ 

Vy/ 

W\-y\;^Ay' 

\^ 

V 

XP\D\ 

Y 

vvv 

>sp\5s 

^K'Os 

XXx 

>$><p<. 

X 

44^ 

>^A>\ 

X 

xtxp-!-^.l 

xxx 

X* 

XN\ 

^i^x 

XiXX 

X 

xlxx 

xlxlx 

Fig.  320. 


Fig.  321. 


Fig.  322. 


Fig.  323.      Fig.  324. 


1 

1 

1 

■   jrn. 

- 

1      1 

n 

1    1 

n 

-  -i_ 

Fig.  326. 


Fig.  327. 


diagonals    is    shown   in    Fig.  320,   and    m    Fig. 


^,21  a 


45    net 


crossed  by  vertical  and  horizontal  lines,  which  form  octagons 
and  other  figures  In  both  Figs.  320  and  321  a  square  net  and 
a  45°  net  are  combined  and  certain  hues  are  selected.  In  Fig. 
322,  a  60°  net  with  horizontals  forms  a  network  of  equilateral 
triangles  or  hexagons.  Fig.  323  is  a  square  lattice,  and  Fig. 
324  a  square  plaid  ;  Fig.  325  a  lattice  of  45° ;  Fig.  326  a  double 


1 86 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


square  lattice,  and  Fig.  327  a  square  framework.  In  these  we 
see  how  the  choice  of  Hnes  in  a  square  net  fills  a  whole  area 
with    a    skeleton,   a  process    which    is    simply    exemplified  in 


Fig.  328. 


X 


m 


X 


m 


X 


m 


Fig.  329. 


1/ 

\ 

xxxx 

A 

X 

/ 

\\, 

X 

A. 

X 

X 

^ 

/; 

X 

X 

/ 

^ 

X 

7 

^ 

\ 

s 

XXX 

\ 

/ 

9>. 

\ 

\^ 

/ 

/ 

4 

\ 

/ 

K    TV 

Fig.  330. 


Fig.  331. 


Fig.  332. 


Fig.  333- 


Fig.  328.  Fig.  329  shows  a  skeleton  formed  by  a  square  and 
diagonals,  forming  interlacing  octagons  ;  Fig.  330,  a  roof  tiling 
made  by  the  choice  of  diagonals  on  a  square  net ;  Fig.  331  a 
diaper  constructed  in  the  same  way.      Fig.  332  is  a  triangular 


DESIGN. 


187 


framework  formed  on  a  60°  net ;  the  upper  part  is  a  drop 
triangular  framework,  the  triangles  are  only  blackened  to  define 
the  triangles  of  the  design  ;  the  lower  part  shows  a  series  of 
interlacing  triangles,  identified  by  their  blackened  centres. 
Fig.  333  is  a  hexagonal  framework  on  a  60^  net,  with  verticals. 
There  are  three  small  hexagons  to  each  triangular  form.  The 
network,  shown  in  the  lower  right-hand  corner,  being  omitted, 
the  lines  left  form  an  elaborated  skeleton  of  lines,  chosen 
regularly  and  uniformly  related  to  one  another. 


^ 


Fig-  335- 


^   Z   S   Z   \ 

/  \  /  \  / 

1 

S   z-s_z  s 

V  i;/'  ^  ^ 

1    11 

000 


moo 


Fig.  337- 


Fig.  334  is  a  framework  of  interlacing  triangles  forming  a 
star  and  outlining  a  hexagon.  Fig.  335  shows  a  framework 
in  which  interlaced  stars  all  fill  up  the  pattern  and  give  a 
hexagon  form  ;  Fig.  336,  a  framework  of  unequal  sided  octagons, 
formed  on  a  square  net.  In  Fig.  337  a  framework  of  squares 
and  stars  is  formed  on  a  square  net  which  is  shown  in  one  of 
them  ;  the  diagonals  of  the  net  construct  the  stars,  part  only  of 
the  diagonals  being  shown.  Figs.  338,  339  and  340  show  the 
development  of  simple  line  patterns,  suitable  for  band  ornament, 
formed  on  a  network.     In  Fig.  341  the  selection  of  lines  shows 


i88 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


the  development  of  a  pattern  with  the  network  omitted,  and 
Figs.  342,  343  and  344,  the  selection  of  the  rectangular  frame- 
work and  added  diagonals.  Fig.  345  is  a  plaited  band  on  a 
60°  net. 


Fig.  338. 


Fig.  330. 


M-M"i"n 


IIIIII'MI — 

Fig.  340. 


Fig.  341-  Fig.  342. 


/__y: 


Fig.  344- 


Fig.  343- 


AAAAAAA7 

Fig.  345. 


Thus  far  the  skeleton  or  framework  has  been  composed  of 
lines  selected  from  a  network  or  diagonals  of  the  net,  and  formed 
of  straight  lines  only.  It  remains  to  add  the  circle  to  the 
materials  of  construction  and  to  proceed  to  form  frameworks 
with  its  aid. 

Fig.  346.  Semicircles  are  worked  on  the  square  net  giving 
scale  work  or  imbrication,  and  Fig.  347  shows  a  scale  work  on 
a  30°  net. 


DESIGN. 


189 


Fig.  348  shows  a  framework  on  a  45°  net  formed  of  interlacing 
circles. 

Fig.  349  suggests  how,  on  a  60°  network  with  horizontals,  a 
pattern  can  be  developed  from  interlacing  circles  and  straight 
lines  outlining  a  hexagon. 


^^ 

sz 

"O" 

^^ 

^p 

K 

^^^^ 

^Xm 

» 

^ 

\ 

Fig.  351 


Fig.  349- 


Fig.  352. 


Fig.  35 


Fig.  356. 


Figs.  350-353  give  frameworks  of  circles  on  a  square  net 
the  net  of  construction  being  indicated  by  dotted  lines. 

Fig.  354  shows  the  change  which  takes  place  in  the  framework 
by  working  with  circles  on  a  45°  net. 

Fig.  355  is  a  skeleton  developed  from  selected  semicircles  on 
a  square  net,  and  Fig.  356  the  same  skeleton  with  additional 
semicircles  which  cover  the  vacant  intervals. 


I  go 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Fig.  357  is  a  complete  skeleton  ot  interlacing  circles  and  is  a 
pure  circular  pattern.  This  pattern  is  based  on  a  60°  net,  and 
it  is  an  example  of  a  simple  pattern  which  a  child  with  a  pair 
of  compasses  could  draw  as  he  fills  a  paper  with  circles. 


Fig.  358. 


^: 

X^ 

J 

V 

J 

x^x 

^ 

\ 

^ 

y 

J 

V 

J\^^          ) 

^ 

C 

~\ 

r           ^^^''"'^ 

Fig.  359- 


Fig.  360. 


Fig.  358  is  the  result  of  selecting  interlacing  circles  based  on 
the  30°  net  and  forms  a  beautiful  geometrical  pattern. 

Fig.  359  is  a  scale  work  on  a  square  net,  the  radii  of  the  circles 
being  less  than  the  side  of  the  square. 

Fig.  360  is  an  ogee  skeleton  and  Fig.  361  part  of  a  framework, 
both  resulting  from  the  selection  of  semicircles  on  a  square 
net. 

In  Figs.  362  and  363  the  selection  of  quadrants  on  a  square 
net  construct  two  very  different  skeletons  of  interlacing  ogee 
forms. 


DESTGN. 


Fig.  364  is  a  skeleton  composed  of  circles  and  semicircles  on 
a  square  net. 

Figs.  365-367  show  an  effect  of  combining  circles  and  straight 


7- 

5<< 

^  ^  ^ 

QXy^ 

^     2^ 

± 

Fig.  361. 


Fig.  362. 


^j^^j^^j^ 

¥ 

TTT^ 

Fig.  363. 


Fig.  364. 


Fig.  365- 


Fig.  366. 


Fig.  367- 


lines  on  a  square  net  ;  the  net  being  omitted,  a  framework  or 
skeleton  remains  to  receive  the  details  of  ornament. 

Figs.  368-371  show  the  effect  of  working  on  a  square  net,  with 
circles,  semicircles  and  straight  lines. 


192 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   A.ND   DESIGN. 


Fig.  372  is  a  double  scale  work  formed  by  concentric  semi- 
circles on  a  square  net. 


Fig.  368. 


i» 

/ 

-A 

V      \r 

Fig.  369. 


< 

^ 

V 

xx>c 

^ 

A 

Y 

y 

v^ 

/^ 

^ 

X 

^1 

V 

V 

r 

-N 

r 

^ 

— 

Fig.  370. 


Fig.  371- 


1 

^ 

X?ft 

L 

^^ 

^ 

J 

"^Yr         y/r     ^^ 

r 

■N^ 

-.yrvL.  jYv^  yr 

^ 

^ 

1- 

^A 

^r  V:^  v^ 

372. 


F.g.  373 


Fig.  373  is  a  framework  or  skeleton  border  on  a  square 
net. 

Fig.  374  IS  a  framework  of  quadrants  and  semicircles  with 
diagonals  on  a  square  net. 


DESIGN. 


193 


Fig.  375  is  a  simple  roll  border  formed  by  parallel  lines  and 
concentric  circles  on  a  45°  net. 


Fig.  374- 


Fig.  375. 


Fig.  376. 


Fig.  377- 


Fig.  378. 


Fig.  379. 


Fig.  380. 


Fig.  381. 


Units  of  Pattern. 

Having  shown  how  to  map  out  a  surface  by  a  network  or 
skeleton,  in  varied  ways,  we  must  now  proceed  to  discuss  the 
units  of  pattern  with  which  the  surface  is  to  be  covered.  Figs. 
376,  377  and  378  are  simple  circular  designs,  the  construction  of 
which  is  obvious  ;  in  Fig.  376,  the  circles  are  joined  by  freehand, 
forming  a  ball-flower  ornament  which  occurs  frequently  in 
'  Decorated '  Gothic  architecture.  Fig.  379  illustrates  the  varia- 
tion of  pattern  caused  by  emphasising  different  parts  of  a 
design  ;  the  two  halves  of  this  unit  are  really  different  patterns, 
though  the  lines  in  both  are  the  same.     Fig.  380  is  a  triangular 


194 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


unit ;  for  its  construction  refer  to  Problem  'j']^  page  49,  a  triangle 
drawn  to  touch  the  dotted  circle  at  CEG  gives 
the  outline.  Fig.  381  is  an  ogee  unit  constructed 
on  a  square  and  its  diagonals.  Fig.  382  is  a 
square  unit,  and  Figs.  383,  384,  units  of  inter- 
secting squares.      Fig.  385    is    a  unit    constructed 


z  L^^z: 


Fig.  383. 


Fig.  38A. 


Fig.  386. 


Fig.  387. 


Fig.  391. 
Fig.  389- 

on  a  3  by  2  rectangle  ;  Figs.  386,  387,  388  are  square 
units  formed  by  a  combination  of  circles  and  straight  lines. 
Fig.  389  is  a  square  lozenge,  enclosing  intersecting  circles  ; 
Fig.  390  consists  of  concentric  squares  and  circles,  all  enclosed 
in  an  equilateral  octagon.  Fig.  391  is  a  star  formed  by  two 
interlacing  equilateral  triangles,  with  parallel  but  not  equidistant 


DESIGN. 


'95 


sides ;  Fig.  392  is  a  square  star  unit ;  Fig.  393,  a  unit  of  interlacing 
squares,  enclosing  a  circular  design.  Fig.  394  is  a  star  hexagon 
unit.  In  Fig.  395  geometrical  design  and  freehand  are  combined 
on  an  octagon  base. 


Fig.  393- 


Fig.  394- 


Fig.  395- 


These  few  examples  of  geometrical  units  of  pattern  must 
suffice  to  show  the  principles  of  construction.  Naturally  enough, 
the  scheme  of  decorative  treatment  usually  leaves  the  trammels 
of  geometrical  design,  relying  upon  the  forms  of  flowers  and 
foliage  for  the  ideas  which  the  repeating  patterns  carry  out. 
But  the  object  in  view  has  been  attained  if  the  student  has  been 
led  to  see,  under  the  intricacies  of  decoration,  the  geometrical 
basis  on  which  it  is  constructed. 


{Fo7-  Exercises  see  p.  229.) 


196 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


The  Spacing  of  Walls  and  other  Surfaces. 

The  wall  of  a  modern  dwelling-house  is  usually  divided,  for 
decorative  purposes,  into  the  cornice,  frieze,  field,  dado  and 
skirting,  as  shown  in  Fig.  396. 


Skirting 


Fig.  396. 


The  various  methods  for  covering  such  given  spaces  with 
ornamentation  by  means  of  geometrical  patterns  are  briefly 
indicated  in  this  section.  For  the  technique  of  distributing  and 
repeating  patterns,  suitable  for  such  special  spaces,  in  any 
decorative  scheme,  the  student  should  consult  any  of  the  various 
books  on  Decorative  Design. 


DESIGN.  197 

This  chapter  aims  at  teaching  him  how  to  construct  patterns 
geometrically  :  it  is  quite  another  and  a  larger  subject  which 
must  be  separately  studied  how  to  make  geometrical  treatment 
subservient  to  the  decorator's  art. 

tmnnj     'gfHTEl     -nSZJ 


Fig.  397.  Fig.  398.  Fig.  399- 


mm. 


Fig.  400.  Fig.  401.  Fig.  402. 


Fig.  403.  Fig.  404. 


JjOOQinki 


Fig.  405.  Fig.  406. 


Fig.  407. 

(1).     Bands  and  Borders. 

A  wall  is  very  often  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  horizontal 
border  above  the  dado  ;  the  treatment  of  such  a  border  is  a  simple 
introduction  to  wall  decoration.  We  begin  with  a  set  of  bands 
called  "Greek  Frets";  these  are  represented  in  Figs.  397  to  405. 
They  are  formed  by  selecting  lines  from  a  square  net  ;  an 
introduction  was  made  to  this  in  Figs.  338,  339,  340,  where  the 
lines  of  construction  are  seen.     In  Fig.  401,  a  raking  pattern,  the 


198  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

diagonals  of  the  net  are  utilized  for  construction.  Figs.  406-408 
are  intersecting  frets,  406  being  a  Moorish  plaited  band  and  407 
an  Italian  interlacement  band  ;  408  is  a  chain  band,  and  409  a 


^        [7 


^ 


U- 


£} 


Fig.  40S. 


ig.  409. 


Fig.  418. 


straight  line  band  suggesting  a  series  of  Maltese  crosses  formed 
of  onyxes. 

With  Fig.  410  a  series  of  circular  band  ornaments  is  intro- 
duced, leading   up  to  the  wave-form  introduced  in    Fig.  414. 


DESIGN, 


199 


The  wave  and  roll  form  is  developed  in  Figs.  415  to  418, 
and  its  construction  carried  on  progressively  to  the  complicated 
rolls,  Figs.  419,  420.      Fig.  421  shows  one  of  the  effects  of  a 


Fig.  419. 


Fig.  420. 


Fig.  421, 


double  roll  combination  suggesting  to  the  student  what  a 
variety  of  interesting  designs  may  be  evolved  from  the  con- 
structions thus  built  up.  The  term  "Guilloche"  is  generally 
apphed  to  such  rolls  as  are  shown  in  Figs.  419-421. 


200  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

With  Figs.  422-424  is  commenced  a  series  of  bands  having  for 
foundation  the  combination  of  straight  and  curved  lines,  leading 


t>^^  I  iF^^^rx 


Fig.  422. 


Fig.  423. 


Ml      10 


Fig.  424. 


Fig.  425. 


Fig.  426. 


i::z: 


1^ 


Fig.  427. 


Fig. 


Fig.  429. 


^_ 


Fig.  430. 


V.-^ 


■^     X 


Fig.  431- 


Fig-  434- 


^p»n^  ^ 


Fig.  432. 


Fig.  433- 


up  to  Figs.  425,  426,  in  which  the  effect  of  such  combinations 
in  decoration  is  exemplified. 


DESIGN. 


Spiral  elements  are  introduced  in  Figs.  427  to  430,  and  the 
wave  line  in  Fig.  431  ;  and  with  these  materials  the  beautiful 
bands  given  in  Figs.  432  to  439  are  built  up.  Figs.  432,  433 
and  434  are   Greek  paintings   on    terra-cotta.      Fig.    435  is   a 


I'"!^'-  435- 


Fig.  436. 


Fig.  437- 


Fig.  43S. 


Fig.  439- 

French  mural  painting  of  the  13th  century;  Fig.  436,  a  border 
from  a  picture  by  Domenicino  (i6th  century).  Fig.  437  is  a 
Greek  terra-cotta,  and  438  an  Early  Gothic  French  ornament. 
Fig.  439  is  an  "aesthetic"  design.  The  two  "repeats"  in  these 
cases  are  a  sufficient  guide  to  the  complete  scheme. 


{For  Exeirises  sec  p.  231.) 


202  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

(2).     Defined  Areas— Walls,  Cer-ings,  Floors,  etc. 

We  come  now  to  deal  with  the  treatment  of  certain  defined 
areas  ;  hitherto  we  have  only  dealt  with  schemes  meant  for 
general  areas.  Fig.  440  indicates  the  simplest  division  of  a 
square  so  as  to  give  border  and  corners,  while  Fig.  441  only 


Fig.  440. 


Fig.  441. 


Fig.  442. 


Fig.  443- 


Fig.  444. 


Fig.  445- 


Fig.  446. 


affords  a  plain  border,  inside  which  a  Maltese  cross  divides  up 
the  space  for  further  ornamentation.  Fig.  442  shows  a  circular 
centre,  and  Fig.  443,  circular  corners.  Fig.  444  is  a  simple  indi- 
cation of  the  centre  and  corners  due  to  the  inscribed  circle,  while 
Fig.  445  shows  an  elaboration  of  the  centre  with  wide  borders. 
Fig.  446  is  a  square  design,  with  a  centre  which  arrests  the 


DESIGN. 


203 


eye  by  being  unexpected,  as  the  arms  are  not  radial.  Fig.  447 
is  a  square  ceiling  design  ;  the  top  outer  circle  is  completed  to 
show  the  construction,  the  true  design  being  given  in  the  lower 
part.  Fig.  448  is  a  panelling  for  a  ceiling  from  a  tomb  in  Rome, 
forming,  as  in  all  the  cases  we  have  been  considering,  a  skeleton 


0 

n  ^    / 

DUOL_ 

D 
0 
D 

Fig.  447. 


Fig.  448. 


Fig.  449. 


Fig.  450. 


Fig.  451. 


XX 


Fig.  452. 


i_j 


\2^^n 


Fig-  453- 


for  decorative  treatment.  Fig.  449  is  a  rectangular  space  which 
is  divided  up  by  selected  lines  of  a  square  net,  with  certain 
diagonals.  Fig.  450  is  a  square  lozenge,  separating  the  corners 
of  the  rectangle.  Fig.  451  is  a  cross  of  St.  Andrew,  with 
circular  centre,  affording  triangular  panels.  Fig.  452  shows  a 
rectangular   moulding   with    subdivision    of  the   space   in   the 


204 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


form  of  a  cross.  Fig.  453  shows  a  simple  circular  treatment 
of  a  panel  ;  Figs.  454,  455,  two  lunettes  with  circular  treatment. 
Fig.  456  is  a  simple  lunette  and  spandrels.  Fig,  457  gives  a 
subdivision  of  a  circular  space  suggesting  tracery,  and  Fig. 
458  a  trefoil  treatment.  Fig.  459  gives  the  complete  hexagonal 
system  of  circles,  inscribed  in  the  given  area,  from  which  the 
artist  may  select  or  emphasize  symmetric  arcs,  so  as  to  produce 


Fig.  454- 


Fig.  455- 


Fig.  456. 


Fig.  457 


Fig.  459- 


Fig.  460. 


an  extraordinary  variety  of  design.  Fig.  460  is  a  tracery  design, 
worked  from  the  hexagon  of  the  outer  circle.  Fig.  461  is  the 
subdivision  of  an  octagonal  area,  the  figure  being  built  on  a 
square  net ;  Fig.  462  on  the  45°  net.  Fig.  463  is  a  star  figure, 
which  is  built  up  inside  an  octagon.  This  is  a  sample  of  the 
many  dififerent  stars  which  may  be  formed  by  varying  the  radius 
of  the  dotted  circle  of  construction.     The  student  will  find  a 


DESIGN 


205 


useful  exercise  in  making  several  examples,  which  will  illustrate 
the  various  designs  which  result  from  the  change  of  this  circle. 
For  example,  if  the  radius  of  the  dotted  circle  be  made  about 
half  of  that  in  Fig.  463,  and  radii  of  the  larger  circle  be  drawn 
to  the  points  of  the  star,  we  have  the  familiar  appearance  of  the 
old  mariner's  compass  as  it  used  to  be  before  the  advent  of 
the  spider  web  of  the  Thomson  compass. 


Fig.  46 


Fig.  462. 


Fig.  463. 


Fig.  464. 


Fig.  466. 


Fig.  464  again  is  a  sample  of  the  division  of  a  hexagonal 
space  which  is  suggestive  of  many  varieties.  The  elementary 
feature,  the  joining  of  all  the  points  of  a  hexagon,  suggests  in 
appearance  the  outlines  of  a  transparent  icosahedron  :  a  star, 
inscribed  in  a  circle  is  formed  in  the  hexagon.  The  figure  itself 
can  be  amplified  by  further  outlining  the  details,  the  simple 
plan  adopted  in  the  figure  is  to  follow  each  line  with  another 
line  parallel  to  it  at  a  fixed  distance  throughout.  It  is  evidently 
possible  to  produce  a  large  variety  of  divisions  of  the  hexagon 
on  this  model,  and  the  introduction  of  circular  arcs  will  add  still 


2o6  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   3i:: 


more.     L  5,  466  the  space  treated  is  an  equilateral 

triangle  ;  here  a.  simple  plan  is  to  divide  it  either  by  a  central 
hexagon,  as  in  Fig.  465,  or  by  a  central  circle,  as  in  Fig.  466. 
In  each  of  the  examples,  th«  feature  of  doubled  and  parallel  lines 
is  introduced. 

The  object  which  is  airied  at  in  presenting  these  figures  is 
to  suggest  modes  of  setting  out  defined  areas — walls,  ceilings, 
and  floors — for  decorative  treatment.  It  is  this  general 
delineation  which  is  the  particular  aim  of  geometrical  design. 
In  the  completed  scheme,  no  doubt,  the  framework  or  scaffolding 
will  be  entirely  lost,  but  the  aim  of  the  designer  is  to  afford  a 
pleasing  arrangement  of  the  space  available  ;  and  in  such  a 
way  that  the  eye  should  not  be  arrested  by  the  ornamentation 
forming  a  simple  network. 

It  has  often  been  observed  that  a  wall  paper  for  a  sick  room 
must  not  offend  in  this  particular.  If  a  patient's  eye  is  con- 
tinually challenged  by  a  repeat  in  network  over  the  surface,  or 
a  figure  pattern  too  prominently  recurrent  over  a  large  area,  the 
mental  disturbance  is  serious.  The  mind  falls  to  counting  the 
patterns  in  wea:risome  persistence,  and  the  more  the  mind  is 
beyond  physical  control,  the  more  serious  is  the  effect. 

Hence  it  is  desirable  that  the  designer  should  practise  the 
division  of  spaces  by  forms  which  have  a  pleasing  intricacy  of 
geometrical  balance.  The  methods  here  indicated  are  only 
specimens  which  should  suggest  the  lines  which  may  be 
followed,  and  it  is  hoped  that  they  will  lead  the  student  to 
exercise  his  ingenuity  in  planning  more  serious  designs. 


[^For  Exercises  see  p.  232.) 


TION. 


ORNAMENTATION. 


CHAPTER     XVII. 

Lettering. 

It  is  very  important  for  the  student  to  be  able  to  letter  his 
drawings  well.  The  design  of  Roman  lettering  is  a  serious 
study  of  which  it  is  possible  only  to  give  the  merest  outline 
in   Figs.  467,  468.     The  basis  of  construction   is  a  square  of 


TX 


^ 


Fig.  467. 


Fig.  468. 


rectangular  net,  with  circles  to  guide  in  the  formation  of  the 
serif  The  revival  of  the  old  style  of  lettering,  with  the  serif 
inclined  as  shown  in  Fig.  467,  letter  L,  has  given  a  new  and 
interesting  impetus  to  the  artistic  study  of  lettering. 

These  two  examples  are  taken  from  Albert  Durer's  Geometrica^ 
in  which  he  gives  methods  for  drawing  Roman  capitals. 
Suppose  as  a  groundwork  a  square.  The  thick  strokes 
are  \  of  the  square  and  the  thin  strokes  are  ^^  of  the 
square.  The  serifs  are  constructed  on  circles  of  j 
diameter.  Mr.  Walter  Crane  says :  "  Letters  may  be  ...ken 
as  the  simplest  form  of  definition  by  means  of  line.  They 
have  been  reduced  through  centuries  of  use  from  their  pi'  nillve 
hieroglyphic  forms  to  their  present  arbitrary  and  fixed  vpes  : 
though  even  these  fixed  types  are  subject  to  the  Vitriation 
produced  by  changes  in  taste  and  fancy." 


2o8  GEO   "LTRICAl^'   DRAWING   AND  imSOJ^. 


Shields. 

Shields  often  appear  as  an  element  of  ornamentation,  and 
must  be  treated  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  heraldry.  It  is 
a  very  early  and  general  rule  that  metal  must  not  be  placed 
upon  metal,  nor  colour  upon  colour  ;  but  that  they  must  be 
placed  in  contrast.  '  Or,'  gold,  and  '  argent^  silver,  are  the 
metals  used,  and  '  aziire^  blue  ;  gules^  red  ;  ^ purpurea  '  vert.^ 
and  '  sable '  or  black  are  the  colours  usually  employed. 

Black  may  be  taken  here  as  indicating  metals  and  white  as 
colours.  Furs,  erynme  and  vair^  are  also  used  ;  but  of  these 
ornamentation  takes  no  account.  Figs.  469  to  472  show  the 
principal  divisions  of  shields.     Fig.  469,  checquy^  a  shield  divided 


Fig.  469. 


Fig.  470. 


Fig.  471, 


Fig.  472. 


in  chequers  or  small  squares  like  a  chessboard  ;  the  number 
varies.  Fig.  470,  quarterly^  the  field  being  divided  into  four 
quarters.  Fig.  471,  the  Pale  or  a  vertical  strip  set  upright  in  the 
middle  of  the  shield  and  one-third  of  its  breadth.  Fig,  472 
represents  a  band  division.  The  upper  part  is  the  chiefs  occu- 
pying one-third  of  the  height,  the  fcss  is  the  bar,  horizontally 
placed  in  the  middle  of  the  field. 

Among  the  other  divisions  of  the  field  must  be  reckoned  the 
chevron^  a  A -shaped  strip  and  the  cross,  usually  a  Greek  cross  of 
equal  arms.  When  plain,  this  cross  is  in  breadth  one-third  of 
the  shield  ;  but  its  varieties  are  manifold. 


Diaper,  Chequer,  Spot,  Powder. 

ct  diaper  is  a  repeated  pattern  covering  a  given  surface 
intervals  ;  for  example.  Fig.  473,  which  gives  the  appear- 


an 


encaustic  tiling  with  no  variation  of  pattern  ;  Fig.  474 
imple  of  a  chequer^  which  consists  of  a  repeat  alternately 


vviih.  v<.v:ant  spaces. 


ORNAME/TATIQTxN. 


209 


Fig.  475  is  2iSpot  pattern  ;  it  must  be  observed  that  the  spot 
pattern  has  large  regular  vacant  intervals,  the  chequer,  a  vacant 
space  equal  to  that  of  the   repeat. 


it 


Fig.  475- 


<> 


^ 


O      < 


Fig.  476. 


la 


EI 


13 


S 


a 


lara 


HSia 


H 


Fig.  477. 


Fig.  478. 


Fig.  479. 


Fig.  480. 


Powder  again  differs  from  spot  in  point  of  scale,  the  unit  of 
powdering  should  be  small  and  simple,  .  Powdering  consists  of 
small  and  insignificant  units  of  repetition  and  may  be  combined 
with  spot.  For  example,  Fig.  476  is  a  combination  of  spot 
and  powdering. 

Fig.  477  is  a  stripe  and  band  pattern.  Units  of  pattern  when 
arranged  in  narrow  lines  are  called  '  stripe,'  and  when  wider, 
'band.'  For  instance,  Fig.  478  is  the  elementary  stripe  and 
band,   the    simplest   form  of  this  decoration.      Fig.    479   is   a 

O 


2IO  GEOMETRICAL'  i5^RAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

chequered  band,  with  stripes  arranged  for  diagonal  decoration  ; 
Fig.  480  is  a  paneUing,  derived  from  bands,  and  Fig.  481  a  piece 
of  parquet  flooring.  Fig.  482  is  an  application  of  diaper  or 
chequer  in  more  elaborate  form.  It  represents  an  inlaid  work 
of  independent,  interlacing  squares.     In  Fig.  483,  crosses  are 


Fig.  4S1. 


Fig.  482. 


Fig.  4?3- 


Fig.  484. 


arranged  as  a  diaper  for  mosaic  decoration.  Fig.  484  is  a  chequer 
formed  by  a  combination  of  Greek  fret  and  square  foliage  ;  Fig. 
485  is  a  more  elaborated  diaper  or  spot  pattern  on  a  circular 
basis  and  constructed  on  a  45°  net,  which  forms  part  of  the 
design.  Fig.  486  is  a  diaper  pattern  formed  in  marble  mosaic, 
from    San    Vitale,    Ravenna.      Fig.    487,    a    ceiling    panelling 


ORNAMENTATION. 


Fig.  4S5. 


wm 


^ 


m 


u 


ilL 


.^ 


P^P^P 


1 


nr 


^ 


i: 


^ 


Fig.  486. 


Fig.  487. 


212  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 

conveying  the  impression  of  spot  and  powdering.     It  is  taken 
from  a  mediceval  enamel  in  Cologne.      Fig.  488   is    a   mosaic 


%M' 

^ 

((1^)) 

(TA )        (?•)  T 

Fig.  48E 


flooring    of    simple    construction    and    a    charming    intricacy. 
Fig.  489  is  one  panel  of  ceiling  decoration,  in  which  only  one 


Fig.  489. 


repeat  is  shown.  Fig.  490,  a  scale-work  diaper,  a  simple 
construction  if  based  on  a  45°  net.  Fig.  491,  a  very  pleasing 
combination  of  square  and  circular  treatment  suitable  for  a 
mosaic  flooring.  Fig.  492  is  a  reproduction  of  a  Byzantine 
bas-relief  from  the   Cathedral   of  San  Marco,  Venice.      It  is 


ORNAMENTATION. 


Fig.  490. 


Fig.  491- 


r 

— 

^ 

^^^^^ 

^ 

Fig.  492. 


214 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND  DESIGN. 


a  beautiful  example  of  varied  interlacing.     The  constructions 
are  extremely  simple,  and  the  efifect  is  due  to  the  unexpected, 


Fig.  493. 

which   piques   the  interest.      Fig.   493  is  an    Egyptian  ceiHng 
decoration  ;  in  reality  it  is  a  simple  diaper  and  spot  with  spiral 


■^^-^^^"^ 


r 


Fig.  494. 


construction.  Fig.  494  is  the  corner  of  a  rectangular  mosaic. 
Fig.  495  is  an  interlacement  band  ornamenting  a  northern  MS. 
of  the  eighth  or  ninth  century  ;  Fig.  496,  a  geometrical  band 
decoration  in  coloured  marble  from  the  wall  of  Mackworth 
Church,  Derbyshire.     Fig.  497,  a  band  of  Moorish  mosaic  from 


ORNAMENTATION. 


215 


Granada,  which,   it  may  be  observed,   is  interchangeable,  the 
black  and  white  spaces  being  exactly  equivalent. 


Fig.  495- 

Decoration  based  on  geometrical  construction  is  of  infinite 
variety,  and  a  thorough  familiarity  with  geometrical  relations 
will  regulate  genius  and  inspire  the  designer  with  a  just  view  of 


Fig.  496. 


^^ 


Fig.  497. 

those  forms  which  will  be  pleasing  and  restful  to  the  eye,  as  well 
as  satisfying  to  the  natural  demand  for  relief. 


{For  Exercises  see  p.  233.) 


ARCHITECTURE. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 


Arch  Forms  and  Tracery, 

The  semicircle  was  the  first  arch-form  to  appear  in  building. 
In  the  earhest  times  (Nippur,  B.C.  4000),  such  arches  were 
employed  below  the  level  of  the  ground.  The  tendency  of  the 
round  arch  to  sink  when  bearing  any  weight  led  these  early 
builders  only  to  use  it  with  that  strong  lateral  support.  The 
Romans  employed  it  largely  ;  as  their  bridges  and  aqueducts 
standing  to  this  day  exemplify.  The  Pont  du  Gard,  near 
Nimes  (B.C.  19),  is  about  160  ft.  high  and  880  ft.  long  ;  built  of 


cJeryii  circular 

Fig.  498. 


Fig.  499. 


Fig.  500. 


large  stones  without  cement,  it  affords  a  striking  example  of  the 
stability  of  the  semicircle. 

The  round  arch  may  be  semicircular,  as  Fig.  498  ;  segmental, 
as  Fig.  499  ;  "elliptic"  or  three-centred,  as  Fig.  500.  It  maybe 
"stilted,"  as  Fig.  501,  the  semicircle  being  continued  in  straight 


ARCHITECTURE.  217 


lines  ;  or  a  "  horse-shoe,"  as  Fig.  502,  the  circle  itself  being 
continued.  This  last  is  a  Moorish  feature,  the  semicircular  a 
Roman,  and  the  stilted  arch  a  Byzantine  feature. 

The  Basilica,  or  Hall,  originally  a  place  of  business,  became 
in  the  hands  of  the  Roman  builders  a  structure  of  heavy  round 


Fig.  501.  Fig.  502. 

arches  and  circular  windows.  This  form  was  adopted  for  the 
early  Christian  churches  ;  we  have  such  a  building  at  Brixworth, 
Northants. 

The  Norman  builders  (1066  to  1190)  followed  up  the  semi- 
circular brick  arches,  building  them  in  stone  ;  the  heavy  round 
pillars  with  cushioned  capitals,  and  the  heavy  arches  with 
geometrical  ornamentation  being  the  successors  of  the  Roman 
work. 

The  origin  of  the  pointed  arch  has  been  much  discussed  ;  an 
example  is  found  in  Cairo,  a  horse-shoe  arch  of  the  ninth 
century  ;  in  fact,  at  that  time,  this  form  was  regarded  by  the 
Moslems  as  their  special  emblem.  It  is  met  with  in  the 
Crusaders'  churches  throughout  the  twelfth  century.  If  in  Eng- 
land it  has  been  developed  from  Norman  arcading,  as  is  often 
supposed,  there  is  an  example  of  the  process  on  the  towers  of 
Southwell  Minster.  There  is  a  semicircular  arcading  ;  then  on 
another  face,  semicircular  arcades  intersect  ;  the  lancets  thus 
formed  become  windows  in  the  next,  and,  finally,  the  arcading 
disappears  and  lancet-headed  windows  are  seen  alone. 

The  Transitional  Period,  heavy  Norman  work  with  pointed 
arches  (about  1140  to  1200),  is  well  exemplified  in  the  arcading 
of  St.  John's  Church,  Chester  ;  best,  however,  in  the  Choir  of 
Canterbury  Cathedral. 

The  Early  English,  or  Lancet  Style  (about  1190  to  1300),  was 
thus  developed  at  the  end  of  the  twelfth  century  from  the 
circular  or  Romanesque  ;  the  lancet  windows  (Fig.  503)  and  the 
clustered  pillars  (Fig.  543)  giving  elegance  and  lightness. 
Characteristic  ornament  was  introduced,  and  a  style  grew  up 
which  is  essentially  English. 


2lJ 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


At  this  time  also  Tracery  begins  to  appear,  apparently 
developed  as  follows.  Lancet  windows  are  placed  together  ;  in 
Salisbury  Cathedral,  our  great  instance  of  a  complete  Early 
English  building,  are  seen  combinations  of  two  to  even  seven 
lancet  windows  together.    Again,  three  windows  are  often  placed 


Fig.  504. 


together,  the  middle  window  being  higher  than  the  other  two. 
The  three  would  be  treated  as  one  window,  one  arch  moulding 
including  them  all.  Again,  two  lancet  windows  are  placed  close 
together  with  a  trefoil  or  quatrefoil  (Fig.  512)  above  them,  and 
are  treated  as  one  window  ;  in  Westminster  Abbey,  a  small 
triangle  appears  besides  the  small  quatrefoil.  This  "wall 
tracery "  led  to  "  plate  tracery,"  where  the  wall  is  thinned  to  a 


Fig.  506. 


single  piece  of  stone  ;  and  plate  tracery  led  to  "bar  tracery," 
where  the  wall  between  windows  becomes  a  bar,  and  the 
quatrefoil  becomes  a  geometrical  design  in  the  arch. 


ARCHITECTURE. 


219 


This  leads  to  the  Geometrical  Period  (about  1260  to  1320), 
and,  at  this  point,  the  study  of  tracery  begins.  The  window  is 
divided,  according  to  its  size,  by  a  number  of  vertical  bars  or 
"mullions"  ;  the  arch  is  equilateral  (Fig.  504)  and  filled  with 
circles,  trefoils  and  curved  triangles  in  strictly  geometrical 
design.  The  "  element  "  of  the  design  (Fig.  509)  is  the  skeleton 
showing  the  centres  of  the  circles  of  the  tracery.  The  element 
of  some  windows  is  nothing  but  a  45°  network,  with  quatrefoils 
as  a  unit  of  pattern.  The  element  (Fig.  509)  will  form  an 
interesting  exercise  for  the  student  to  complete,  and  the  ruined 
window  at  the  end  of  the  book  (p.  262)  will  be  found  a  more 
difficult  problem  of  the  same  sort.  In  the  Geometrical  Period, 
circular  foils  (Fig.  512)  alone  are  used  ;  in  the  last  quarter  of  the 
thirteenth  century,  pointed  foils  (Fig.  513)  are  introduced. 

The  Decorated  Period  (about  1300  to  1375).  The  simplicity 
of  style,  so  far  described,  led,  in  the  hands  of  ingenious  designers, 
to  flowing  curves,  such  as  Figs.  511,  515,  518  suggest.  This 
flowing  style  is  a  purely  English  development  ;  it  may  be  called 
Flowing  Decorated  (about  131 5  to  1360).  The  "ogee"  arch 
(Fig.   507)  and  the  pointed  foiled  arch  are  introduced  ;    also 


Fig.  508. 


bands  of  wavy  foliage  of  a  natural  design.     But  this  leads  us 
beyond  the  scope  of  Geometrical  Design. 

It  seems,  however,  that  the  excess  of  ornament  led  to  a  return 
of  simpler  forms  in  the  last  quarter  of  the  fourteenth  century, 
and  introduced  the  Perpendicular  Style  (about  1400  to  1545)- 
This  deserves  our  attention  because  of  its  geometrical  character. 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Straight  lines  are  the  feature  of  this  style  in  place  of  the  flowing 
lines  of  the  later  Decorative  Period,  circular  lines  and  circular 
cusping.  Horizontal  transoms  are  introduced  into  the  large 
windows  at  this  period,  and  become  a  decorative  feature.     The 


I 

1/ 

% 

Fig.  510. 


P^ig.  509. 


Fig.  51 


enclosing  square  which  is  used  for  construction  in  the  element 
509  becomes  the  outline  of  door  and  window.  The  four-centred 
arch  is  due  to  this  period  (Fig.   508). 

This,  again,  is  a  style  which  is  peculiarly  English,   and  is 
more  appreciated  nowadays.     Perhaps  it  is  too  mechanical,  and 


Fig.  512. 


Fig.  513- 


there  may  be  too  much  repetition  of  ornament  ;  but  to  this 
period  belong  the  great  East  Anglian  churches,  and  such 
masterpieces  as  the  Tower,  Choir,  and  Lady  Chapel  of  Gloucester 


ARCHITECTURE. 


221 


Cathedral.     It  forms  a  grand  close  to  the  development  of  our 
English  Church  Architecture. 


Fig-  517- 


Fig.  518. 


Greek  and  Roman  Mouldings. 

Mouldings  have  been  called  the  alphabet  of  architecture  ; 
they  are  the  elements  which  determine  and  give  expression 
to  the  parts  of  a  building. 

The  simple  forms  of  moulding  are  : 

The  Roman  ovolo,  a  quadrant  (Fig.  519). 


S 


C 


Fig.  519- 


Fig.  520. 


Fig.  521. 


The  cavetto,   or  hollow  (Fig.   520),   which   is   the  reverse  of 
the  ovolo. 

The  torus,  or  half-round  (Fig.  521). 


222  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 

Other  mouldings  and  cornices  or  other  designs  can  be  made 
by  arranging  these  with  flat  spaces,  above,  below,  or  between 
them. 

A  fillet  (Fig.  522)  is  a  small  flat  face,  and  the  torus  when 
small  is  called  a  bead  or  astragal  (Fig.  523),  which  may  be 


Fig.  522.  Fig.  523.  Fig.  524. 

incised,  so  as  not  to  project  from  the  flat  surface.  Several 
parallel  beads  together  are  called  reeding. 

The  cyma  recta  (Fig.  524)  is  formed  by  combining  ovolo 
and  cavetto,  the  hollow  being  uppermost,  and  is  suitable  for 
a  cornice. 

The  cyma  reversa,  or  ogee  (Fig.  525),  a  similar  combination, 
with  the  hollow  at  the  bottom,  is  suitable  for  a  base 
moulding. 

The  scotia  is  formed  by  two  quadrants,  as  shown  in  Fig.  526. 


Fig.  525- 


Fig.  526.  Fig.  527 


The  Greek  mouldings  correspond  with  these,  but  their 
section  is  not  circular  like  the  Roman.  They^  are  for  the 
most  part  constructed  with  conic  sections,  viz.  ellipses,  or 
parabolas.     But  in  all  probability  they  were  drawn  in  by  hand. 

Some  construction  lines  for  these  mouldings  are  shown  in  the 
figures,  527,  ovolo;  528,  cyma  recta;  529,  cyma  reversa  or 
ogee  ;  530,  scotia. 


ARCHITECTURE. 


The  Bird's  Beak  or  Hawk's  Beak  moulding  (Fig.  531)  is 
common  in  Greek  Doric  architecture.  It  is  a  cyma  recta 
surmounted  by  a  heavy  ovolo  which  casts  a  bold  clear  shadow 


Fig.  529. 


Fig.  530. 


Fig-  531 


over  the  cyma.  It  is  particularly  interesting,  because  it  dis- 
appears from  architecture  entirely  after  the  best  period  of 
Athenian  art. 

Greek  architecture  is  distinguished  by  the  grace  and  beauty 
of  its  mouldings  ;  it  has  been  remarked  that  their  sections 
are  mostly  elliptic.  They  are,  however,  not  regular  curves  ; 
they  must  be  drawn,  rules  cannot  be  given  for  describing 
them.  Symmetry,  proportion,  and  refinement  are  the  charac- 
teristics of  Greek  ornament. 

The  mouldings  of  Roman  origin  are  in  general  form  the 
same  as  the  Grecian,  but  their  contour  is  bolder  and  section 
circular. 

The  ornamentation  of  Roman  mouldings  was  no  doubt 
borrowed  from  Greece,  but  it  is  less  restrained.  Roman 
architecture  is  overdone  with  ornamentation  ;  foliage  and 
various  subjects  in  relief  covering  every  moulding  and  surface. 


Fig-  532- 


Fig-  533- 


One  or  two  characteristic  specimens  of  ornamentation  may 
be  given.  Fig.  532  is  the  egg  and  tongue  or  arrow  on  the 
Greek  echinus  or  ovolo  ;  and  Fig.  533  the  egg  and  dart  on  a 


224 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND    DESIGN. 


Roman    ovolo.       A    bead    or    astragal    may    be   divided    up, 

as    Fig.    534.       Figs.    535    and    536    -^ \/^\/- — V^ 

are  typical  ornamentations  of  torus     V         TV  /\        f\  J 
moulding.  Fig.  534- 


Fig.  535-  Fig.  536. 

Fig.  537  is  a  Greek  leaf  ornament  for  cyma  reversa  from 
the  Erechtheum  at  Athens,  and  Fig.  538  a  Roman  leaf  ornament 
for  the  same  type  of  moulding. 


Fig.  537-  Fig.  538. 

Gothic  Mouldings. 

Mouldings  were  developed  contemporaneously  with  the  other 
features  of  Gothic  architecture.  In  the  Norman  period,  as  might 
be  expected,  these  are  square  and  circular  in  section. 

The  stock  Norman  moulding  (Fig.  539)  consists  of  a  broad 
hollow  surmounted  by  a  broad  fillet,  from  which  it  is  cut  off  by 
a  small  sunk  channel ;  in  fact,  the  hollow  is  set  off  by  '  quirks '  or 
returns. 


Fig.  539- 


Fig.  540. 


A  plain  round  projection  is  frequently  found  with  a  narrow 
fillet  above  it,  the  quirks  being  chamfered  (Fig.  540).  This 
moulding  is  called  a  bowtel. 


ARCHITECTURE. 


225 


There  are  very  deep  mouldings  over  the  round  Norman 
doorways,  consisting  simply  of  squares  and  circles,  at  Iffley, 
Oxford,  for  example  (Fig.  541). 


Fig.  541- 


Fig.  542. 


The  Early  English  architects  developed  this  style  of  mould- 
ing, retaining  circular  forms  and  almost  entirely  eschewing  ogee 
or  reversed  curves.  A  single  specimen  only  need  be  given, 
part  of  a  doorway,  at  Woodford,  Northants  (Fig.  542). 

It  may  be  noticed  here  that  fillets  are  freely  run  down  the 
face  of  circular  mouldings,  that  each  circle  is  defined,  and  that 
there  is  no  returned  curve.  These  may  be  taken  as  the  simple 
characteristics  of  Gothic  mouldings. 


Gothic  Piers. 

One  architectural  feature  which  should  be  mentioned  is  the 

©development  of  the  simple  circular 
and  square  pier  of  the  Norman 
style  into  the  elaborate  piers  of  the 
Perpendicular  period. 

The  massive  Norman  pier  in  the 
hands  of  the  early  Enghsh  builders 
was  lessened  in  size  and  had  shafts 
set  round  it,  as  Fig.  543,  a  specimen 

Ofrom  Salisbury  Cathedral  or  the 
north  transept  of  Westminster 
Abbey.      The    shafts  increased  in 

Fig.  54^. 

number  and  were  incorporated  in 
the  body  of  the  pier,  still  preserving  a  circular  contour. 

p 


zb 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


The  contour  became  of  a  lozenge  plan  in  the  style  called 
Decorated,  and  the  number  of  pillars  is  much  increased.  The 
shafts  were  arranged  diamond  wise,  so  many  as  would  stand 
close  together,  with  only  a  fillet  or  small  hollow  between  them. 


i:Z\ 


Fig-  544- 


Fig-  545- 


Fig.  544  shows  a  Decorated  pier  at  Dorchester,  Oxfordshire, 
and  Fig.  545  a  Perpendicular  pier  from  Rushden,  Northants. 


{For  Exercises  see  p.  235.) 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES 

FROM  EXAMINATION  PAPERS   OF   THE 
BOARD   OF  EDUCATION 


ORTHOGRAPHIC   PROJECTION   (Ch.    XIV.). 

1.  A  plan  and  elevation  are  given  of  a  l)uUress  projecting  from  a 
wall  (Q.  i).  Draw  a  fresh  elevation  on  a  vertical  plane  which  makes 
an  angle  of  45°  with  the  plane  of  the  wall. 


Q.I. 

2.  The  end  elevation  is  given  (Q.  2)  of  a  small  cofter  or  caddy,  the 
length  of  which  is  to  be  3".  The  lid  has  four  sloping  faces,  which  all 
make  the  same  angle  (30°)  with  the  horizontal.  Draw  the  plan  of  the 
lid. 


228 


GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


3.  The  plan  is  given  (Q.  3)  of  an  octagonal  tray  or  dish,  the  height 
of  which  is  |".  Make  an  elevation  on  the  given  xy.  Only  the  visible 
lines  need  be  shown  in  elevation,  and  the  thickness  of  the  material  is 
to  be  neglected. 

4.  The  diagram  (Q.  4)  represents  a  doorway  in  a  wall,  the  door 
being  shown  opened  at  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  surface  of  the  wall. 
Draw  an  elevation  of  the  door  when  closed,  t'.e.  showing  the  true  form 
of  the  panels.  On/j'  the  door  need  be  drawn,  not  the  surrounding 
mouldings.     Your  construction  'uusi  be  shown. 


Q-5- 


5,  The  plan  is  given  (Q.  5)  of  a  square  slab,  a5  being  one  edge  of  a 
square  base.  Draw  an  elevation  on  a  vertical  plane  at  right  angles  to 
ad.  Show  in  plan  the  section  made  by  a  horizontal  plane  containing 
ad. 


Q.  6. 


I.  —  .....J 


Q.7. 


6.  The  plan  and  end  elevation  are  given  (Q.  6)  of  a  simple  hut. 
Draw  an  elevation  on  a  vertical  plane  w^hich  makes  an  angle  of  30" 
with  the  long  walls  of  the  hut.  (N.B. — Only  the  visible  lines  need  be 
shown. ) 

7.  The  diagram  (Q.  7)  shows  an  elevation  and  section  of  an  opening 
in  a  wall.  Make  a  second  elevation  when  the  face  of  the  wall  makes 
an  angle  of  45°  with  the  vertical  plane  of  projection. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES. 


229 


8.  The  diagram  (Q.  8)  shows  an  elevation  of  a  square  slab,  Ji B 
being  one  side  of  a  square  face,  3"  long.  Draw  the  plan  of  the  slab, 
and  show  a  cylindrical  hole  of  2"  diam.  pierced  through  its  centre. 


9.  The  plan  is  given  (Q.  9)  of  a  square  prism,  of  which  AB  represents 
a  square  face,  3"  each  side.  Determine  the  elevation  of  the  prism  on 
the  given  xy,  and  add  the  elevation  of  a  circular  hole  of  2"  diameter 
piercing  the  centre  of  the  prism. 

10,   The  diagram  (Q.   10)  shows  a  perspective  sketch   of  part  of  a 
buttress.     Make  an  approximate  sketch  plan  and  a  side  elevation. 


SECTIONS  OF  SOLIDS  (Ch.  XV.). 

1.   Make  an  approximate  sketch  plan,  and  also  a  sectional  elevation, 
of  the  mortar  of  which  a  perspective  sketch  is  given  (Q.  i;,  assuming 


that  the  inside  form  is  a  hemisphere.  Show  clearly  any  construction 
you  would  suggest.  The  size  ot  your  drawing  should  be  about  3  times 
that  of  the  diagram. 


230  GEOMETRICAL  DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


2.  A  right  cylinder  of  2"  diameter  is  cut  by  a  plane,  making  an 
angle  of  30°  with  the  axis  of  the  cylinder.  Show  the  true  form  of  the 
section. 

3.  The  plan  is  given  (Q.  3)  of  a  right  cone  (diameter  of  base,  2^"), 
of  which  y  is  the  vertex.  Make  an  elevation  on  the  given  xy,  and  show 
the  section  by  a  vertical  plane  parallel  to  the  base  and  i"  from  it. 


DESIGN. 

CONSTRUCTION  LINES  AND  UNITS,  pp.   184-195. 

1.  Sketch  four  illustrations  of  ornament  formed  by  circle?,  and 
explain  the  object  they  fulfil  in  certain  cases. 

2.  Draw  clearly,  with  instruments  or  freehand,  the  geometrical  basis 
on  which  the  given  "diaper"  pattern  (Q.  2)  is  constructed.  Plan  the 
scale  of  your  diagram  to  show  two  "repeats"  of  the  pattern  in  a 
width  of  3^".  Show  5  or  6  repeats  in  all.  (Only  sufficient  of  the 
ornamental  detail  need  be  sketched  to  indicate  its  position.) 


Q.  2.  Q.  3 

3.  Sketch,  with  instruments  or  freehand,  07ie  unit  of  the  given 
diaper  (Q.  3),  showing  clearly  your  method  of  setting  out  its  details. 
Make  your  drawing  about  three  times  as  large  as  the  diagram.  [The 
height  and  width  of  the  figure  are  equal.] 

4.  Draw,  freehand  or  with  instruments,  a  system  of  construction 
lines  on  which  the  given  system  of  quatrefoils  (Q.  4)  can  be  built  up. 
Show  how  you  would  determine  the  centres  of  the  arcs,  and  the  points 
of  contact.  Three  or  four  repeats  of  the  unit  should  be  indicated  about 
twice  the  size  of  the  diagram. 


MISCELLANEOUS    EXERCISES. 


5.  Show  clearly  any  geometrical  construction  you  would  think  useful 
in  setting  out  the  given  "Tudor  rose"  (Q.  5)  about  four  times  the 
dimensions  of  the  diagram.  You  need  only  sketch  so  much  of  the 
flower  as  is  needed  to  illustrate  your  construction. 


cj.  4.  Q.  5- 

6.  Draw,  with  instruments  or  freehand,  the  system  of  construction, 
lines  on  which  you  would  build  up  the  given  repeating  pattern  (Q.  6). 
Show  also  one  complete  unit  of  the  repeat. 


Q.  6. 


Q.  7. 


7.  Show  clearly  how  you  would  set  about  drawing  the  given  pattern 
(Q.  7).  Mark  what  you  consider  the  unit,  and  indicate  any  construc- 
tions you  think  needful.  Only  two  complete  adjacent  units  need  be 
shown,  about  four  times  the  scale  of  the  diagram. 

8.  Any  triangle  can  be  repeated  so  as  to  cover  a  space  without  leaving 
interspaces.  Show  how  this  can  be  done,  and  sketch  four  other  shapes, 
rectilinear  or  curved,  which  will  repeat  in  a  similar  way. 

9.  A  floor  has  to  be  covered  with  tiles  which  are  squares  and  regular 
octagons  in  shape.  Sketch  the  pattern  so  formed,  showing  clearly  how 
you  would  set  it  out,  and  marking  the  unit  of  repeat. 


232 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


SPACING  OF  SURFACES,  pp.   196-201. 

1.  Draw  a  Greek  fret  without  keys,  but  with  a  border  at  top  and 
bottom  ;  the  fret,  borders  and  spaces,  to  be  |"  wide.  Also  another  fret 
with  a  tee  and  a  border  top  and  bottom  ;  borders,  spaces  and  fret  each 
\"  wide.  Explain  the  principles  of  the  ornamentation  and  the  surfaces 
to  which  they  can  be  applied. 

2.  Draw  three  sorts  of  frets,  and  another  fret  on  the  slant,  and  an 
instance  of  frets  alternating  with  ornamented  panels,  each  i"  high. 
Explain  the  principles  and  the  surfaces  to  which  they  are  properly 
applied. 

3.  Draw  a  band  ornamented  with  square  panels  filled  in  with  some 
usual  Greek  ornament,  divided  from  one  another  by  Greek  keyed  frets, 
meeting  at  centre  line  of  panel,  with  border  top  and  bottom  :  height 
exclusive  of  border  i",  length  3|-",  to  contain  three  panels.  Explain  the 
principles  of  the  ornamentation. 


Q.5. 


4.  Make  a  drawing  of  one  unit  of  the  given  border  (Q.  4),  increasing 
the  length  of  the  "unit"  to  2\",  and  the  other  dimensions  in  proportion. 
Indicate  the  method  by  which  the  figure  should  be  constructed. 


5.  Make  an  enlarged  copy  of  one  unit  of  repeat  of  the  given  border 
(Q.  5),  the  height  of  your  drawing  being  increased  to  iA^"and  the  length 
in  proportion.  Show  a  construction  for  obtaining  the  divisions  of  the 
circle. 

6.  The  diagram  (Q.  6)  shows  half  a  circular  plate.  Indicate  a 
method  by  which  the  leading  wave  line  of  the  ornament  could  be  made 
up  of  arcs  of  circles  of  equal  radius. 

Your  drawing  should  be  three  times  the  diagram. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES. 


233 


7.    Show  the  construction  you  would  employ  in  setting  out  the  given 
border  (Q,  7). 

Not  more  than  three  repeats  should  be  drawn. 


Q.  7. 


DEFINED  AREAS,   pp.   202-206. 

1.  Show  the  construction  lines  upon  which  the  ornament  in  the 
square  panel  (Q.  i)  has  been  designed. 

2.  The  figure  (Q.  2)  shows  one  quarter  of  the  decoration  of  a  circular 
plaque.  Complete  the  circle  and  set  out  the  panels.  The  position  only 
of  the  freehand  ornament  need  be  indicated. 


Q.I. 


Q.  2. 


3.  Show  how  you  would  proceed  to  modify  the  given  figure  (Q.  3)  so 
as  to  make  the  central  panel  a  regular  octagon,  the  width  of  the  four 
side  panels  remaining  unchanged. 

4.  What  is  the  geometrical  basis  of  the  given  design  (Q.  4)  for  chip- 
carving?  (N.B. — Show  only  the  main  lines.  Do  not  attempt  to  copy 
the  figure  completely.) 


234  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


5.  Draw  a  coffered  ceiling,  6"  square,  with  beams  round  the  outside, 
with  a  circular  panel  in  the  middle,  and  four  angle  or  spandrel  panels, 
the  spacing  to  be  in  harmonic  proportion.  Ornament  the  coffers  and 
the  soffits  of  the  beams  if  you  can,  and  explain  the  principles  of  the 
ornamentation. 


ORNAMENTATION,  pp.  207-215. 

1.  Draw,  with  instruments  or  freehand,  two  different  arrangements 
by  which  the  two  given  ornaments  (Q.  i)  may  be  used,  alternating  with 
one  another,  so  as  to  form  a  '  •'  diaper  "  pattern. 

(The  ornaments  may  be  roughly  sketched  simply  to  indicate  their 
position. ) 

2.  Show  how,  by  repeating  and  reversing  the  given  lines  (Q.  2),  an 
*'  all  over  "  pattern  may  be  obtained.    Indicate  the  lines  of  construction. 


Q-  I.  Q.  2.  Q.  3.  Q.  5. 

3.  Sketch,  with  instruments  or  freehand,  an  "all  over"  diaper 
pattern  formed  by  repeating  the  given  unit  (Q.  3).  Show  nine  repeats 
of  the  unit,  with  the  leading  lines  of  the  construction.  Make  each  unit 
about  three  times  the  size  of  that  in  the  diagram.  (The  height  and 
width  of  the  figure  are  equal. ) 

4.  The  outline  of  the  diaper  pattern  formed  by  placing  repeats  of  the 
given  figure  (Q.  3)  in  contact  with  one  another  is  made  up  of  semicircles. 
Draw  at  least  four  repeats  of  the  outline  so  as  to  show  clearly  where 
centres  and  points  of  contact  of  the  semicircles  occur.  Make  each  unit 
about  five  times  the  size  of  that  in  the  diagram. 

5.  The  diagram  (Q.  5)  represents  a  stencilled  ornament  which  it  is 
desired  to  repeat  so  as  to  form  a  "diaper"  pattern.  Sketch  two  ways 
in  which  this  can  be  done,  the  repeats  of  the  unit  being  placed  adjacent 
to  one  another.  Show  four  repeats  in  each  case  about  twice  the  size  of 
the  diagram. 

6.  Indicate  clearly  a  geometrical  basis  for  the  given  repeating  pattern 
(Q.  6),  and  show  what  you  consider  to  be  the  unit.  (The  freehand 
ornament  should  only  be  shown  once.) 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES. 


235 


7.  It  is  desired  to  restore  the  complete  circular  ornament  of  which  a 
fragment  is  shown  (Q.  7).     How  would  you  do  this? 

The  restorations  of  the  dark  portions  should  be  disregarded  altogether 
in  your  drawing. 


g.  8. 


8.  Indicate  any  geometrical  construction  you  think  desirable  in  setting 
out  the  given  pattern  (Q.  8). 

Show  clearly  what  you  consider  the  unit  of  the  pattern.  (N.B. — Do 
not  try  to  copy  all  the  details  ;  only  show  enough  to  make  your  meaning 
clear.) 

9.  Draw,  with  instruments,  specimens  of  scale  work  (imbrication), 
showing  two  scales  and  a  half  to  each  in  length,  each  scale  to  be  %" 
wide.  Give  specimens  of  scales  formed  of  half  circles,  oblongs  with 
rounded  ends,  outlines  of  leaves,  leaves  with  an  outer  margin  and  ribs, 
and  one  whose  leaves  are  double  ogees  with  the  point  of  the  leaf  turned 
up,  and  with  ribs,  and  one  of  trefoils  with  margin  and  filled  with 
ornament.     State  to  what  surfaces  they  can  be  properly  applied. 


236 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


ARCHITECTURE,   pp.  216-225. 

1.    Draw  the  given  diagram  of  window  tracery  (Q.    i),  using  the 
figured  dimensions.     The  arch  is  "  equilateral." 


^■f'-^S- 


Q.  2. 


Q-3- 


2.  Draw  the  given  outline  of  window  tracery  (Q.  2),  using  the 
figured  dimensions.  The  arch  is  "equilateral"  and  all  the  arcs  are  of 
equal  radius. 

3.  Draw  the  "cyma  recta"  moulding  shown  (Q.  3),  adhering  to 
the  given  dimensions.  The  curve  is  composed  of  two  quarter- circles 
of  equal  radii,  tangential  to  one  another  and  to  the  lines  AB  and  CD 
respectively. 

4.    Draw   the    "scotia"    moulding   shown    (Q.    4).      The   curve   is 
made  up  of  two  quarter-circles  of  i"  and  ^"  radius  respectively. 


Q.  5- 


O.  6. 


5.    Draw    the 

dimensions. 


"rosette"   shown    (Q.    5),    according   to  the  figured 


6.  Draw  the  "ogee"  arch  shown  (Q.  6)  to  a  scale  of  2'  to  i". 
The  arcs  are  all  of  2'  radius.  The  methods  of  finding  the  centres  and 
points  of  contact  must  be  clearly  shown, 

7.  Draw  the  moulding  shown  (Q.  7),  adhering  strictly  to  the 
figured  dimensions.     The  arc  of  V  radius  is  a  quadrant. 

8.  Diaw  the  "  cyma  recta "  moulding  shown  in  the  diagram 
(Q.  8),  using  the  figured  dimensions.  The  curve  is  composed  of  two 
equal  tangential  arcs  each  of  f"  radius. 


MISCELLANEOUS   EXERCISES. 


237 


9.  Copy  the  cornice  given  (Q.  9),  increasing  the  total  height  to  2|" 
and  the  other  measurements  in  proportion.  "\'ou  may  draw  the  "cyma" 
moulding  by  any  geometrical  construction  that  seems  to  you  suitable. 


Q.  7. 


■■m'--> 

1 

/^ 

r      '^ 

J 

\ 

Q.  8. 

^ 

Y 

Q.  9. 

10.  How  would  you  draw  the  leading  lines  of  the  window  tracery 
given  (Q.  10)?  (N.  B. — Do  not  try  to  copy  the  whole  figure,  but  only 
clearly  indicate  your  method.) 

11.  Show  how  to  set  out  the  given  figure  (Q.  11). 

12.  Make  an  approximate  sketch  plan  or  elevation  (but  not  both)  of 
the  given  column  base  (Q.  12). 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS    IN   GEOMETRICAL 
DRAWING. 

BOARD   OF  EDUCATION. 

GENERAL   INSTRUCTIONS  TO   CANDIDATES. 

You  may  not  attempt  more  than  five  questions,  of  which  three  only 
may  be  chosen  from  Section  A,  and  two  only  from  Section  B.  But  no 
award  will  be  made  to  a  Candidate  unless  he  qualifies  in  both  sections. 

All  your  drawings  must  be  made  on  the  single  sheet  of  drawing  paper 
supplied,  for  no  second  sheet  will  b&  allowed.  You  may  use  both  sides 
of  the  paper. 

None  of  the  drawings  need  be  inked  in. 

Put  the  number  of  the  question  close  to  your  workings  of  problems, 
in  large  distinct  figures. 

The  value  attached  to  each  question  is  shown  in  brackets  after  the 
question. 

A  single  accent  (')  signifies_/^^/  ;  a  double  accent  (")  inches. 

Questions  marked  (*)  have  accompanying  diagrams. 

Your  name  may  be  written  only  upon  the  numbered  slip  attached  to 
your  drawing  paper. 

I. 

SECTION    A. 

In  this   section   you   may  attempt  three   questions  only, 

SHOWING   your    knowledge    BY   THE    USE   OF    INSTRUMENTS. 

The  constructions  must  therefore  be  strictly  geometrical,  and  not  the 
result  of  calculation  or  trial. 

All  lines  used  in  the  constructions  niust  be  clearly  shown. 

Set  squares  may  be  used  wherever  convenient.  Lines  may  be  bisected 
by  trial. 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS. 


239 


1.  Draw  a  diagonal  scale  yV  of  full  size,  by  which  feet,  inches,  and 
eighths  of  an  inch  may  be  measured  up  to  5'. 

By  means  of  this  scale  construct  a  triangle  having  its  altitude  2'  2J", 
one  side  2'  5I-",  and  base  2'  o|".  Write  down  the  length  of  the  third 
side.  (20) 

*2.  Draw  the  given  figure  by  inscribing  seven  equal  squares  within 
a  circle  of  i|"  radius.  (20) 


Q.3- 


Q.  6. 


Q.  7. 


*3.  Copy  the  given  guilloche  ornament,  making  the  radii  of  the 
circles  |",  ^",  |",  and  i"  respectively.  (16) 

4.  Describe  two  circles  of  f"  radius  touching  each  other,  and  one  of 
i"  radius  touching  the  first  two.  Then  describe  a  fourth  circle  touching 
all  these  three.  All  constructions  must  be  clearly  shown,  and  all 
contacts  indicated.  (20) 

5.  A  quadrilateral  ABCD  is  to  be  described  about  a  circle  of  |" 
radius.  AB  =  2%",  AD=2h,",  and  the  angle  BAD  is  42°.  Draw  the 
figure,  show  all  points  of  contact,  and  write  down  in  degrees  the  angle 
ADC.  Then  draw  a  similar  quadrilateral  having  the  radius  of  its 
inscribed  circle  i|".  (18) 


240  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

*6.  An  elevation  is  given  of  part  of  an  octagonal  pillar  with  square 
base.  Draw  its  plan,  and  an  elevation  on  a  vertical  plane  which  makes 
30°  with  one  of  the  vertical  faces  of  the  base.  (20) 

*7.  The  diagram  shows  the  elevation  of  a  solid  composed  of  a 
cylinder  capped  by  a  portion  of  a  sphere.  Draw  the  true  form  of  the 
section  made  by  the  plane  indicated  by  the  dotted  line.  (20) 


SECTION    B. 
In  this  section  you  may  attempt  two  questions  only. 

All    freehand    work    employed   in   this    section    must   be   neat   and 
careful,  and  its  intention  must  be  made  quite  clear. 
All  constructions  must  be  clearly  shown. 

*8.    Redraw  the  given  pattern,  with  instruments,  altering  the  pro- 
portions so  as  to  make  the  octagons  regular  and  of  |"  side.  (20) 


Q.  8. 


*9.  Show  the  geometrical  framework  on  which  the  given  pattern  is 
based.  Show  clearly  what  you  consider  the  unit  of  repeat,  and  draw 
four  repeats,  sketching  only  enough  of  the  pattern  to  make  your 
intention  plain.  (18) 

*10.  Draw  the  geometrical  constructions  you  think  necessary  in 
setting  out  the  plate,  making  your  drawing  double  the  dimensions  of 
the  print.      It  will  suffice  if  one  quarter  of  the  design  is  clearly  shown. 

(20) 

"■■"11.  Draw,  using  instruments,  one  of  the  cusped  arch-forms,  pre- 
serving, as  accurately  as  you  can,  the  proportions  of  arch  and  cusping. 
Make  your  drawing  twice  the  dimensions  of  the  print.  (20) 


EXAMINATION   PAPERS. 


241 


*12.  Make  an  approximate  sketch  plan  and  front  and  side  elevations 
of  the  flower-holder,  using  instruments  where  you  think  advisable. 
Arrange  your  drawings  so  that  one  is  projected  from  another.  (20) 


Q.  9. 


242  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


Q.  II. 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS.  243 


Q.  12. 


244 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


II. 
SECTION   A. 

1.  A  drawing  made  to  a  scale  of  ^  of  full  size  has  to  be  re-drawn  so 
that  the  dimensions  shall  be  enlarged  by  one-fifth.  Make  a  scale  for  the 
new  drawing,  showing  feet  (up  to  3'),  inches,  and  (diagonally)  eighths  of 
an  inch. 

Figure  the  scale  properly,  and  show  by  two  small  marks  on  it  how 
you  would  take  off  a  distance  of  i'  4§".  (22) 


g.  2.  Q.  5. 

■^2,  Copy  the  given  figure,  making  the  diameter  of  the  outer  circle 
38".  Show  how  to  determine  all  the  points  of  contact  between  circles 
and  straight  lines.  {20) 


Q.  6. 


Q.  7. 


3.  Two  points,  A  and  B,  are  i"  apart.  Find  a  third  point,  C,  I  "6" 
from  A  and  2"  from  B.  With  centre  A  and  radius  AB  describe  a  circle. 
Describe  a  second  circle  touching  the  first  at  B,  and  passing  through  C. 
Describe  a  third  circle  of  i"  radius  touching  the  first  two  (but  not  at  B). 

(18) 

4.  The  foci  of  an  ellipse  are  3"  apart.  A  point  Z>,  on  the  curve,  is  i" 
from  one  focus  and  3"  from  the  other.  Draw  the  ellipse  and  a  normal 
to  it  at  D.  (16) 

*5.  The  point  of  intersection  of  the  two  given  lines  being  inaccessible, 
draw  through  the  point  Z'  (i)  a  line  which  would  pass  through  the  point 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS. 


245 


of  intersection  of  the  two  given  lines,  and  (2)  a  line  making  equal  angles 
with  the  two  given  lines.  (16) 

*6.  The  diagram  shows  the  plan  of  a  right  square  pyramid.  Draw  an 
elevation.  (18) 

■^7.  The  elevation  is  given  of  an  "elbow"  formed  by  two  pieces  of 
cylindrical  piping.  Draw  the  plan,  and  also  the  true  form  of  the  inter- 
section of  the  pipes.     The  thickness  of  the  material  may  be  neglected. 

(22) 


SECTION   B. 

*8.    Show  how  you  would  set  out  a  geometrical  framework  for  the 
given  pattern,  so  as  to  exhibit  a  number  of  repeats.     Only  enough  of  the 


246 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


ornament  should  be  sketched  to  show  quite  plainly  what  you  consider 
the  unit  of  repeat.  (18) 

9.  Regular  pentagons  will  not  by  themselves  cover  a  surface.  Draw 
any  form  which  in  combination  with  regular  pentagons  would  serve  this 
purpose.  Make  a  diagram  of  the  pattern  formed,  and  show  clearly  what 
you  would  use  in  practice  as  the  unit  of  repeat.  .'  (lb) 


*10.    Show  what  geometrical  aids  you  would  employ  in  drawing  the 
square  panel  given.     Make  your  drawing  about  the  size  of  the  figure. 

(18) 

■^11.    What  geometrical  means  would  you  use  in  setting  out  the  fan 
shown?     Make  your  drawing  about  the  size  of  the  figure.  (16) 

*12.    Draw  a  plan  of  the  given  table,  showing  clearly  any  construc- 
tions you  would  use.  (18) 


EXAMINATION   PAPERS. 


247 


A=^5i--- 


ift?^ 


ii;??:«;  irrt'V   ' 


c  -.viv'ta?.. 


248 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


III. 
SECTION   A. 

1.  Make  2.  plain  scale,  to  show  feet  and  inches  up  to  5  feet,  on  which 
a  distance  of  3'  6"  is  represented  by  4I".  Finish  and  figure  the  scale 
neatly  and  carefully. 

Draw  to  this  scale  an  oblong  3'  3"  x  2'  5",  and  in  the  centre  of  it 
place  a  second  oblong  of  the  same  shape  but  having  its  longer  sides 
2'  9".  Measure  the  breadth  of  this  smaller  oblong  to  the  nearest  half- 
inch.  (20) 


Q.  2. 


Q.  3. 


Q.  4. 


Q.  6. 


Q.  7. 


*2.  Complete  half  \h^  given  figure,  which  is  made  up  of  regular 
pentagons.  Make  the  radius  of  your  enclosing  circle  2".  Show  clearly 
any  construction  you  employ.  (20) 

*3.  Copy  the  given  figure,  making  the  radius  of  the  outer  circle  if, 
and  that  of  the  inner  one  in  proportion.  (18) 

*4.  Draw  the  given  figure.  The  curves  are  to  be  composed  of  arcs 
of  circles  of  05"  and  1-5"  radii.  (20) 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS. 


249 


5.  Two  straight  lines,  AB  and  CD,  are  3"  and  3-5"  long  respectively. 
A  is  1-5"  from  C,  while  B  is  i"  from  D  and  3-5"  from  C.  Describe  two 
circles  each  touching  both  AB  and  CD,  one  passing  through  A,  the 
other  through  ^.  (16) 

*6.  The  outline  of  a  "scotia"  moulding  is  shown.  If  two  lengths 
of  this  moulding  are  "mitred"  together  at  right-angles,  show  the  true 
form  of  the  cut  surface  of  the  mitre.  (18) 

*7.  A  lamp-shade,  in  the  form  of  a  truncated  regular  hexagonal 
pyramid,  is  made  of  six  pieces  of  card,  of  the  exact  shape  and  twice  the 
size  shown.     Draw  its  plan  and  elevation  in  any  position.  (20) 

SECTION   B. 

*8.  Show,  using  instruments,  how  you  would  set  out  the  geometrical 
framework  of  the  given  openwork  panel.  None  of  the  "cusping" 
need  be  drawn.  (20) 


Q.  8. 

*9.  Draw  neatly  with  instruments  the  framework  or  "net"  of  the 
given  pattern.  Show  clearly  what  you  intend  to  be  the  unit  of  repeat, 
and  finish  not  less  than  four  of  these  so  as  to  show  repeats  both  in 
width  and  height.  (2o) 


250 


GEOMETRICxVL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


*10,  Set  out,  as  nearly  as  you  can,  the  construction  needed  for  the 
geometrical  part  of  the  ornament  round  the  semicircular  door-head  of 
which  about  half  is  shown.  Only  one  unit  of  each  ornament  need  be 
completed.     Make  your  drawing  twice  as  large  as  the  diagram.         (i8) 


Q.  9. 


EXAMINATION   PAPERS. 


251 


"^11.  Redraw  the  given  figure,  altering  the  proportions  of  the  parts  so 
that  the  sides  of  the  four  corner  panels  shall  be  exactly  half  those  of  the 
centre  panel.  Make  the  side  of  the  outside  square  3",  and  the  margins 
throughout  02"  wide.  (16) 


D 

1          I 

D 

D 

1          1 

D 

Q.   II. 

'^12.  Draw  an  approximate  sketch-plan,  with  front  and  side  eleva- 
tions, of  the  given  steps.  Arrange  your  drawings  to  show  how  one  is 
projected  from  the  other.  (18) 


252 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


IV. 

SECTION   A. 

1.  Six  feet  are  represented  on  a  drawing  by  one  inch.  Make  a  scale 
for  the  drawing  by  which  single  feet  can  be  measured  up  to  40',  and  show 
inches  diagonally. 

Figure  the  scale  properly,  and  show  by  two  small  marks  on  it  how  you 
would  take  off  a  distance  of  20'  8".  (22) 


■^2.  Make  a  copy  of  the  diagram,  using  arcs  of  I  J"  and  |"  radii  only. 
Show  clearly  how  all  points  of  contact  are  obtained.  (18) 

*3.    Copy  the  diagram,  making  the  radius  of  the  outer  circle  if". 

(20) 

■^4.  The  diagram  shows  a  symmetrical  figure  composed  of  straight 
lines  and  five  semicircles  of  equal  radii.  Draw  a  similar  figure  having 
a  total  height  of  3^".  (22) 


Q.  4. 


Q.  6. 


5.  Construct  a  regular  nonagon  of  if"  side.  Describe  a  circle  touch- 
ing all  the  sides  of  the  nonagon.  Within  the  circle  inscribe  a  regular 
nonagon  having  its  sides  parallel  to  those  of  the  first  one. 

If  you  employ  a  protractor  for  measuring  an  angle,  this  must  be 
clearly  shown  and  the  number  of  degrees  stated.  (16) 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS. 


253 


*6.  The  diagram  shows  the  elevation  of  a  short  prism,  or  slab,  the 
bases  of  which  are  eqiiilata-al  triangles.  Draw  the  plan,  and  write 
down  the  angle  which  the  bases  make  with  the  vertical  plane  of  pro- 
jection. (18) 

7.  A  right  cone,  diameter  of  base  3I",  height  2^",  has  the  plane  of  its 
base  inclined  at  45°  to  the  horizontal  plane.  Draw  the  plan  of  the  cone, 
and  of  its  section  by  a  plane  parallel  to  the  base  and  i^"  from  the  vertex. 

(20) 

SECTION   B. 

*8.  Draw  a  geometrical  framework  on  which  the  given  diaper  pattern 
may  be  constructed.     You  are  advised  to  draw  the  framework  geometri- 


Q.8. 


254 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


cally,  and  to  sketch,  freehand,  just  enough  of  the  pattern  to  illustrate 
your  meaning.  Show  very  clearly  what  you  consider  to  be  the  unit  of 
repeat.  (i8) 

*9.  The  diagram  shows  a  pattern  composed 
entirely  of  semicircles.  Show  two  other  ways 
of  arranging  semicircles  so  as  to  produce  a 
repeating  pattern,  with  the  necessary  construc- 
tions for  determining  centres.  (i6) 

•^10.  Show  what  geometrical  help  you  would 
use  in  setting  out  the  plate  shown  in  the 
diagram.  Assume  that  AB,  the  diameter  of 
the  octagon,  is  5".  (16) 

*11.    Indicate    what    geometrical    construc- 
tions you  would  employ  in  setting  out  the  circular  window  shown  in 
the  diagram.     The  "cusping"  need  not  be  shown.  (18) 


Q.  9. 


Q.  10. 


■^12.    Sketch  appro.ximate  front  and  side  elevations  of  the  chair  shown 
in  the  diagram.  (ij^j 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS.  255 


Paper  IV.     Q.  11. 


256  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


Paper  IV.     Q.   12. 


EXAMINATION    PAPERS. 


257 


SECTION   A. 

*1.  The  given  line  AB  represents  a  length  of  15  centimetres.  Con- 
struct a  scale  by  which  decimetres,  centimetres,  and  millimetres  can  be 
measured  up  to  3  decimetres.  Figure  the  scale  properly,  and  show  by 
two  small  marks  on  it  how  to  take  off  on  it  a  distance  of  263  milli- 
metres. 

By  means  of  the  scale  draw  a  ciicle  of  125  millimetres'  radius,  and  in 
it  place  a  chord  189  millimetres  long.  Write  down  in  millimetres  the 
distance  of  this  chord  from  the  centre  of  the  circle. 

(i  metre  =  10  decimetres,  or  100  centimetres,  or  looo  millimetres.) 

(20) 


B 


2.  Construct  a  regular  decagon  or  llgure  of  10  sides,  each  side  being 
1"  long.  Within  it  mscnhQ  Jive  equal  circles,  each  touching  two  of  the 
others  and  one  side  of  the  decagon. 

(N.B. — If  a  protractor  is  usecl  for  measuring  an  angle,  such  use  must 
be  clearly  shown.)  (20) 

*3.   The  curve  of  the  given  "  scotia  "  moulding  is  made  up  of  two 

quadrants  or  quarter-circles.      Draw  the  figure  from  the  given  dimensions. 

(N.B.— The  diagram  is  not  drawn  to  scale.)  (16) 


Z'4--- 

Q.  3-  Q-  4- 

*4.  The  diagram  shows  the  leading  lines  of  a  window  composed  of 
three  semicircular-headed  "  lights  "  included  under  a  three-centred  arch. 
The  side  lights  are  to  be  each  3'  wide,  while  the  middle  light  is  to  be 
2'  wide  and  to  have  the  centre  of  its  semicircle  2'  above  those  of  the 
other  two.  Parts  of  the  side  semicircles  also  form  part  of  the  enclosing 
arch.  Draw  the  figure  to  a  scale  of  2'  to  1".  Show  clearly  how  you 
obtain  all  points  of  contact.  (20] 

(N.B. — The  diagram  is  not  drawn  to  scale.) 


258 


GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 


6.  Two  fixed  lines  AB  and  CD,  of  indefinite  length,  cross  one  another 
at  an  angle  of  70°.  A  third  line  EF,  3"  long,  is  movable,  so  that  the 
end  E  travels  along  the  line  AB  while  the  end  F  travels  along  the  line 
CD.     Draw  the  complete  curve  traced  by  the  middle  point  of  EF. 

(It  will  be  sufficient  to  find  some  12  to  16  points  on  the  curve.) 

(18) 

■''6.  The  diagram  gives  the  front  elevation  of  a  regular  five-pointed 
star,  which  is  cut  out  of  material  'f  thick.  Draw  the  plan  of  the  star, 
and  also  a  second  elevation  on  a  vertical  plane  inclined  at  60°  to  that  of 
the  given  elevation.  (20) 


Q.  6. 


*7.  An  elevation  is  given  of  a  sphere  upon  which  rests  a  conical 
lamp-shade.     Draw  the  plan  of  the  shade.  (20) 


Q.  7. 


EXAMINATION   PAPERS. 


259 


SECTION  B. 

*8.  Draw  with  instruments  the  main  geometrical  construction  lines 
you  would  employ  in  setting  out  the  given  pattern.  Show  plainly  what 
you  consider  the  practical  or  working  unit  of  repeat.  (20) 


9.   Show  how  you  would  arrange  a  number  of  circular  discs  of  |" 
radius  as  a  diaper  pattern  — 

(i)  When  each  disc  touches  four  others, 
(ii)  When  each  disc  touches  six  others, 
(iii)  When  each  disc  touches  three  others. 
Draw  the  necessary  constructional  framework  in  each  case,  and  show 
clearly  what  you  consider  the  unit  of  repeat  in  each  pattern.   (20  marks). 


26o  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING  AND   DESIGN. 

_  *10.   Set  out  carefully  the  lines  of  one  quarter  of  the  given  book- 
binding, making  your  drawing  to  twice  the  scale  of  the  diagram. 


■•■11.  Make  a  modified  version  of  the  border  of  interlacing  circles 
which  the  radii  shall  be  ^",  g",  §",  and  i"  respectively.  Show  at  'l( 
two  repeats  of  the  unit. 


EXAMINATION   TAPERS. 


261 


*12.  Sketch  approximately,  in  outline,  the  plan  and  the  front  and 
side  elevations  of  the  workbox  and  its  lid  shown  in  the  diagram, 
omitting  all  merely  ornamental  details.  Arrange  your  drawings  so  as 
to  show  how  one  is  projected  from  another.  (20) 


Q,  .2. 


262  GEOMETRICAL   DRAWING   AND   DESIGN. 


Complete  the  design  of  this  ruintd  window,  following  the  indicj 
of  every  fragment  \\  hich  remains. 


Date  Due                          i 

'^^(.Y  2  ^  -S? 

QP-   -^ 

DEC  2? 

1993 

X 

Library  Bureau  Cat.  No.  1137 

WiELlS  BINDERV 
ALTHAM,  MASS. 
JAN.  1948 


NC715.S7 


^      3,  5002  00047  5942 

Spanton,  J.  Humphrey  ^v^-r«_ 

Geometrical  drawing  and  design. 


SCffi